Owner's Manual

WEB EDITION OWNER'S MANUAL

WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS. We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe you may be affected by alcohol, medication or driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed any impairment that could hinder your ability to with your safety and comfort in mind. We encour- drive. age you to familiarize yourself with the equipment Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable fed- descriptions and operating instructions in this eral safety and emission standards. If you have manual. any questions regarding your vehicle, please con- We also urge you and your passengers to wear tact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contact- seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. ing Volvo" for information on getting in touch with And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if Volvo in the United States and Canada. Contents

01 Introduction 02 Safety On-board owner's manual...... 11 Occupant safety...... 26 Integrated booster cushion – general Owner's information...... 13 Recall information...... 26 information...... 57 Contacting Volvo...... 13 Reporting safety defects...... 27 Integrated booster cushion – using...... 59 About this manual...... 14 Seat belts – general...... 28 Integrated booster cushion – stowing...... 60 Change of ownership...... 18 Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling...... 29 Child safety locks...... 61 Crash event data...... 18 Seat belt reminder...... 30 Volvo Structural Parts Statement...... 19 Seat belts – pregnancy...... 31 Information on the Internet...... 20 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)..... 31 Volvo ID...... 21 Front airbags...... 33 Open Source Software Notice...... 21 Occupant Weight Sensor...... 36 Volvo and the environment...... 22 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags...... 39 Important warnings...... 23 Inflatable Curtain (IC)...... 41 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 24 Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)...... 42 Technician certification...... 24 Crash mode – general information...... 44 01 Crash02 mode – starting the vehicle...... 45 02 Crash mode – moving the vehicle...... 45 Child safety...... 46 Child restraints...... 47 Infant seats...... 49 Convertible seats...... 51 Booster cushions...... 54 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors...... 55 Top tether anchors...... 56

2 Contents

03 Instruments and controls Instrument overview ...... 63 Tunnel detection (models with the rain Digital compass*...... 103 Information displays – introduction...... 66 sensor* only)...... 90 Power moonroof* – introduction...... 104 Eco Guide* and Power Meter*...... 69 Active Bending Lights (ABL)*...... 90 Power moonroof* – operation...... 105 Auxiliary lights*...... 91 Information displays – indicator symbols. 70 HomeLink® Wireless Control System* – Information displays – warning symbols... 72 Instrument and "theater" lighting...... 91 introduction...... 106 ® My Car – introduction...... 74 Parking lights...... 92 HomeLink Wireless Control System* – programming...... 107 Information displays – ambient tempera- Rear fog lights...... 92 ture sensor...... 75 Hazard warning flashers...... 93 Volvo Sensus...... 110 Information displays – trip odometer and Turn signals...... 93 Information display – menu controls...... 111 clock...... 76 Front interior lighting...... 94 Information display – menu overview..... 111 Inserting/removing remote key...... 76 Rear interior lighting...... 95 Information display – messages...... 112 Ignition modes...... 77 Home safe lighting...... 95 Trip computer – introduction ...... 113 Front seats...... 78 Approach lighting...... 96 Trip computer – functions, analog instrument panel...... 114 Front seats – folding backrest*...... 79 Windshield wipers...... 96 Front seats – power seat...... 79 Trip computer – functions, digital instru- 03 Rain sensor*...... 03 97 ment 03panel...... 117 Key memory – power driver's seat* and Windshield washer...... 97 door mirrors...... 81 Trip computer – Supplementary informa- Tailgate wiper/washer...... 98 tion...... 119 Rear seats – head restraints...... 82 Power windows...... 99 Trip computer – Trip statistics...... 120 Rear seats – folding backrest...... 84 Power door mirrors...... 100 Steering wheel...... 85 Power door mirrors – automatic tilting/ Electrically heated* steering wheel...... 86 retraction...... 101 Lighting panel...... 87 Heated windshield*, rear window and High/low beam headlights...... 88 door mirror defrosters...... 102 Active high beams (AHB)*...... 88 Interior rearview mirror...... 103

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3 Contents

04 Climate 05 Loading and storage 06 Locks and alarm Climate – general information...... 122 Storage spaces...... 135 Remote key and key blade...... 146 Climate – sensors...... 122 Tunnel console...... 137 Remote key – loss...... 146 Air quality...... 123 Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets...... 137 Key memory...... 147 Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*...... 123 Glove compartment...... 138 Locking/unlocking confirmation...... 147 Climate – menu settings...... 124 Vanity mirror...... 138 Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...... 148 Air distribution – general...... 124 12-volt socket in the cargo area*...... 138 Remote key – functions...... 149 Electronic climate control (ECC)...... 126 Loading – general...... 139 Remote key – range...... 150 Heated seats...... 127 Loading – roof load carriers...... 139 Detachable key blade – general informa- Temperature and blower control...... 128 Load anchoring eyelets...... 140 tion...... 151 Automatic climate control...... 128 Grocery bag holder...... 141 Detachable key blade – detaching/reinserting...... 151 Air conditioning...... 129 Cargo net – general information...... 141 Detachable key blade – unlocking...... 152 Max. defroster and electrically heated Cargo area cover...... 143 Private locking...... 152 windshield*...... 129 Steel cargo grid...... 143 Air distribution – function...... 130 Remote key – replacing the battery...... 153 Air 04distribution – recirculation...... 131 05 Keyless06 drive*– locking/unlocking...... 155 Air distribution – table...... 132 Keyless drive* – unlocking with key blade...... 156 Keyless drive* – key memory...... 156 Keyless drive* – messages...... 157 Keyless drive* – antenna locations...... 158 Locking/unlocking – from the outside..... 159 Manual locking...... 160 Locking/unlocking – from inside...... 160 Locking/unlocking – glove compartment 162

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

07 Driver support Locking/unlocking – tailgate...... 162 Active chassis* (Four C)...... 169 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – Queue Alarm – general information...... 164 Stability system – introduction...... 169 Assist...... 186 Alarm indicator...... 165 Stability system – operation...... 170 Radar sensor...... 188 Alarm – arming/disarming...... 165 Stability system – symbols and mes- Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations...... 188 Alarm signal...... 166 sages...... 172 Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols and messages...... 190 Alarm – turning off...... 166 Adjustable steering force*...... 174 Adaptive Cruise Control – troubleshoot- Alarm-related functions...... 166 Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduction...... 174 ing...... 192 Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation 175 Distance Alert – introduction...... 193 Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations 175 Distance Alert – operation...... 193 Cruise control (CC) – introduction...... 176 Distance Alert – limitations...... 194 Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set- Distance Alert – symbols and messages 196 ting speed...... 176 City Safety – introduction...... 197 Toggling between ACC and CC (stand- City Safety – function...... 198 ard Cruise Control)...... 178 City Safety – operation...... 199 06 Cruise07 control (CC) – deactivating...... 178 City Safety07 – limitations...... 199 Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction... 179 City Safety – troubleshooting...... 200 Adaptive Cruise Control – function...... 180 City Safety – symbols and messages..... 202 Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging...... 182 City Safety – Laser sensor...... 203 Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed 183 Collision warning – introduction...... 204 Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time Collision warning* – function...... 206 interval...... 184 Collision warning* – operation...... 207 Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating.. 184 Collision warning* – Cyclist detection..... 208 Adaptive Cruise Control – passing another vehicle...... 186 Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection...... 209

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Contents

Collision warning* – limitations...... 210 Park assist – introduction...... 232 BLIS* – limitations...... 249 The camera’s limitations...... 212 Park assist – function...... 232 BLIS* – messages...... 250 Collision warning – troubleshooting...... 213 Park assist – operation...... 234 Collision warning – symbols and mes- Park assist – limitations...... 235 sages...... 215 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction.... 236 Driver Alert System...... 217 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function...... 236 Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction 217 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation...... 237 Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation.... 218 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations...... 239 Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function...... 219 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations... 219 messages...... 240 Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and Park assist – troubleshooting...... 240 messages...... 220 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction...... 241 duction...... 222 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – func- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – operation...... 241 tion...... 07 223 Rear 07Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera- 07 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- tion...... 242 tions...... 224 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – guiding Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – sym- and marker lines...... 243 bols and messages...... 225 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita- Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction... 227 tions...... 245 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation...... 228 BLIS* – introduction...... 245 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations...... 230 BLIS* – function...... 246 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and BLIS* – operation...... 247 messages...... 231 BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)...... 247

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

08 Starting and driving Starting the engine...... 252 Brakes – general...... 271 Towing eyelet...... 290 Switching off the engine...... 254 Brakes – symbols ...... 273 Towing by tow truck...... 291 Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduc- Anti-lock braking system (ABS)...... 273 tion...... 254 Brake lights...... 273 Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)...... 274 engine...... 255 Parking brake – general information...... 274 Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching off the engine...... 255 Parking brake – applying...... 275 Jump starting...... 256 Parking brake – releasing...... 276 Transmission – general information...... 257 Parking brake – symbols and messages 277 Transmission – positions...... 257 Driving through water...... 278 Transmission – Geartronic...... 259 Engine and cooling system...... 279 Transmission – shiftlock override...... 261 Conserving electrical current...... 279 Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)...... 262 Before a long distance trip...... 279 Start/Stop – introduction...... 262 Driving in cold weather...... 280 Start/Stop08 – function...... 262 Refueling08 – fuel requirements...... 281 08 Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions...... 263 Refueling – octane rating...... 282 Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions...... 264 Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler door...... 283 Start/Stop – settings...... 265 Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap...... 284 Start/Stop – symbols and messages...... 266 Emission controls...... 285 ECO*...... 267 Economical driving...... 285 All Wheel Drive (AWD)...... 269 Towing a trailer...... 287 Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction...... 269 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)...... 288 Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation.. 270 Towing the vehicle...... 289

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7 Contents

09 Wheels and tires 10 Maintenance and servicing Tires – general information...... 293 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Maintenance – introduction...... 326 Tires – storage and age...... 294 – changing wheels...... 312 Maintenance – owner maintenance...... 327 Tires – tread wear indicator...... 295 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Maintenance – hoisting...... 328 – recalibrating...... 313 Tires – tire economy...... 295 Onboard Diagnostic System...... 329 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Changing a wheel – direction of rotation 296 – activating/deactivating...... 314 Booking service and repairs ...... 329 Changing a wheel – removing wheel...... 296 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Maintenance – opening/closing hood..... 331 Changing a wheel – spare wheel...... 299 – messages...... 314 Engine compartment – overview...... 332 Changing a wheel – accessing the spare Tire Monitor - introduction...... 315 Engine compartment – engine oil...... 333 wheel...... 300 Calibrating Tire Monitor...... 316 Engine compartment – coolant...... 335 Changing a wheel – installing a wheel.... 300 Tire Monitor status information...... 316 Engine compartment – brake fluid...... 336 Tire inflation – general information...... 301 Tire Monitor – messages...... 317 Engine compartment – power steering Tire inflation – checking pressure...... 302 Tire sealing system* – general informa- fluid...... 337 Tire specifications...... 303 tion...... 318 Bulbs – introduction...... 338 Tire inflation – pressure table...... 305 Tire sealing system* – overview...... 320 Bulbs – headlight housing...... 339 Loading09 specifications...... 306 Tire 09sealing system* – sealing hole...... 321 Bulbs –10 cover...... 340 Loading specifications – load limit...... 306 Tire sealing system – checking inflation Bulbs – low beam, Halogen...... 341 pressure...... 323 Tire specifications – terminology...... 307 Bulbs – high beam, Halogen...... 341 Tire sealing system* – inflating tires...... 323 Tire specifications – Uniform Tire Quality Bulbs – extra high beam...... 342 Grading...... 308 Tire sealing system* – sealing compound container...... 324 Bulbs – front turn signals...... 343 Snow chains...... 309 Bulbs – taillight housing...... 343 Snow tires/studded tires...... 310 Bulbs – license plate lighting...... 344 Tire pressure monitoring - introduction.. 310 Bulbs – cargo area lighting...... 344 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting...... 345 – general information...... 311 Bulbs – specifications...... 345

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

11 Specifications 12 Index Wiper blades – service position...... 346 Label information...... 371 Index...... 390 Wiper blades – windshield...... 347 Dimensions...... 374 Wiper blades – tailgate...... 348 Weights...... 378 Engine compartment – washer fluid...... 348 Engine specifications...... 380 Battery – symbols...... 349 Oil specifications...... 381 Battery – handling...... 349 Oil volume...... 382 Battery – maintenance...... 350 Coolant – specification and volume...... 383 Battery – changing...... 351 Transmission oil – specification and vol- Fuses – introduction...... 353 umes...... 383 Fuses – engine compartment...... 354 Brake fluid – specification and volume... 383 Fuses – glove compartment...... 358 Power steering – specification...... 384 Fuses – cargo area/trunk...... 361 Fuel tank volume – specification and volume...... 384 Fuses – engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only)...... 362 Air conditioning – specification and volume...... 384 Washing the car...... 364 10 Battery specifications...... 11 385 12 Automatic car wash...... 365 Symbols – general information...... 386 Polishing and waxing...... 365 Warning symbols...... 386 Cleaning the interior...... 366 Indicator symbols...... 387 Touching up paintwork...... 368 Information symbols...... 388 Information symbols – ceiling console.... 389 Information symbols – center console.... 389

9 INTRODUCTION 01 Introduction

On-board owner's manual • Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov- Searching for information 01 The owner's manual can be displayed on the ering commonly used functions. center console screen and you can carry out Select the symbol in the lower right-hand cor- searches for the information that you require. ner for additional information about the on- board owner's manual. To open the owner's manual, press the MY CAR button on the center console, press OK/ NOTE MENU and select Owner's manual. The on-board owner's manual cannot For basic information, see "Infotainment - • be accessed while the vehicle is mov- operating the system." The following sections ing. also provide more detailed information. • Specifications regarding your vehicle are not found in the on-board information. This information is listed in the Searching using the text wheel printed owner's manual. List of characters

Switching between character entry modes (see the following table) Surf history Use the text wheel to enter a web address. 1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter keys on the center console can also be The on-board owner's manual start page used. There are four ways of finding information articles in the on-board owner's manual: 2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results of the search will be displayed in • Searching: search for an article. the phone book. • Categories: All of the articles are sorted by category. • Favorites: Quick access to frequently read articles.

}} 11 01 Introduction

|| 01 3. To switch from letter entry mode to the Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character. Quick Guide entry mode for numbers or special char- Press and hold EXIT to erase all characters. This is a selection of articles that will help you acters, or to go view surf history, turn Pressing a number key on the center console become familiar with some of the vehicle's TUNE to one of the selections (see the while the text wheel is displayed (see the pre- most common functions. These articles can explanation in the following table) in the vious illustration) will display a list of charac- also be found in their respective categories list for switching character entry mode (2) ters. Press the desired key repeatedly to but are listed here for quick access. and press OK/MENU. enter the desired letter and continue to the Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide next letter, etc. and press OK/MENU to open an article. 123/A Toggle between letters and num- Press EXIT to return to the previous view. BC bers by pressing OK/MENU. To enter a number, press and hold the button. Navigating in an article => This leads to surf history. Turn TUNE to select a web address Categories and press OK/MENU to go to the The articles in the on-board owner's manual website. are divided into main categories and sub-categories. The same article may be listed in Go Go to the website by pressing several applicable categories to help make OK/MENU. searches easier.

a|A Toggle between upper and lower Turn TUNE to navigate in the category struc- case letters by pressing OK/ ture and press OK/MENU to open a category MENU. (indicated by the symbol) or an article (indicated by the symbol). Press EXIT to | Switch from the text wheel to the | } return to the previous view. Address: field. Use TUNE to Home move the cursor and erase char- Favorites : Returns you to the owner's manual start page. acters by pressing EXIT. Press Articles that have been marked as favorites OK/MENU to return to the text can be found here. For information about Favorites: Add/remove an article from wheel. marking an article as a favorite, see "Navigat- the list of favorites. This can also be done by pressing the FAV button on the center The number/letter keys on the ing in an article" below. console keypad. center console can also be used Turn TUNE to navigate in the list of favorites to edit the Address: field. and press OK/MENU to open an article. Highlighted link: takes you to the linked Press EXIT to return to the previous view. article. Important information: if the article contains warnings, cautions or notes, sym-

12 01 Introduction

bols for these types of information and Owner's information Contacting Volvo 01 the number of such texts in the article will Your vehicle is equipped with a screen on be displayed here. which you can display information about your In the USA: Turn TUNE to navigate among the links or vehicle's features and functions. The printed Volvo Cars of North America, LLC scroll in an article. When you have scrolled to owner's manual supplements the on-board Customer Care Center the beginning/end of an article, you can information and contains important texts, the return to the start page or a favorite by scroll- latest updates and instructions that can be 1 Volvo Drive, ing one additional step up/down. Press OK/ useful in situations when it is not practical to P.O. Box 914 MENU to activate a selection or highlighted read the information on the screen. link. Press EXIT to return to the previous Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 Changing the language used for the on-board view. information could mean that some of the 1-800-458-1552 Related information information displayed may not comply with www.volvocars.com/us • Information on the Internet (p. 20) national or local statutes and regulations. In Canada: WARNING Volvo Cars of Canada The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and for National Customer Service complying with current statutes and regu- 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 lations. It is also essential to maintain and service Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 the vehicle according to Volvo's recom- 1-800-663-8255 mendations as stated in the owner's information and the service and warranty book- www.volvocars.com/ca let. Related information If the on-board information differs from the About this manual (p. 14) printed owner's manual, the printed infor- • mation always takes precedence. • Important warnings (p. 23) • Crash event data (p. 18) • Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19)

13 01 Introduction

01 About this manual • Favorites: Quick access to frequently NOTE Reading your owner's manual is a good way read articles. The owner's manual mobile app can be to familiarize yourself with the features and • Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov- downloaded at www.volvocars.com. systems in your vehicle. ering commonly used functions. The mobile app also contains videos and • Before you operate your vehicle for the Select the symbol in the lower right-hand cor- searchable content, and provides easy first time, we recommend that you look ner for additional information about the on- navigation between the various articles. through the information found in the board owner's manual. chapters "Your Driving Environment" and Footnotes NOTE "During Your Trip." Certain pages of this manual contain informa- • Information contained in the balance of • The on-board owner's manual cannot tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the manual is extremely useful and should be accessed while the vehicle is mov- the page. This information supplements the be read after operating the vehicle for the ing. text that the footnote number refers to (a let- first time. • Specifications regarding your vehicle ter is used if the footnote refers to text in a • The manual is structured so that it can be are not found in the on-board informa- table). used for reference. For this reason, it tion. This information is listed in the should be kept in the vehicle for ready printed owner's manual. Display texts access. There are several displays in the driver’s field of vision that show messages generated by On-board owner's manual The owner's manual in mobile devices various systems and functions in the vehicle. When the printed manual refers to the on- These texts are indicated in the Owner’s board owner's manual, this pertains to the Manual by being in slightly larger type than information displayed on the center console the surrounding text and are printed in gray, screen. (for example: Change doors unlock The language used on the center console setting). screen and instrument panel can be changed Decals in the MY CAR system settings menu. There are various types of decals in the vehi- There are four ways of finding information cle whose purpose is to provide important articles in the on-board owner's manual: information in a clear and concise way. The importance of these decals is explained as • Searching: search for an article. follows, in descending order of importance. • Categories: All of the articles are sorted by category.

14 01 Introduction

Risk of injury Risk of damage to the vehicle Information 01 G031592 G031593 G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back- White ISO symbols and white text/image on a White ISO symbols and white text/image on a ground, white text/image on a black back- black or blue warning background and space black background. These decals provide gen- ground. Decals of this type are used to indi- for a message. If the information on decals of eral information. cate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle this type could result in serious injury or could result. NOTE death. The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are examples only and are not intended to be reproductions of the decals actually used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indication of how they look and their approximate location in the vehicle. The applicable information for your particular vehicle can be found on the respective decals in the vehicle.

}} 15 01 Introduction

|| 01 Types of lists used in the owner's Bullet lists NOTE information Bullets are used to differentiate a number of • Do not export your Volvo to another Procedures components/functions/points of information that can be listed in random order. country before investigating that coun- Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or try's applicable safety and exhaust actions that must be carried out in a certain For example: emission requirements. In some cases order, are arranged in numbered lists in this • Coolant it may be difficult or impossible to manual. comply with these requirements. Mod- • Engine oil ifications to the emission control sys- If there is a series of illustrations associ- Continues on next page tem(s) may render your Volvo not certi- ated with step-by-step instructions, each fiable for legal operation in the U.S., step in the procedure is numbered in the } }This symbol can be found at the lower Canada and other countries. same way as the corresponding illustra- right corner to indicate that the current topic tion. continues on the following page. • All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are Lists in which letters are used can be Continuation from previous page based on the latest product informa- found with series of illustrations in cases This symbol can be found at the upper left tion available at the time of publica- where the order in which the instructions || corner to indicate that the current topic is a tion. Please note that some vehicles are carried out is not important. continuation from the previous page. may be equipped differently, depend- Arrows with or without numbers are used ing on special legal requirements. to indicate the direction of a movement. Options and accessories Optional equipment described in this Optional or accessory equipment described manual may not be available in all mar- Arrows containing letters are used to indi- kets. cate movement. in this manual is indicated by an asterisk. Some of the illustrations shown are Optional or accessory equipment may not be • If there are no illustrations associated with a generic and may not depict the exact available in all countries or markets. Please step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure model for which this manual is are indicated by ordinary numbers. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- intended. ferently, depending on special legal require- Position lists ments. • Volvo reserves the right to make model Red circles containing a number are used changes at any time, or to change in general overview illustrations in which Contact your Volvo retailer for additional specifications or design without notice certain components are pointed out. The information. and without incurring obligation. corresponding number is also used in the position list's description of the various components.

16 01 Introduction

01 WARNING ignition must be in mode II (p. 77) or the tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun- engine must be running. Depress the brake tries. If your vehicle is involved in an accident, pedal, press the button on the front side of • All information, illustrations and specifica- unseen damage may affect its drivability the gear selector and move the selector from and safety. tions contained in this manual are based P (Park). on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note WARNING Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) that some vehicles may be equipped dif- The ABS system performs a brief self-diag- ferently, depending on special legal CALIFORNIA proposition 65 nostic test when the engine has been started requirements. Optional equipment descri- Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and driver releases the brake pedal. Another bed in this manual may not be available in and certain vehicle components contain or automatic test may be performed when the all markets. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects • Some of the illustrations shown are 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate generic and may not depict the exact or other reproductive harm. In addition, several times and a sound may be audible certain fluids contained in vehicles and model for which this manual is intended. from the ABS control module. This is normal. certain products of component wear con- • Volvo reserves the right to make model tain or emit chemicals known to the State Fuel filler door changes at any time, or to change speci- of California to cause cancer, and birth fications or design without notice and defects or other reproductive harm. Press the button on the light switch panel (see the illustration in Refueling – opening/ without incurring obligation. closing fuel filler door (p. 283)) when the vehi- Related information WARNING cle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler • Information on the Internet (p. 20) door. It will relock when closed and there will Certain components of this vehicle such as • Volvo and the environment (p. 22) air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, be an audible click. adaptive steering columns, and button cell • Important warnings (p. 23) batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Points to keep in mind Special handling may apply for service or • Do not export your Volvo to another vehicle end of life disposal. country before investigating that coun- See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ try's applicable safety and exhaust emis- perchlorate. sion requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements. Modifications to the Shiftlock emission control system(s) may render When your vehicle is parked, the gear selec- your Volvo not certifiable for legal operator is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the selector from this position, the

17 01 Introduction

01 Change of ownership Crash event data NOTE When the vehicle changes owners, all per- This vehicle is equipped with an event data EDR data are recorded by your vehicle sonal settings should be reset to the factory recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; defaults. is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like no data are recorded by the EDR under situations, such as an air bag deployment or normal driving conditions and no personal To reset, press the MY CAR button in the hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash center console followed by OK/MENU and understanding how a vehicle's systems per- location) are recorded. However, other select Settings Reset to factory settings. formed. The EDR is designed to record data parties, such as law enforcement, could related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys- combine the EDR data with the type of User data e.g., for apps, the web browser personally identifying data routinely tems for a short period of time, typically 30 and for personal settings in menus such as acquired during a crash investigation. the climate system and vehicle settings seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is should be reset to factory defaults. designed to record such data as: To read data recorded by an EDR, special For vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo • How various systems in your vehicle were equipment is required, and access to the On Call with Sensus Connect (VOC), personal operating; vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to settings stored in the vehicle should be • Whether or not the driver and passenger the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such deleted, see Changing ownership of a vehicle safety belts were buckled/fastened; as law enforcement, that have the special with Volvo On Call. • How far (if at all) the driver was depress- equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Related information ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • Volvo ID (p. 21) Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a • How fast the vehicle was traveling. number of computers whose task is to con- These data can help provide a better under- tinuously control and monitor the vehicle’s standing of the circumstances in which operation. They can also register information crashes and injuries occur. during normal driving conditions if they detect a fault relating to the vehicle’s operation and functionality. Some of the stored information is required by technicians when carrying out service and maintenance to enable them to diagnose and rectify any faults that have occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements. This information may be stored in the vehicle’s computers for a certain period of time.

18 01 Introduction

Volvo will not contribute to spreading the Volvo Cars of Canada Volvo Structural Parts Statement 01 above-mentioned information to third parties National Customer Service Volvo has always been and continues to be a without the consent of the vehicle’s owner. leader in automotive safety. However, due to national legal requirements 9130 Leslie Street and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles provide information of this type to authorities designed to help protect vehicle occupants in such as law enforcement agencies or others 1-800-663-8255 the event of a collision. who may assert a legal right to obtain such www.volvocars.com/ca Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of information. a collision. This energy absorption system Related information Volvo and service and repair facilities with including, but not limited to, structural com- Information on the Internet (p. 20) agreements with Volvo have access to the • ponents such as bumper reinforcement bars, special technical equipment required in order • Contacting Volvo (p. 13) bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, to read and interpret the information stored fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body by the vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsi- panels must work together to maintain cabin ble for ensuring that the information transmit- integrity and protect the vehicle occupants. ted to Volvo during service and maintenance The supplemental restraint system including is stored and handled in a secure manner and but not limited to air bags, side curtain air that this handling is done in accordance with bags, and deployment sensors work together applicable legal requirements. For additional with the above components to provide proper information, contact: timing for air bag deployment. For additional information, contact: Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North Amer- In the United States ica does not support the use of aftermarket, alternative or anything other than original Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Volvo parts for collision repair. Customer Care Center In addition Volvo does not support the use or 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914 re-use of structural components from an Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 existing vehicle that has been previously damaged. Although these parts may appear 1-800-458-1552 equivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts have www.volvocars.com/us been previously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has been damaged as a result of In Canada a prior collision. The quality of these used

}} 19 01 Introduction

|| 01 parts may also have been affected due to Information on the Internet Owner's manuals for earlier model environmental exposure. Additional information regarding your vehicle Volvos Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos are Related information can be found at www.volvocars.com. available in PDF format. Quick Guides and Important warnings (p. 23) • Support on the Internet supplements can also be found on the sup- • Information on the Internet (p. 20) Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR port site. Select a model and a model year • Contacting Volvo (p. 13) code below to visit the site, which is available and download the desired information. in most markets. Contact Contact information for customer support and the nearest Volvo retailer are available on the site. Related information • About this manual (p. 14) QR code to the support site • Contacting Volvo (p. 13) The information on the support site is searchable and is grouped into different categories. It includes support for e.g., Internet-based services and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC), the navigation system* and apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain various procedures such as how to connect the vehicle to the Internet via a cell phone. Downloadable information Maps Sensus Navigation system* maps can be downloaded from the support site. Mobile apps For certain model year 2014 and 2015 Volvos, the owner's manual is available in the form of an app. The VOC* app can also be found here.

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Introduction

Volvo ID Open Source Software Notice Portions of this product uses software 01 This is your personal ID that can be used to The systems in your Volvo contain certain copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The access a number of services1 free/open source and other software. FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. This product uses certain free / open source Creating a Volvo ID This product includes software under and other software originating from third To create a Volvo ID, provide your personal following licenses: email address and then follow the instructions parties, that is subject to the GNU General provided in the email that you will receive Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/ GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old- from Volvo. This can be done from: GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License licenses/gpl-2.0.html version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project • Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista • From an Internet-connected vehicle: License (“FreeType License”) and other Enter your email address in the app that 2.6.31 kernel and kernel from different and/or additional copyright licenses, requires a Volvo ID and follow the instruc- L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP) disclaimers and notices. The links how to tions provides or press the Internet con- access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3, • uBoot (based on v2009.08) nect ( ) button on the center console LGPLv3, and the other open source software • busybox (based on version 1.13.2.) and select Apps, Settings and follow the licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and GCC runtime library exception: http:// instructions provided. notices are provided to you below. Please www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html • Volvo On Call (VOC*): download the latest refer to the exact terms of the relevant libgcc_s.so.1 version of the VOC app and create a License, regarding your rights under said • Volvo ID on the start page. licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/ to provide the source code of said free/open lgpl.html source software to you for a charge covering • Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1 the cost of performing such distribution, such The FreeType Project License: http:// as the cost of media, shipping and handling, www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT upon written request. Please contact your nearest Volvo retailer. • libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3) This offer is valid for a period of at least three Related information (3) years from the date of the distribution of • About this manual (p. 14) this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support.

1 These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21 01 Introduction

01 Volvo and the environment mental refinement of conventional gasoline- FSC® Volvo is committed to the well being of its powered internal combustion engines, Volvo customers. As a natural part of this commit- is actively looking at advanced technology ment, we care about the environment in alternative-fuel vehicles. which we all live. Concern for the environment means an everyday involvement in reducing When you drive a Volvo, you become our our environmental impact. partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's Volvo's environmental activities are based on environmental impact, you can: a holistic view, which means we consider the • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. overall environmental impact of a product Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- ® ® throughout its complete life cycle. In this con- omy with improperly inflated tires. The FSC (Forest Stewardship Council ) text, design, production, product use, and symbol indicates that the wood pulp used in Follow the recommended maintenance recycling are all important considerations. In • ® schedule in your Warranty and Service this publication comes from FSC certified production, Volvo has partly or completely Records Information booklet. forests and other responsible sources. phased out several chemicals including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and cad- • Drive at a constant speed whenever pos- Related information mium; and reduced the number of chemicals sible. • Economical driving (p. 285) used in our plants 50% since 1991. • See a trained and qualified Volvo service • Tires – tire economy (p. 295) technician as soon as possible for Volvo was the first in the world to introduce inspection if the check engine (malfunc- into production a three-way catalytic con- tion indicator) light illuminates, or stays verter with a Lambda sond, now called the on after the vehicle has started. heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of this highly efficient system reduces • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC, waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc. NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the • When cleaning your vehicle, please use remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the genuine Volvo car care products. All only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC- Volvo car care products are formulated to free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system be environmentally friendly. of all models as far back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to continuous environ-

22 01 Introduction

01 Important warnings WARNING Volvo service technician before installing Please keep the following warnings in mind any accessory in or on your vehicle. Never use a hand-held cellular tele- when operating/servicing your vehicle. • Accessories that have not been approved phone while driving. Some jurisdic- • by Volvo may or may not be specifically tions prohibit cellular telephone use by Driver distraction tested for compatibility with your vehicle. a driver while the vehicle is moving. A driver has a responsibility to do everything Additionally, an inexperienced installer possible to ensure his or her own safety and • If your vehicle is equipped with a navi- may not be familiar with some of your the safety of passengers in the vehicle and gation system, set and make changes car's systems. to your travel itinerary only with the others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distrac- Any of your car's performance and safety vehicle parked. • tions is part of that responsibility. systems could be adversely affected if Never program your audio system Driver distraction results from driver activities • you install accessories that Volvo has not while the vehicle is moving. Program that are not directly related to controlling the tested, or if you allow accessories to be radio presets with the vehicle parked, vehicle in the driving environment. Your new installed by someone unfamiliar with your and use your programmed presets to vehicle. Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea- make radio use quicker and simpler. ture-rich entertainment and communication • Damage caused by unapproved or systems. These include hands-free cellular • Never use portable computers or per- improperly installed accessories may not telephones, navigation systems, and multi- sonal digital assistants while the vehi- be covered by your new vehicle warranty. purpose audio systems. You may also own cle is moving. See your Warranty and Service Records other portable electronic devices for your own Information booklet for more warranty convenience. When used properly and safely, Accessory installation information. Volvo assumes no responsi- they enrich the driving experience. Improperly • We strongly recommend that Volvo own- bility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of non- used, any of these could cause a distraction. ers install only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and that accessory installa- genuine accessories. For all of these systems, we want to provide tions be performed only by a trained and Related information the following warning that reflects the strong qualified Volvo service technician. Volvo concern for your safety. Never use • About this manual (p. 14) these devices or any feature of your vehicle in • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to • Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19) a way that distracts you from the task of driv- ensure compatibility with the performing safely. Distraction can lead to a serious ance, safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and accident. In addition to this general warning, qualified Volvo service technician knows we offer the following guidance regarding where accessories may and may not be specific newer features that may be found in safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, your vehicle: please consult a trained and qualified

23 01 Introduction

01 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Technician certification Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo CALL roadside assistance. supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Additional information, features, and benefits of this program are described in a separate Certified technicians have demonstrated a information package in your glove compart- high degree of competence in specific areas. ment. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or If you require assistance, dial: more years before a certificate is issued. In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- These professional technicians are best able VOLVO) to analyze vehicle problems and perform the In Canada 1-800-263-0475 necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition. NOTE Some vehicles may be equipped with Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect, which will allow access to the call center and additional features directly from the vehicle. This is in addition to the Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance program mentioned above. Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect will be a customer pay subscription offer after an initial complimentary trial period.

Related information • Information on the Internet (p. 20)

24 SAFETY 02 Safety

Occupant safety • Never drink and drive. Recall information Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. • If you are taking any medication, consult Information regarding recalls or other service your physician about its potential effects campaigns is available on our website at Volvo's concern for safety on your driving abilities. www.volvocars.com/us/. 02 Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 • Take a driver-retraining course. when the first Volvo rolled off the production On our website, select the tab YOUR VOLVO line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo inven- • Have your eyes checked regularly. and the heading RECALL INFORMATION will tion), safety cages, and energy-absorbing • Keep your windshield and headlights be displayed at the lower left side of the impact zones were designed into Volvo vehi- clean. screen. Enter your Vehicle Identification Num- cles long before it was fashionable or • Replace wiper blades when they start to ber for your vehicle (found at the base of the required by government regulation. leave streaks. windshield). If your vehicle has any open Recalls, they will be displayed on this page. We will not compromise our commitment to • Take into account the traffic, road, and safety. We continue to seek out new safety weather conditions, particularly with Volvo customers in Canada features and to refine those already in our regard to stopping distance. For any questions regarding open recalls for vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate • Never send text messages while driving. your vehicle, please contact your authorized hearing your suggestions about improving • Refrain from using or minimize the use of Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to automobile safety. We also want to know if a cell phone while driving. answer your questions, please contact Volvo you ever have a safety concern with your Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Mon- vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: Related information day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: • Recall information (p. 26) EST or by e-mail at [email protected]. 1-800-663-8255. • Reporting safety defects (p. 27) You may also write us at: Occupant safety reminders Volvo Cars of Canada How safely you drive doesn't depend on how National Customer Service old you are but rather on: 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 • How well you see. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 • Your ability to concentrate. • How quickly you make decisions under Related information stress to avoid an accident. • Occupant safety (p. 26) The following suggestions are intended to • Reporting safety defects (p. 27) help you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.

26 02 Safety

Reporting safety defects (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: Reporting safety defects in Canada The following information will help you report NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- If you believe your vehicle has a defect that any perceived safety-related defects in your portation, Washington D.C. 20590. could cause a crash or could cause injury or vehicle. death, you should immediately inform Trans- You can also obtain other informa- port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo 02 Reporting safety defects in the U.S. tion about motor vehicle safety from Cars of Canada Corp. If you believe that your vehicle has a http://www.safercar.gov, where you Transport Canada can be contacted at: defect which could cause a crash or can also enter your vehicle's VIN 1-800-333-0510 could cause injury or death, you (Vehicle Identification Number) to Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 should immediately inform the see if it has any open recalls. National Highway Traffic Safety Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Administration (NHTSA) in addition Volvo strongly recommends that if Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road to notifying Volvo Cars of North your vehicle is covered under a Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1 America, LLC. If NHTSA receives service campaign, safety or emis- similar complaints, it may open an sion recall or similar action, it should Related information investigation, and if it finds that a be completed as soon as possible. • Occupant safety (p. 26) safety defect exists in a group of Please check with your local retailer • Recall information (p. 26) vehicles, it may order a recall and or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC remedy campaign. However, NHTSA if your vehicle is covered under cannot become involved in individ- these conditions. ual problems between you, your NHTSA can be reached at: retailer, or Volvo Cars of North Internet: America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety http://www.nhtsa.gov Hotline toll-free at Telephone: 1-888-327-4236 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).

27 02 Safety

Seat belts – general peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the WARNING Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- occupant. Never repair the belt yourself; have this pants of your vehicle. Children should be • Seat belt maintenance work done by a trained and qualified properly restrained, using an infant, car, or Check periodically that the seat belts are in Volvo service technician only. 02 booster seat determined by age, weight and good condition. Use water and a mild deter- height. • Any device used to induce slack into gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism the shoulder belt portion of the three- Volvo also believes no child should sit in the function as follows: attach the seat belt and point belt system will have a detrimen- front seat of a vehicle. pull rapidly on the strap. tal effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a colli- WARNING sion. Never use a seat belt for more than one • The seat back should not be tilted too occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion far back. The shoulder belt must be of the belt under the arm, behind the back taut in order to function properly. or otherwise out of position. Such use • Do not use child safety seats or child could cause injury in the event of an acci- booster cushions/backrests in the dent. As seat belts lose much of their front passenger's seat. We also rec- strength when exposed to violent stretch- ommend that children who have out- ing, they should be replaced after any col- grown these devices sit in the rear lision, even if they appear to be undamaged. seat with the seat belt properly fastened.

Adjusting the seat belt Related information Most states and provinces make it mandatory • Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 29) for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. • Seat belt reminder (p. 30) Seat belt pretensioners • Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 31) All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners that reduce slack in the belts. These pretensioners are triggered in situations where the front or side impact airbags deploy, and in certain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts also include a tension reducing device which, in the event of a collision, limits the

28 02 Safety

Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling • when driving in turns Seat belts should be used by all occupants in • if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- the vehicle when it is in motion. gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is activated Buckling a seat belt 02 Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch NOTE plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) "unlocked" and you can move freely, provi- is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, which is designed to help keep the seat ded that the shoulder belt is not pulled out belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt too far. is pulled out as far as possible. If this is Adjusting seat belt height (front seat done, a sound from the seat belt retractor Correct height adjustment will be audible, which is normal, and the belts only) seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.

See also Child restraints (p. 47) for information about using a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a child seat. When wearing the seat belt remember: • The belt should not be twisted or turned. • The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the hips (not pressing Adjusting seat belt height Incorrect height adjustment against the abdomen). The height of the shoulder section of the seat Seat belt retractor • Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled belt must be correctly adjusted. Press the The seat belt retractor will lock up in the up into its retractor and that the shoulder button and move the upper seat belt anchor following situations: and lap belts are taut. to position it as high as possible so that the • if the belt is pulled out rapidly Unbuckling the seat belt shoulder section of the belt is across the seat during braking and acceleration occupant's collarbone and not across the • To remove the seat belt, press the red section throat. • if the vehicle is leaning excessively on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully }} 29 02 Safety

|| after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the Seat belt reminder Rear seats belt back into the retractor slot. The seat belt reminder is intended to alert all The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions: Related information occupants of the vehicle that their seat belts should be fastened before the vehicle begins • Seat belt reminder (p. 30) • It provides information about which seat 02 to move. belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes- • Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 31) sage will appear in the information display when a belt is being used. This message will disappear after several seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button on the left steering wheel lever. • It also provides a reminder if one of the occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be given. These signals will stop when the seat belt has been re-buckled or can be

G017726 stopped by pressing the OK button. • The message Unbelted in rear seat will Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console appear in the information display if one of The seat belt reminder consists of an audible the rear doors has been opened. signal, an indicator light near the rearview The message in the information display can mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel always be accessed, even if it has been that alert all occupants of the vehicle to fas- erased, by pressing the OK button to display ten their seat belts (p. 28). The indicator light stored messages. will be on for several seconds from the time the ignition is switched on. There will also be Related information an audible signal if the driver's seat belt is not • Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 31) fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and warning light will be active for a several seconds.

30 02 Safety

Seat belts – pregnancy a distance as possible between their belly Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The seat belt should always be worn during and the steering wheel. As an enhancement to the three-point seat pregnancy. However, it is crucial that it be Related information belts (p. 28), your Volvo is equipped with a worn correctly. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). • Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 29) 02 • Seat belt reminder (p. 30) • Child restraints (p. 47) G020998

Models with an analog instrument panel The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the body without any twists. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals Models with an digital instrument panel* and steering wheel). Within this context, they should strive to position the seat with as large Volvo's SRS consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags (p. 33), side impact air-

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31 02 Safety

|| bags (p. 39), a front passenger occupant WARNING WARNING weight sensor (p. 36), and inflatable curtains (p. 41). All of these systems are moni- • If the SRS warning light stays on after If your vehicle has become flood-damaged tored by the SRS control module. An SRS the engine has started or if it illumi- in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/stand- nates while you are driving, have the ing water on the floor of the vehicle), do 02 warning light in the instrument panel (see the vehicle inspected by a trained and not attempt to start the vehicle or insert illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in the remote key into the ignition slot before modes I or II, and will normally go out after qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. disconnecting the battery (see below). This approximately 6 seconds if no faults are may cause airbag deployment which could detected in the system. • Never try to repair any component or result in serious injury. Have the vehicle part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer- towed to a trained and qualified Volvo Where applicable, a text message will also be ence in the system could cause mal- service technician for repairs. displayed when the SRS warning light illumi- function and serious injury. All work on Before attempting to tow the vehicle: nates. If this warning symbol is not function- these systems should be performed by ing properly, the general warning symbol illu- a trained and qualified Volvo service 1. Switch off the ignition for at least minates and a text message will be displayed. technician. 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. See also Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 70) and Information displays – 2. Follow the instructions for manually warning symbols (p. 72) for more informa- overriding the shiftlock system Trans- tion about indicator and warning lights. mission – shiftlock override (p. 261).

Related information • Crash mode – general information (p. 44)

32 02 Safety

Front airbags WARNING The front airbags supplement the three-point The airbags in the vehicle are designed seat belts (p. 28). For these airbags to provide • to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a the protection intended, seat belts must be replacement for–the three-point seat 02 worn at all times. belts. For maximum protection, wear seat belts at all times. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. • Never drive with your hands on the steering wheel pad/airbag housing. • The front airbags are designed to help Location of the passenger's side front airbag prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs very quickly and with consider- As the movement of the seats' occupants able force. During normal deployment compresses the airbags, some of the gas is and depending on variables such as expelled at a controlled rate to provide better seating position, one may experience G018665 cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire injuries as a result from deployment of The front airbag system process, including inflation and deflation of one or both of the airbags. the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a The front airbag system includes gas genera- • When installing any accessory equip- second. tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- ment, make sure that the front airbag tion sensors that activate the gas generators, The location of the front airbags is indicated system is not damaged. Any interfer- causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro- by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering ence in the system could cause mal- gen gas. wheel pad and above the glove compartment, function. and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash. Front airbag deployment The driver's side front airbag is folded and • The front airbags are designed to deploy located in the steering wheel hub. during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, The passenger's side front airbag is folded depending on the crash severity, angle, behind a panel located above the glove com- speed and object impacted. The airbags partment. may also deploy in certain non-frontal

}} 33 02 Safety

|| collisions where rapid deceleration WARNING www.volvocars.com/us occurs. Do not use child safety seats or child In Canada The SRS (p. 31) sensors, which trigger • • booster cushions/backrests in the the front airbags, are designed to react to Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. front passenger's seat. We also rec- 02 both the impact of the collision and the ommend that occupants under 4 feet National Customer Service inertial forces generated by it, and to 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have determine if the intensity of the collision is 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 outgrown these devices sit in the rear sufficient for the seat belt pretensioners 1 Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 and/or airbags to be deployed. seat with the seat belt fastened . 1-800-663-8255 However, not all frontal collisions activate the • Never drive with the airbags deployed. The fact that they hang out can impair front airbags. www.volvocars.com/ca the steering of your vehicle. Other • If the collision involves a nonrigid object safety systems can also be damaged. (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, • The smoke and dust formed when the fixed object at a low speed, the front air- airbags are deployed can cause skin bags will not necessarily deploy. and eye irritation in the event of pro- • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a longed exposure. side impact collision, in a collision from the rear or in a rollover situation. Should you have questions about any com- • The amount of damage to the bodywork ponent in the SRS system, please contact a does not reliably indicate if the airbags trained and qualified Volvo service technician should have deployed or not. or Volvo customer support: WARNING In the USA If any of the airbags have deployed: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. Customer Care Center Have it towed to a qualified repair 1 Volvo Drive facility. P.O. Box 914 • If necessary seek medical attentIon. Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information, (p. 36).

34 02 Safety

NOTE Airbag decals WARNING • Deployment of front airbags occurs • Children must never be allowed in the only one time during an accident. In a front passenger's seat. collision where deployment occurs, • Occupants in the front passenger's 02 the airbags and seat belt pretensioners seat must never sit on the edge of the activate. Some noise occurs and a seat, sit leaning toward the instrument small amount of powder is released. panel or otherwise sit out of position. The release of the powder may appear as smoke-like matter. This is a normal • The occupant's back must be as characteristic and does not indicate upright as comfort allows and be fire. against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened. • Volvo's front airbags use special sensors that are integrated with the front • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on seat buckles. The point at which the Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors the dash, seat or out of the window. airbag deploys is determined by whether or not the seat belt is being used, as well as the severity of the collision. • Collisions can occur where only one of the airbags deploys. If the impact is less severe, but severe enough to present a clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity.

Passenger's side airbag decal

}} 35 02 Safety

|| WARNING Occupant Weight Sensor detect the presence of a properly seated The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is occupant and determine if the passenger's No objects or accessory equipment, • designed to meet the regulatory requirements side front airbag should be enabled (may e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard inflate) or disabled (will not inflate). on, attached to, or installed near the 02 air bag hatch (the area above the glove (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- compartment) or the area affected by not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag senger's side front airbag when: under certain conditions. airbag deployment. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, • There should be no loose articles, or has small/medium objects in the front such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, seat, or dashboard area. • the system determines that an infant is • Never try to open the airbag cover on 2 present in a rear-facing infant seat that is the steering wheel or the passenger's installed according to the manufacturer's side dashboard. This should only be instructions, done by a trained and qualified Volvo • the system determines that a small child service technician. is present in a forward-facing child • Failure to follow these instructions can restraint that is installed according to the result in injury to the vehicle occu- 2 manufacturer's instructions, pants. G017724 • the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat, Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light Related information • a front passenger takes his/her weight off • Occupant Weight Sensor (p. 36) Disabling the passenger's side front of the seat for a period of time, • Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags airbag • a child or a small person occupies the (p. 39) Volvo recommends that ALL occupants front passenger's seat. • Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41) (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF • Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay (p. 31) of any vehicle with a front passenger side air- on to remind you that the passenger's side bag (p. 33), and be properly restrained for front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER their size and weight. For child safety recom- AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the mendations, see Child safety (p. 46). overhead console, near the base of the rear- The OWS works with sensors that are part of view mirror. the front passenger's seat and seat belt (p. 28). The sensors are designed to

36 02 Safety

NOTE WARNING Passeng- OWS Passeng- When the ignition is switched on, the OWS • Never try to open, remove, or repair er's seat indicator er's side indicator light will go on for up to 10 sec- any components in the OWS system. occu- light sta- front air- onds while the system performs a self- This could result in system malfunc- pancy status bag status 02 diagnostic test. tion. Maintenance or repairs should tus only be carried out by an a trained and Seat unoc- OWS indi- Passenger's However, if a fault is detected in the system: qualified Volvo service technician. cupied cator light side front air- The front passenger's seat should not • The OWS indicator light will stay on • lights up. bag disabled be modified in any way. This could • The SRS warning light (p. 31) will come reduce pressure on the seat cushion, on and stay on Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's which might interfere with the OWS pied by low cator light side front air- • The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service system's function. weight lights up bag disabled urgent will be displayed in the informa- occupant/ tion display. objectA

WARNING Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's pied by cator light side front air- If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as described, be aware that the heavy occu- is not lit bag enabled passenger's side front airbag will not pant/object deploy in the event of a collision. In this A Volvo recommends that children always be properly case, the SRS system and Occupant restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Weight Sensor should be inspected by a Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator trained and qualified Volvo service techni- lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly instal- cian as soon as possible. led. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the passenger's side front airbag in the event of a collision anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off.

}} 37 02 Safety

|| If a person of adult size is sitting in the front 1 Volvo Drive WARNING passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR- P.O. Box 914 BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible • No objects that add to the total weight that the person isn't sitting properly in the Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 on the seat should be placed on the front passenger's seat. If a child is 02 seat. If this happens: 1-800-458-1552 seated in the front passenger's seat • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to In Canada with any additional weight, this extra place the seatback in an upright position. weight could cause the OWS system Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. • Have the person sit upright in the seat, to enable the airbag, which might centered on the seat cushion, with the National Customer Service cause it to deploy in the event of a col- person's legs comfortably extended. lision, thereby injuring the child. 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 • Restart the vehicle and have the person • The seat belt should never be wrapped remain in this position for about two Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 around an object on the front pas- minutes. This will allow the system to 1-800-663-8255 senger's seat. This could interfere with detect that person and enable the pas- the OWS system's function. senger's frontal airbag. • The front passenger's seat belt should • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- never be used in a way that exerts tor lamp remains on even after this, the more pressure on the passenger than person should be advised to ride in the normal. This could increase the pres- rear seat. sure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and could result in the airbag This condition reflects limitations of the OWS being enabled, which might cause it to classification capability. It does not indicate deploy in the event of a collision, OWS malfunction. thereby injuring the child. Modifications If you are considering modifying your vehicle in any way to accommodate a disability, for example by altering or adapting the driver's or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at: In the USA Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center

38 02 Safety

WARNING WARNING Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags As an enhancement to the structural side Keep the following points in mind with Do not place any type of object on the • • impact protection built into your vehicle, it is respect to the OWS system. Failure to front passenger's seat in such a way also equipped with Side Impact Protection follow these instructions could that jamming, pressing, or squeezing 02 adversely affect the system's function occurs between the object and the System (SIPS) airbags. and result in serious injury to the occu- front seat, other than as a direct result pant of the front passenger's seat: of the correct use of the Automatic • The full weight of the front seat pas- Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking senger should always be on the seat Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (Child cushion. The passenger should never restraints (p. 47)). lift him/herself off the seat cushion • No objects should be placed under the using the armrest in the door or the front passenger's seat. This could center console, by pressing the feet on interfere with the OWS system's func- the floor, by sitting on the edge of the tion. seat cushion, or by pressing against the backrest in a way that reduces Related information

pressure on the seat cushion. This G032949 could cause OWS to disable the front, • Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) passenger's side airbag. (p. 31) Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front seats only) The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

}} 39 02 Safety

|| Components in the SIPS airbag system WARNING This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into • The SIPS airbag system is a supple- the outboard sides of both front seat back- ment to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point 02 rests, and electronic sensors/wiring. seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. Driver's side SIPS airbag • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. • Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. Passenger's side SIPS airbag • Failure to follow these instructions can NOTE result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident. SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

40 02 Safety

Related information Inflatable Curtain (IC) NOTE • Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The inflatable curtain is designed to help pro- (p. 31) If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains tect the heads of the occupants of the front inflated for approximately 6 seconds. • Front airbags (p. 33) seats and the occupant of the outboard rear 02 • Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41) seating positions in certain side impact collisions. WARNING • The IC system is a supplement to the Side Impact Protection System. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the rear of the vehicle. • Never try to open or repair any components of the IC system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Never hang heavy items from the ceiling handles. This could impede deployment of the Inflatable Curtain. • The cargo area and rear seat should not be loaded to a level higher than This system consists of inflatable curtains 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of located along the sides of the roof liners, the rear side windows. Objects placed stretching from the center of both front side higher than this level could impede the windows to the rear edge of the rear side function of the Inflatable Curtain. door windows. In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag Sys- tem (p. 39) (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

}} 41 02 Safety

|| WARNING Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) The WHIPS system consists of specially In order for the IC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and designed hinges and brackets on the front both outboard rear seat occupants should seat backrests designed to help absorb some 02 sit in an upright position with the seat belt of the energy generated in a collision from the properly fastened; adults using the seat rear (when the vehicle is rear-ended). belt and children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats. Children must never be allowed in the front passenger seat, Child safety (p. 46) for guidelines. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an accident.

Related information • Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (p. 31) • Front airbags (p. 33) • Child safety (p. 46)

In the event of a rear-end collision, the hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests are designed to change position slightly to allow the backrest/head restraint to help support the occupant's head before moving slightly

42 02 Safety rearward. This movement helps absorb some WARNING WARNING of the forces that could result in whiplash. • Occupants in the front seats must • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind WARNING never sit out of position. The occu- the front seats could impede the func- pant's back must be as upright as tion of the WHIPS system. 02 • The WHIPS system is designed to comfort allows and be against the seat • If the rear seat backrests are folded supplement the other safety systems back with the seat belt properly fas- down, cargo must be secured to pre- in your vehicle. For this system to tened. vent it from sliding forward against the function properly, the three-point seat • If your vehicle has been involved in a front seat backrests in the event of a belt must be worn. Please be aware rear-end collision, the front seat back- collision from the rear. This could that no system can prevent all possible rests must be inspected by a trained interfere with the action of the WHIPS injuries that may occur in an accident. and qualified Volvo service technician, system. • The WHIPS system is designed to even if the seats appear to be undam- function in certain collisions from the aged. Certain components in the rear, depending on the crash severity, WHIPS system may need to be angle and speed. replaced. • Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself.

WARNING Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat or a rear- facing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded down, the occupied front seats must be adjusted forward so that they do not touch the folded rear seat.

}} 43 02 Safety

|| Related information Crash mode – general information If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, • Seat belts – general (p. 28) After a collision, the functionality of some of the text Safety mode See manual may the vehicle's systems may be reduced as a appear in the information display. safety precaution. 02 NOTE This text can only be shown if the display is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system is intact.

Crash mode is a feature that is triggered if one or more of the safety systems (e.g. front (p. 33) or side airbags (p. 39), an inflatable curtain (p. 41), or one or more of the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The collision may have damaged an important function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, sen- Warning symbol: analog instrument panel sors for one of the safety systems, the brake system, etc.

Warning symbol: digital instrument panel*

44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Safety

WARNING Crash mode – starting the vehicle Crash mode – moving the vehicle If Crash mode has been set Crash If the message Normal mode appears after Never attempt to repair the vehicle • mode (p. 44)) and damage to the vehicle is an attempt has been made to start the engine, yourself or to reset the electrical sys- minor and there is no fuel leakage, you may tem after the vehicle has displayed Starting the vehicle after a crash (p. 45), the 02 Safety mode See manual. This could attempt to start the engine. vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position, if for example, it is blocking traf- result in injury or improper system To do so: function. fic. It should, however, not be moved farther 1. Remove the remote key from the ignition than is absolutely necessary. Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- • slot and open the driver's door. If a mes- ing status should only be done by a WARNING trained and qualified Volvo service sage is displayed that the ignition is on, technician. press the start button. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after Crash mode has been set, it should • After Safety mode See manual has 2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the remote key in the ignition slot. not be driven or towed (pulled by another been displayed, if you detect the odor vehicle). There may be concealed damage of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel 3. Try to start the vehicle. that could make it difficult or impossible to leakage, do not attempt to start the control. The vehicle should be transported vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. WARNING on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/repairs. Related information If the message Safety mode See manual is still displayed, the vehicle should not be • Crash mode – starting the vehicle driven and must be towed. Concealed Related information (p. 45) faults may make the vehicle difficult to • Crash mode – moving the vehicle control. • Crash mode – general information (p. 44) (p. 45) Related information • Crash mode – general information (p. 44) • Crash mode – moving the vehicle (p. 45)

45 02 Safety

Child safety pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on When a child has outgrown the child safety Children should always be seated safely when the seat. Other occupants should also be seat, you should use the rear seat with the traveling in the vehicle. properly restrained to help reduce the chance standard seat belt fastened. The best way to of injuring or increasing the injury of a child. help protect the child here is to place the General information child on a cushion so that the seat belt is 02 All states and provinces have legislation gov- Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint properly located on the hips (see Booster erning how and where children should be car- systems (p. 47) for all occupants including cushions (p. 54) for illustration). Legislation ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations children. Remember that, regardless of age in your state or province may mandate the existing in your state or province. Recent and size, a child should always be properly use of a child seat or cushion in combination accident statistics have shown that children restrained in a vehicle. with the seat belt, depending on the child's are safer in rear seating positions than front age and/or size. Please check local regula- Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ seating positions when properly restrained. A tions. LATCH attachments (p. 55), which make it child restraint system can help protect a child more convenient to install child seats. in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when A specially designed and tested booster selecting a child restraint system: cushion and backrest can be obtained from Some restraint systems for children are your Volvo retailer. designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap It should have a label certifying that it meets belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 – Such child restraint systems can help protect Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in children in vehicles in the event of an acci- CMVSS 213. height dent only if they are used properly. However, Make sure the child restraint system is Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. children could be endangered in a crash if the approved for the child's height, weight and (18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – child restraints are not properly secured in the development – the label required by the 137 cm) in height vehicle. Failure to follow the installation standard or regulation, or instructions for instructions for your child restraint can result infant restraints, typically provide this infor- in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a mation. sudden stop. In using any child restraint system, we urge Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable you to carefully look over the instructions that substitute for a child restraint system. In an are provided with the restraint. Be sure you accident, a child held in a person's arms can understand them and can use the device be crushed between the vehicle's interior and properly and safely in this vehicle. A misused an unrestrained person. The child could also child restraint system can result in increased be injured by striking the interior, or by being injuries for both the infant or child and other ejected from the vehicle during a sudden occupants in the vehicle. maneuver or impact. The same can also hap-

46 02 Safety

WARNING Volvo has some very specific Child restraints recommendations: Suitable child restraints should always be Do not use child safety seats or child • • Always wear your seat belt (p. 28). used when children travel in the vehicle. booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also rec- • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety Child restraint systems 02 ommend that children under 4 feet device which, when used with a three- 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have point seat belt can help reduce serious outgrown these devices sit in the rear injuries during certain types of accidents. seat with the seat belt fastened. Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehi- • On hot days, the temperature in the cle. vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure to these high temperatures • Volvo strongly recommends that every- for even a short period of time can one in the vehicle be properly restrained. cause heat-related injury or death. • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants Small children are particularly at risk. (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back

Child seat should always be registered. See seat of any vehicle with a front passenger G022840 side airbag. Child restraints (p. 47) for more information. Infant seat • Drive safely! Volvo's recommendations There are three main types of child restraint Why does Volvo believe that no child should Related information systems: infant seats (p. 49), convertible sit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple • Infant seats (p. 49) seats (p. 51), and booster cush- really. A front airbag (p. 33) is a very powerful • Convertible seats (p. 51) ions (p. 54). They are classified according to the child's age and size. device designed, by law, to help protect an • Booster cushions (p. 54) adult. • Integrated booster cushion – general The following section provides general infor- Because of the size of the airbag and its information (p. 57) mation on securing a child restraint using a three-point seat belt (p. 28). Refer to ISOFIX/ speed of inflation, a child should never be • Child safety locks (p. 61) placed in the front seat, even if he or she is LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) and Top tether properly belted or strapped into a child safety • Top tether anchors (p. 56) anchors (p. 56) for information on securing seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue anchors and/or top tether anchorages. to do our part. But we need your help. Please remember to put your children in the back seat, and buckle them up.

}} 47 02 Safety

|| WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to 02 help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-

G022847 G023269 mends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In Convertible seat Booster cushion addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, WARNING WARNING properly restrained, as long as possi- A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac- ble. front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information front passenger airbag – not even if the on securing the restraint. Automatic Locking Retractor/ "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If ELR) the severity of an accident were to cause To make child seat installation easier, each the airbag to inflate, this could lead to seri- seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- ous injury or death to a child seated in this ped with a locking mechanism to help keep position. the seat belt taut.

48 02 Safety

When attaching the seat belt to a child Child restraint recall information is readily Infant seats seat: available in both the U.S. and Canada. For Suitable child restraints should always be 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. used when children (depending on their age/ according to the child seat manufactur- Government's Auto Safety Hotline at size) are seated in the vehicle. er's instructions. 1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www- 02 odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/ Securing an infant seat with a seat belt 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the Transport Canada's Child Safety website at buckle (lock) in the usual way. http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/ menu.htm. 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around the child seat. Related information A sound from the seat belt retractor will be • Child safety locks (p. 61) audible at this time and is normal. The belt • Integrated booster cushion – general will now be locked in place. This function is information (p. 57) automatically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. G022844

WARNING Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend NOTE that children who have outgrown these Refer to (p. 55) and (p. 56) for infor- devices sit in the rear seat with the seat mation on securing a child restraint using belt properly fastened. ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages. Child restraint registration and recalls Child restraints could be recalled for safety 1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of reasons. You must register your child the vehicle. restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat informed about child safety seat recalls, be according to the manufacturer's instruc- sure to fill out and return the registration card tions. that comes with new child restraints.

}} 49 02 Safety

|| WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the 02 "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. G023270 G022846

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt click is audible. WARNING out as far as possible to activate the • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing belt's automatic locking function. position only. • The infant seat should not be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation. G023271

Fasten the seat belt

50 02 Safety

NOTE WARNING Convertible seats Suitable child restraints should always be The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. used when children (depending on their age/ and allowed to retract fully. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt size) are seated in the vehicle. path. 02 Securing a convertible seat with a seat 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let belt the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A The infant seat can be removed by unbuck- sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- ling the seat belt and letting it retract com- matic locking function will be audible at pletely. this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. Related information • Child safety (p. 46) • Child restraints (p. 47) • Convertible seats (p. 51) • Integrated booster cushion – general information (p. 57)

• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) G018630 • Top tether anchors (p. 56) Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat

NOTE G022850 Refer to (p. 55) and (p. 56) for informa- Ensure that the seat is securely in place tion on securing a child restraint using 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages. seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt. Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.

}} 51 02 Safety

|| WARNING • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recom- 02 mends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be instal-

G022847 led in the rear seat only. G022848 Route the seat belt through the convertible seat • A rear-facing convertible seat should Fasten the seat belt not be positioned behind the driver's 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch WARNING seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation. plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Always use a convertible seat that is suita- click is audible. ble for the child's age and size. See the 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt convertible seat manufacturer's recom- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible mendations. seat according to the manufacturer's out as far as possible to activate the instructions. belt's automatic locking function. 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.

52 02 Safety

NOTE WARNING Related information • Child safety (p. 46) The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. • Child restraints (p. 47) and allowed to retract fully. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt • Infant seats (p. 49) path. 02 • Integrated booster cushion – general 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, information (p. 57) let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A The convertible seat can be removed by • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract Top tether anchors (p. 56) matic locking function will be audible at completely. • this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place G022849

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt WARNING 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along A child seat should never be used in the the seat belt path to ensure that it is held front passenger seat of any vehicle with a securely in place by the seat belt. front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.

53 02 Safety

Booster cushions 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Related information Booster cushions should be properly posi- plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct • Child safety (p. 46) tioned in the vehicle. click is audible. • Child restraints (p. 47) Infant seats (p. 49) 02 Securing a booster cushion • • Convertible seats (p. 51) • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) • Top tether anchors (p. 56) G022852

G022851 Positioning the seat belt

Position the child correctly on the booster cush- 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut ion and fits snugly around the child. Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible WARNING seats (p. 51). • The hip section of the three-point seat 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat belt must fit snugly across the child's of the vehicle. hips, not across the stomach. The shoulder section of the three-point 2. With the child properly seated on the • seat belt should be positioned across booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or the chest and shoulder. around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions. • The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm.

54 02 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 3. Fasten the attachment on the child Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ child seats are located in the rear, outboard LATCH/LATCH lower anchors. seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instruc- 02 Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child tions. seat anchors

WARNING Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to

FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to G018631 the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings. Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors

NOTE WARNING • The rear seat's center position is not • Be sure to fasten the attachment cor- equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower rectly to the anchor (see the illustra- anchors. When installing a child tion). If the attachment is not correctly restraint in this position, attach the Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark fastened, the child restraint may not restraint's top tether strap (if it is so be properly secured in the event of a the ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as equipped) to the top tether anchorage collision. shown. To access the anchors, kneel on the point and secure the restraint with the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. vehicle's center seat belt. • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint anchors are only intended for Always follow your child seat manufacturer's • Always follow your child seat manufac- installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/ use with child seats positioned in the turer's installation instructions, and outboard seating positions. These LATCH lower anchors and top teth- use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors ers (p. 56) whenever possible. anchors are not certified for use with and top tethers whenever possible. any child restraint that is positioned in To access the anchors the center seating position. When 1. Put the child restraint in position. securing a child restraint in the center seating position, use only the vehicle's 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down center seat belt. the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel.

}} 55 02 Safety

|| Related information Top tether anchors Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's • Child safety (p. 46) Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top instructions for information on securing the • Infant seats (p. 49) tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are child seat. • Convertible seats (p. 51) located on the rear side of the backrests. 02 NOTE • Integrated booster cushion – general Child restraint anchorages information (p. 57) On models equipped with the optional cargo area cover, this cover should be removed before a child seat is attached to the child restraint anchors.

WARNING • Always refer to the recommendations made by the child restraint manufacturer. • Volvo recommends that the top tether anchors be used when installing a forward-facing child restraint. Securing a child seat • Never route a top tether strap over the 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. top of the head restraint. The strap should be routed beneath the head 2. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint. restraint and attach it to the anchor. • Child restraint anchorages are 3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower designed to withstand only those ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraint is not equipped with lower tether restraints. Under no circumstances are straps, or the restraint is used in the cen- they to be used for adult seat belts or ter seating position, follow instructions for harnesses. The anchorages are not securing a child restraint using the Auto- able to withstand excessive forces on matic Locking Retractor seat belt (see them in the event of collision if full har- Child restraints (p. 47)). ness seat belts or adult seat belts are installed to them. An adult who uses a 4. Firmly tension all straps. belt anchored in a child restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffer-

56 02 Safety

ing severe injuries should a collision Integrated booster cushion – general In Canada, Transport Canada's occur. information weight recommendation is 40 – • Do not install rear speakers that The booster cushions are designed to raise 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg). require the removal of the top tether the child higher so that the shoulder strap anchors or interfere with the proper crosses over the child's collarbone, not over If using a booster cushion does not result in 02 use of the top tether strap. the neck. proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the child should be placed in a properly 2 Related information Integrated two-stage booster cushion secured child restraint (see (p. 47) ). The shoulder belt must never be placed behind • Child safety (p. 46) Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions are located in the outboard seating positions. the child's back or under the arm. • Infant seats (p. 49) These booster cushions have been specially • Convertible seats (p. 51) designed to help safeguard children in the • Integrated booster cushion – general rear seat. They should be stowed (p. 60) information (p. 57) (folded down into the seat cushion) when not • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) in use. When using an integrated booster cushion (p. 59), the child must be secured with the vehicle's three-point seat belt. Use these booster cushions only with children whose weight is between: • Stage 1: 48 – 80 lbs (22 – 36 kg) Correct seating position: child's head is below • Stage 2: 33 – 55 lbs (15 – 25 kg) the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across and whose height is between: the collarbone • Stage 1: 45 – 55 in. (115 – 140 cm) • Stage 2: 37 – 47 in. (95 – 120 cm)

2 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion. }} 57 02 Safety

|| • That the seat belt (p. 28) is properly posi- Related information tioned and is taut. • Child safety (p. 46) • The shoulder section of the seat belt is • Infant seats (p. 49) across the child's collarbone, not over the Convertible seats (p. 51) 02 neck. • • Booster cushions (p. 54) • The lap section of the seat belt is across the child's hips and not the abdomen.

WARNING DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur Incorrect seating position: the child's head is above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is Follow all instructions on the not across the collarbone booster cushion and in the vehi- Before driving, check that: cle's owner's manual. • The integrated two-stage booster cushion MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER is set in the correct position according to CUSHION IS SECURELY the child's height and weight (see the LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS table below) and is locked in position. SEATED. Stage 1 Stage 2 • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occu- Weight 48 – 80 lbs 33 – 55 lbs pied, the entire booster cushion and 22 – 36 kg 15 – 25 kg seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be Height 45 – 55 in. 37 – 47 in. replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be per- 115 – 140 cm 95 – 120 cm formed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.

58 02 Safety

Integrated booster cushion – using Press the booster cushion rearward to Lift the front edge of the booster cushion The Integrated booster cushion (p. 57) in the lock it in position. and press it rearward toward the backrest to lock it in position. rear seat can be folded up in two stages, Stage 2 depending on the child's height and weight. WARNING 02 Stage 1 DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.

Related information • Integrated booster cushion – stowing With the booster cushion in the stage 1 (p. 60) position, press the button (see the arrow Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2) in illustration 1). to release the booster cushion.

59 02 Safety

Integrated booster cushion – stowing NOTE WARNING The integrated booster cushion (p. 57) can be The booster cushion cannot be moved folded down completely (stowed) from either DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can from the stage 2 (upper) position to the occur the stage 1 or stage 2 positions. stage 1 (lower) position. It must first be 02 folded down completely to the stowed Follow all instructions on the position, and then adjusted to stage 1. booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. Pull the handle forward to release the booster cushion. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY Press down on the center of the booster LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS cushion to return it to the stowed position. SEATED. • In the event of a collision while the NOTE integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and The booster cushion must be in the seat belt must be replaced. The stowed position before the rear seat back- booster cushion should also be rests are folded down. replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be per- CAUTION formed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. Be sure there are no loose objects under the booster cushion before it is stowed. Related information • Integrated booster cushion – using (p. 59)

60 02 Safety

Child safety locks Power child safety locks and • The rear door windows can only be Power child safety locks* help prevent chil- disengaging rear door windows* opened from the driver's door control dren from inadvertently opening one of the panel rear doors or windows from inside the vehicle. • The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside 02 Manual child safety locks The child safety locks' current setting is stored when the engine is switched off. If these locks were activated when the engine was switched off, they will also be active when the engine is restarted. Related information • Detachable key blade – general information (p. 151) Driver's door control panel • Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160) The power child safety locks can be activated/deactivated when the remote key is in mode I (p. 77) or higher. Activation/deacti- Child safety locks – rear doors vation can be done up to 2 minutes after the The controls are located on the rear door engine has been switched off (if no door has jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or been opened). a screwdriver to adjust these controls. To activate the child safety locks: The rear doors can only be opened from 1. Put the ignition in mode I or higher, or the outside when the slot is in the hori- start the engine. zontal position. 2. Press the button on the driver's door con- The rear doors can be opened from the trol panel (see the illustration). inside when the slot is in the vertical position. > Rear child locks Activated will be displayed in the instrument panel and the indicator light in the button will illuminate when the function is activated. When the child safety locks are activated:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 03 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview This overview shows the location of the instrument panel and center console displays, and controls/buttons/switches.

}} 63 03 Instruments and controls

64 03 Instruments and controls

Function See Function See Function See

Controls for menus (p. 74), In-door control pan- (p. 99), Power seat* adjust- (p. 79) and messages, turn (p. 93), els (power windows, (p. 100), ment controls signals, high/low (p. 87), mirrors, central lock- (p. 160) beams, trip computer (p. 113) ing button) Lighting panel, but- (p. 87), tons for opening fuel (p. 283), Paddles for manually (p. 259) Hazard warning (p. 93) filler door and (p. 162) shifting gears* flashers unlocking the tailgate 03 Cruise control (p. 176) Controls for the info- (p. 74), Related information tainment system and (p. 126), Information displays – ambient tempera- Horn, airbag (p. 85), • menus Sensus Info- ture sensor (p. 75) (p. 33) tainment supplement • Information displays – trip odometer and Main instrument (p. 66) clock (p. 76) panel Climate system con- (p. 126) trols Infotainment system/ Sensus Info- Bluetooth hands-free tainment Gear selector (p. 257) controls supplement Controls for active (p. 169) START/STOP (p. 76) chassis (Four-C)* ENGINE button Wipers and washers (p. 96), Ignition slot (p. 76) (p. 97)

Display for infotain- (p. 111), Steering wheel (p. 85) ment system func- Sensus Info- adjustment tions and menus tainment supplement Hood opening control (p. 331)

Door handle - Parking brake (p. 274)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65 03 Instruments and controls

Information displays – introduction More detailed information can be found in the Tachometer: Shows engine speed in The displays show information on some of the descriptions of the functions that use the thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm) vehicle's functions, such as cruise control, the information displays. Gear indicator: Shows the currently trip computer and messages. The information Gauges and indicators: analog selected gear is shown with text and symbols. instrument panel Gauges and indicators: digital instrument panel* Different themes (display alternatives) can be 03 selected for the digital instrument panel: • Elegance • Eco • Performance To change themes, press the OK button on the left steering wheel lever and use the thumb wheel to scroll to Themes. Press OK to confirm your choice.

Information displays: analog instrument panel Fuel gauge: When the indicator shows one white marking1, a yellow indicator light will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See also Trip computer – introduction (p. 113) and Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 281) for additional information. Eco meter: Indicates how economically the vehicle is being driven. The higher the needle moves on the scale, the more economically the vehicle is being driven. Speedometer

Information displays: digital instrument panel*

1 When the message Distance to empty fuel tank: shows "----", the marker turns red

66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Theme Elegance: gauges and indicators Theme Eco: gauges and indicators Theme Performance: gauges and indicators Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a one white marking, a yellow indicator light white marking, a yellow indicator light will white marking, a yellow indicator light will will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See See also Trip computer – introduction also Trip computer – introduction (p. 113) also Trip computer – introduction (p. 113) (p. 113) and Refueling – fuel require- and Refueling – fuel requirements and Refueling – fuel requirements ments (p. 281) for additional information. (p. 281) for additional information. (p. 281) for additional information. Coolant temperature gauge Eco Guide (see Eco Guide* and Power Coolant temperature gauge Meter* (p. 69)) Speedometer Speedometer Speedometer Tachometer (engine speed in thousands Tachometer (shows engine speed in of revolutions per minute (rpm)) Tachometer (engine speed in thousands thousands of revolutions per minute of revolutions per minute (rpm)) Gear indicator: Shows the currently (rpm)) selected gear Gear indicator: Shows the currently Power Meter (see Eco Guide* and Power selected gear Meter* (p. 69)). Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected gear

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67 03 Instruments and controls

|| Indicator and warning symbols Some of the symbols shown may not be available in all markets or models. Related information • Instrument overview (p. 63) • Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 70) • Information displays – warning symbols 03 (p. 72)

Indicator and warning symbols: digital instrument Indicator and warning symbols: analog instru- panel ment panel Indicator symbols Indicator symbols Indicator and warning symbols Indicator and warning symbols Warning symbols Warning symbols Function check All indicator and warning symbols light up in ignition mode II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged. If the engine does not start or if the function check is carried out in ignition mode II, all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the malfunction indicator light, which may indicate a fault in the vehicle's emissions system, and the symbol for low oil pressure.

68 03 Instruments and controls

Eco Guide* and Power Meter* Average Eco guide and Power guide are two gauges in The average reading changes gradually the instrument panel that help improve driving according to changes in the current reading economy. to indicate how economically the vehicle has been driven recently. The higher the average The vehicle also stores driving-related statis- reading, the more economically the vehicle tics in the form of a bar graph, see Trip com- has been driven. puter – Trip statistics (p. 120). Power Meter Introduction This gauge indicates the engine power that 03 To display or remove these functions from the has been utilized and the amount of power instrument panel, select the "Eco" theme (see remaining. Information displays – introduction (p. 66)). Current (instantaneous) reading Driving statistics are also stored and can be displayed in the form of a bar chart (see Trip Average computer – Trip statistics (p. 120)). Current (instantaneous) reading Eco Guide This is the current level of economical driving; This gauge gives an indication of how eco- the higher the reading, the more economically nomically the vehicle is being driven. the vehicle is being driven. This value is calculated based on the vehicle's speed, engine speed (rpm), engine load and brake use. The optimal speed range is between approximately 30–50 mph (50–80 km/h), preferably at Available power as low rpm as possible. The markers fall when the brake or accelerator pedal is Utilized power pressed. If the current reading is very low, the red field in the gauge will illuminate after a slight delay, indicating low driving economy.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69 03 Instruments and controls

|| Available power Information displays – indicator Symbol Description The smaller, upper indicator shows the symbols engine's available power2. The higher the The indicator symbols alert the driver when Left turn signal indicator reading on the scale, the greater the amount certain functions are activated, that a system of power remaining in the current gear. is actively working or that a fault may have Right turn signal indicator Utilized power occurred in a system or function. The larger, lower indicator shows the amount Tire pressure monitoring sensor 2 Symbol Description of engine power that has been utilized . The (TPMS)A 03 higher the reading on the scale, the greater Fault in the Active Bending The Eco function is on. the amount of power that is being utilized. Light (ABL)*system The larger the gap between the two indicators, the greater the amount of power remain- Malfunction indicator light TheStart/Stop function is active ing. (the engine has auto-stopped)

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) A Option in Canada

Rear fog lights on Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL) system Stability system This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in the ABL system. See Active Bending Lights (ABL)* (p. 90) for more information about The stability system's Sport this system. mode is activated

Low fuel level

Information symbol, read the text displayed in the instrument panel

High beam indicator

2 Depending on rpm

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Malfunction Indicator Light 3. If the warning light goes off, no further pressing the OK button (see Information dis- As you drive, a computer called On-Board action is required. play – menu controls (p. 111) for information) or this will take place automatically after a Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's If the indicator light remains on, the vehicle short time (the length of time varies, depend- engine, transmission, electrical and emission should be driven to a trained and qualified ing on the function affected). systems. Volvo service technician for inspection, see The malfunction indicator light will illuminate if Brakes – general (p. 271) for additional infor- The information symbol may also illuminate the computer senses a condition that poten- mation. together with other symbols. tially may need correcting. When this hap- Rear fog lights High beam indicator pens, please have your vehicle checked by a This symbol indicates that the rear fog lights This symbol illuminates when the high beam 03 trained and qualified Volvo service technician are on. headlights are on, or if the high beam flash as soon as possible. Stability system function is used. A malfunction indicator light may have many This indicator symbol flashes when the stabil- Left turn signal indicator causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a ity system is actively working to stabilize the Right turn signal indicator change in your car's behavior. Even so, an vehicle, see Stability system – introduction uncorrected condition could hurt fuel econ- (p. 169) for more detailed information. omy, emission controls, and drivability. NOTE Stability system - Sport mode Extended driving without correcting the cause • Both turn signal indicators will flash could even damage other components in This symbol illuminates to indicate that the stability system's Sport mode has been acti- when the hazard warning flashers are your vehicle. used. vated to help provide maximum tractive force, This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is for example when driving with snow chains, • If either of these indicators flash faster not closed tightly or if the engine was running or driving in deep snow or loose sand. than normal, the direction indicators while the vehicle was refueled. are not functioning properly. Low fuel level Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) When this light comes on, the vehicle should If the warning light comes on, there may be a be refueled as soon as possible. See Refuel- Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction in the ABS system (the standard ing – fuel requirements (p. 281) for informa- (TPMS)* braking system will still function). Check the tion about fuel and refueling. This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire system by: Information symbol pressure in one or more tires is low, see Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – general 1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off The information symbol lights up and a text information (p. 311) for detailed information. the ignition. message is displayed to provide the driver Eco* function on 2. Restart the engine. with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems. The message can be The symbol will illuminate when the Eco func- erased and the symbol can be turned off by tion is activated.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71 03 Instruments and controls

|| Start/stop* Information displays – warning sary. If the oil level is normal and the light The symbol illuminates when the engine has symbols stays on after restart, have the vehicle towed auto-stopped. The warning lights alert the driver that an to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo important function is activated or that a seri- service technician. Related information ous fault has occurred. Parking brake applied • Information displays – introduction (p. 66) This symbol flashes while the brake is being • Information displays – warning symbols Symbol Description applied and then glows steadily when the (p. 72) parking brake has been set. Low oil pressureA 03 See Parking brake – general information (p. 274) for more information about using the B Parking brake applied parking brake. Airbags – SRS SRS airbags If this light comes on while the vehicle is being driven, or remains on for longer than Seat belt reminder approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been started, the SRS system's diagnos- Generator not charging tic functions have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain. Fault in the brake system Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as Warning symbol, read the text soon as possible. displayed in the instrument panel See Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (p. 31) for more information about the airbag A Certain engines do not use this symbol to indicate low oil system. pressure. On these models, a text message will be displayed on the instrument panel instead, see Engine com- Seat belt reminder partment – engine oil (p. 333). B The symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital This symbol comes on for approximately instrument panel. 6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or her seat belt. Low oil pressure If the light comes on while driving, stop the vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and check the engine oil level. Add oil if neces-

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Generator not charging If the and symbols come on WARNING This symbol comes on during driving if a fault at the same time, there may be a fault in the has occurred in the electrical system. Contact • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark brake force distribution system. an authorized Volvo workshop. in the reservoir or if a warning mes- 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn sage is displayed in the text window: Engine temperature DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle off the engine. Engine overheating can result from low oil or towed to a trained and qualified Volvo coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high 2. Restart the engine. service technician and have the brake heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. system inspected. • If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- Engine overheating will be signaled with text ing. • 03 and a red warning triangle in the middle of the If the and symbols instrument display. The exact text will depend • If the symbols remain on, check the level are on at the same time, there is a risk on the degree of overheating. It may range in the brake fluid reservoir, see Engine of reduced vehicle stability. from High engine temp Reduce speed to compartment – brake fluid (p. 336). If the brake fluid level is normal but the sym- High engine temp Stop engine. If appropri- bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven, Warning symbol ate, other messages, such as Coolant level with great care, to an authorized Volvo The red warning symbol lights up to indicate low, Stop safely will also be displayed. If workshop to have the brake system a problem related to safety and/or drivability. your engine does overheat so that you must checked. A message will also appear in the instrument stop the engine, always allow the engine to MIN panel. The symbol remains visible until the cool before attempting to check oil and cool- • If the level in the reservoir is below , the vehicle should be transported to an fault has been rectified but the text message ant levels. authorized Volvo workshop to have the can be cleared with the OK button, see Infor- See Engine compartment – coolant (p. 335) brake system checked. mation display – menu controls (p. 111). The for more information. warning symbol can also come on in conjunc- tion with other symbols. Fault in brake system If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may Action: be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the and check the level in the brake fluid reser- vehicle further. voir, see Engine compartment – brake fluid (p. 336). If the level in the reservoir is below 2. Read the information on the display. MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an Implement the action in accordance with authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake the message in the display. Clear the system checked. message using OK.

}} 73 03 Instruments and controls

|| Reminder – doors not closed Related information My Car – introduction If one of the doors is not closed properly, the • Information displays – introduction (p. 66) The MY CAR menu system provides access information or warning symbol illuminates • Information displays – indicator symbols to menus for operating many of the vehicle's (depending on the vehicle's speed), a graphic (p. 70) functions, such as setting the clock, door mir- will be displayed in instrument panel and an rors, lock and alarm settings, etc. explanatory text message3 will also be displayed in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi- Some of the features or functions are stand- cle in a safe place as soon as possible and ard; others are optional and vary according to model/market. 03 close the door. If the vehicle is driven at a speed Operation lower than approximately 5 mph Use the buttons on the center console or the (7 km/h), the information symbol illu- steering wheel keypad to navigate in the minates. menus. If the vehicle is driven at a speed higher than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the warning symbol illuminates. If the hood is not closed properly, the warning symbol illuminates, a graphic will be displayed in instrument panel and an explanatory text message3 will also be displayed in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the hood. If the tailgate is not closed properly, the information symbol illuminates and a graphic will be displayed in instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

3 Text message applies only to models with the optional digital instrument panel

74 03 Instruments and controls

OK/MENU: Press the button on the cen- Information displays – ambient ter console or the thumb wheel on the temperature sensor steering wheel keypad to select a menu alternative or to store a selected function in the system's memory. TUNE: Turn this control on the center console or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad to navigate up/down in a menu. 03 EXIT

EXIT functions Depending on which function the cursor is pointing to and the menu level, briefly pressing EXIT will result in: Location of the ambient temperature sensor, A: • An in-coming phone call will be rejected digital instrument panel*, B: analog instrument panel • The current function will be cancelled • Characters entered will be erased NOTE • The most recent selection will be cancel- When the ambient temperature is between led 23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake • Go back/up in the menu system symbol will be displayed next to the temperature. This symbol serves as a warning Pressing and holding EXIT takes you to the for possible slippery road surfaces. Please normal view for MY CAR. If you are already in note that this symbol does not indicate a normal view, this will take you to the main fault with your vehicle. source menu. At low speeds or when the vehicle is not Menu selections and paths moving, the temperature readings may be The center console control panel and the steer- slightly higher than the actual ambient ing wheel keypad. The illustration is generic and Please consult your Sensus Infotainment sup- temperature. the appearance/location of the buttons may vary. plement for a description of the MY CAR MY CAR: opens the MY CAR menu sys- menu selections and paths. tem. Related information • Information displays – introduction (p. 66)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75 03 Instruments and controls

Information displays – trip odometer Clock Inserting/removing remote key and clock The remote key is used to start the engine or The trip odometers T1 and T2 and clock are to use various electrical functions without displayed in the instrument panel. starting the engine. Trip odometers Inserting and removing the remote key

Clock, digital instrument panel* Display6 Setting the clock The clock can be set in the MY CAR menu Trip odometer4 system. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP additional information about these menus. ENGINE button. Odometer display Go to Settings System options Time Inserting the remote key7 Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering settings. Set Auto time to ON (check the Holding the end of the remote key with the wheel lever to display the desired trip odome- box) and select the correct time zone under base of the key blade, insert the remote key ter. Location. into the ignition slot as shown in the illustra- Press and hold the RESET button on the left tion and press it in as far as possible. steering wheel lever for at least 1 second to Related information reset the selected trip odometer5. • Information displays – introduction (p. 66) CAUTION Foreign objects in the ignition slot can impair function or cause damage.

4 The trip odometer will be displayed differently in analog and digital instrument panels 5 Models with a digital information panel: press and hold RESET for more than approximately 4 seconds to reset all trip computer information 6 Models with an analog instrument panel: the time will be displayed in the center of the instrument panel 7 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Removing the remote key Ignition modes Mode Function The remote key can be removed from the The vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and II ignition slot by pulling it out. that can be used without starting the engine. 0 The odometer, clock and tem- The following table shows examples of which perature gauge are illuminated. Related information functions are available in the respective Power seats* can be adjusted • Ignition modes (p. 77) modes. and the infotainment system can be used for a limited time (to min- NOTE imize battery drain, see the Sen- sus Infotainment Supplement). To access ignition modes I or II without 03 starting the engine, the brake pedal must I The Moonroof*, power windows, not be depressed. 12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment, navigation system*, climate system blower, windshield wipers can be used.

II The headlights/taillights illuminate. Warning/indicator lights illuminate for 5 seconds. Other systems are activated. However, the heated seats* and heated rear window function can only be activated when the engine is running. Mode II should only be used for very short periods to help avoid draining the battery.

Ignition modes Ignition mode 0 – The vehicle is unlocked.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 03 Instruments and controls

|| Ignition mode I Front seats WARNING – With the remote key fully pressed into the The front seats can be adjusted in a number Do not adjust the seat while driving. ignition slot8, press START/STOP of ways to help provide the most comfortable • The seat should be adjusted so that ENGINE briefly. seating position. the brake pedal can be depressed Ignition mode II fully. In addition, position the seat as – With the remote key fully pressed into the far rearward as comfort and control ignition slot8, press START/STOP allow. ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds. • Check that the seat is securely locked 03 Returning to mode 0 into position after adjusting. To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly. Related information • Front seats – power seat (p. 79) Starting and stopping the engine See Starting the engine (p. 252) and Switch- • Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 84) ing off the engine (p. 254) for information on • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82) starting the engine and switching it off. Emergency towing Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. See Towing the vehicle (p. 289) for important Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and information about the remote key when the move the seat to the position of your vehicle is being towed. choice. Related information Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, • Inserting/removing remote key (p. 76) pump up/down. Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the angle of the backrest. Electronic lumbar support*. Press the button to adjust. Control panel for power seat*, see Front seats – power seat (p. 79).

8 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Front seats – folding backrest*10 Without releasing the catches, push the Front seats – power seat12 The front passenger's seat backrest can be backrest forward. The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a short folded down to make it easier to transport Move the seat as far forward as possible period after unlocking the door with the long objects. so that the head restraint slides under the remote control without the key in the ignition glove compartment. slot. Seat adjustment is normally made when the ignition is on and can always be made Return the seat to its upright position in the when the engine is running. reverse order. Power seat WARNING 03 • When transporting long objects, cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops. • When the seat's backrest is returned to the upright position, push and pull it The front passenger seat backrest can be to be sure that it is securely locked in folded to a horizontal position to make room this position. for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows: Move the seat as far back and down as Related information Power seat adjustment controls possible. • Front seats (p. 78) Front edge of seat cushion up/down Adjust the backrest to an upright position. • Front seats – power seat (p. 79) Raise/lower the seat • Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 84) Lift the catches on the rear of the back- Seat forward/rearward rest. • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82) Backrest tilt

Electronic lumbar support*

10 The front passenger's seat backrest on models equipped with the optional sport seat cannot be folded down 12 Optional on certain models }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 03 Instruments and controls

|| Operation Programming the seat's memory Heated seats* Three different seating and door mirror posi- See Heated seats (p. 127). NOTE tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory. Related information • Only one of the power seat's controls • Front seats (p. 78) can be used at the same time. The following example explains how button Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 84) (1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) • The power seats have an overload • • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82) protector that activates if a seat is are programmed in the same way. blocked by any object. If this occurs, To program (store) a seat and door mirror 03 switch off the ignition (key in posi- position in button (1): tion 0) and wait for a short period before operating the seat again. 1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the desired positions using the seat and mirror adjustment controls. Power seat memory function 2. Press and hold down the M (memory) button (4). 3. With the memory button depressed, press button (1) briefly to store the current position for the seat/mirrors. To move the seat and mirrors to the position that they were in when a button was programmed: – Press and hold down button (1) until the seat and mirrors stop moving.

Power seat memory buttons NOTE Button for storing a position As a safety precaution, the seat will stop automatically if the button is released Button for storing a position before the seat has reached the preset position. Button for storing a position

M (memory) button

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Key memory – power driver's seat* 3. To activate the remote key memory fea- NOTE and door mirrors ture, press ENTER (check the box). The remote key's memory feature and the Each remote key has a memory that enables it > The remote key is now ready to store power driver's seat memory function (the to store (remember) the position of the power the position of the power driver's seat settings made using the buttons on the driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehi- and door mirrors. side of the seat, see the section "Power cle is locked with that remote key. Repeat this procedure for each of the vehi- seat memory function" in Front seats – power seat (p. 79)) work independently of Remote key memory and the power cle's remote keys. each other. 13 See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for a driver's seat* and door mirrors 03 description of the menu system. Storing the positions of the power driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key 1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the desired position using the seat and mirror adjustment controls. 2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with the remote key (or close the driver's door and press the lock button on the door handle with the remote key in your possession on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). The key memory has to be activated for each > The positions of the power driver's of the remote keys used in the vehicle as seat and door mirrors are now stored follows: in the remote key's memory. 1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot. 2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to Settings Car settings Car key memory

13 This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81 03 Instruments and controls

|| Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored Emergency stop Rear seats – head restraints positions The rear seat head restraints can be folded To move the seat and door mirrors to the WARNING down. The center head restraint can be position stored in the remote key: raised/lowered according to the passenger's Because the driver's seat can be • height. 1. Unlock the driver's door with the same adjusted with the ignition off, children remote key (the one used to lock the should never be left unattended in the Rear center head restraint doors). For models equipped with the vehicle. optional keyless drive, you must have the • Movement of the seat can be STOP- 03 same remote key in your possession. PED at any time by pressing any but- 2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes. ton on the power seat control panel. Do not adjust the seat while driving. The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto- • The seat should be adjusted so that matically move to the position in which you the brake pedal can be depressed left them (if the vehicle has been unlocked fully. In addition, position the seat as with one of the other keys and new seat/ far rearward as comfort and control mirror adjustments have been made). allow. The seat rails on the floor must not be NOTE • obstructed in any way when the seat is • The seat will move to this position in motion. even if someone else has moved it to a different position and locked the vehi- Related information cle with a different remote key. • Remote key – functions (p. 149) • This feature will work in the same way with all of the remote keys that you use with your vehicle.

82 03 Instruments and controls

The center head restraint should be adjusted Manually folding down the rear seat's CAUTION according to the passenger's height. The outboard head restraints restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup- The rear head restraints should not be port the occupant's head. kept folded down for prolonged periods. This could result in pressure marks in • Pull the head restraint up as required. leather upholstery. • To lower, press and hold the button (located at the center, between the back- WARNING rest and the head restraint) while pressing the head restrain down carefully. For safety reasons, no one should be 03 allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded WARNING down. If these positions are occupied, the The center rear seat head restraint should head restraints should be in the upright only be in its lowest position when this (fixed) position. seat is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint • Pull the handle closest to the head Automatically folding down the rear should be correctly adjusted to the pas- restraint to fold it down. senger’s height. The upper edge of the seat’s outboard head restraints head restraint should be at least on a level • To return the head restraint to the upright with the upper-most point of the seat position, push it up until it clicks into occupant's ear. place.

NOTE • The head restraint must be returned to the upright position manually. • The outboard head restraints cannot be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button.

1. The ignition must be in mode II. 2. Press the button to lower the rear head restraints for improved visibility.

}} 83 03 Instruments and controls

|| NOTE Rear seats – folding backrest The rear seat head restraints and backrests The head restraint must be returned to • can be folded down. The center head the upright position manually. restraint can be raised/lowered according to • The outboard head restraints cannot the passenger's height. be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button. Folding down the rear seat backrests The three sections of the rear seat backrest can be folded down in different combinations 03 CAUTION to make it easier to transport long objects. The rear head restraints should not be kept folded down for prolonged periods. • The left (driver's side) section can be This could result in pressure marks in folded down separately. leather upholstery. • The center section can be folded down separately. WARNING • The right (passenger's side) section can only be folded down together with the For safety reasons, no one should be center section. allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded • All three sections can be folded down together. down. If these positions are occupied, the Release and lower the center head head restraints should be in the upright restraint (see Rear seats – head restraints (fixed) position. CAUTION (p. 82)) if the center and/or right section of To help avoid damage to the upholstery, the backrest is to be lowered. The out- Related information there should be no objects on the rear seat board head restraints fold down automat- • Front seats (p. 78) and the seat belt should not be buckled ically. when the backrest is folded down. • Front seats – power seat (p. 79) Pull up the backrest release control on • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82) the respective section(s) ( ) and fold the section(s) down. A red indicator ( ) shows that the backrest is not locked in the upright position.

84 03 Instruments and controls

NOTE Related information Steering wheel • Front seats (p. 78) The steering wheel can be adjusted to various It may be necessary to move the front seats forward or put their backrests in a • Front seats – power seat (p. 79) positions and has controls for the horn, cruise more upright position before folding down • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82) control*, menus, the infotainment system and the rear seat backrests. Bluetooth®-connected cell phone. Adjusting WARNING

• When one or more sections of the 03 backrest is returned to the upright position, check that it is properly locked in place by pushing and pulling it. The red indicators should also not be visible. • Return the outboard head restraints to the upright position. • Long loads should always be securely

anchored to help avoid injury in the G021138 event of a sudden stop. Adjusting the steering wheel • Always turn the engine off and apply the parking brake when loading/ Lever for releasing/locking the steering unloading the vehicle. wheel • Place the transmission in the Park (P) Possible positions position to help prevent inadvertent To adjust the steering wheel's height and movement of the gear selector. reach: • On hot days, the temperature in the 1. Pull the lever toward you to release the vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high tem- steering wheel. peratures for even a short period of 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position time can cause heat-related injury or that suits you. death. Small children are particularly at risk.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85 03 Instruments and controls

|| 3. Push back the lever to lock the steering control*, see Adaptive Cruise Control – Electrically heated* steering wheel wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to introduction (p. 179). The steering wheel can be heated electrically. push into place, press the steering wheel Paddles for manually shifting gears (Gear- lightly at the same time as you push the tronic), see Transmission – Geartronic lever. (p. 259). WARNING Infotainment system controls, see Sensus Infotainment supplement. Never adjust the steering wheel while driv- 03 ing. Horn

With the optional speed-dependent power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted, see Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 169). Keypads and steering wheel paddles* Button for steering wheel heating With the engine running, press this button once to begin warming the steering wheel (press again to switch off). The indicator light in the button will illuminate when the function is active. Horn This function can also be started automati- – Press the steering wheel hub to sound cally (the setting can be activated/deactivated the horn. in the MY CAR menu) if the vehicle is cold and the ambient temperature is below Related information approximately 50° F (10° C). • Electrically heated* steering wheel (p. 86) Steering wheel keypads and paddles* Cruise control, see Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 176). Adaptive cruise

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel With the headlight switch in the NOTE The lighting panel is used to control the day- position: The use of Daytime Running Lights is rec- time running lights, parking lights, etc., and to ommended in the United States and is In the US: the daytime running lights will adjust the instrument panel lighting and "the- • mandatory in Canada. ater" lighting (p. 91). be off • In Canada: the daytime running lights will be on With the headlight switch in the position: With the headlight switch in the 16 03 position and the ignition in mode II or if the • The daytime running lights will be off and engine is running (see Ignition modes (p. 77)) the low beam headlights will be on • In the US: the daytime running lights will be off • In Canada: the daytime running lights will be on

With the headlight switch in the posi- Lighting panel overview tion: Thumb wheel for adjusting display, instru- • The daytime running lights will be on (the ment and "theater" lighting (see Instru- low beam headlights will automatically ment and "theater" lighting (p. 91)) switch on in dark conditions) Rear fog lights (see Rear fog lights US models only: The daytime running lights (p. 92)) in mode can be switched on or off in Headlight switch the MY CAR menu system under Settings Car settings Light settings Daytime Volvo recommends using the posi- running lights. tion whenever possible. Headlight switch positions Daytime running lights function as follows:

16 The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.

87 03 Instruments and controls

High/low beam headlights High beam flash Active high beams (AHB)* When the engine is started, the low beams Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to AHB uses a camera at the upper edge of the are activated automatically if the headlight position 1. The high beams come on until the windshield to detect the headlights of oncom- control is in position . lever is released. ing vehicles or the taillights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this happens, the head- Related information lights will automatically switch from high • Active Bending Lights (ABL)* (p. 90) beams to low beams. When the camera no • Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 88) longer detects the headlights/taillights of 03 • Lighting panel (p. 87) other vehicles, your headlights will switch • Tunnel detection (models with the rain back to high beams after several seconds. sensor* only) (p. 90) To activate AHB: • Turn the headlight control to the position. The feature will begin functioning if the engine has been running for at least 20 seconds and the vehicle's speed is at least 12 mph Headlight switch and steering wheel lever (20 km/h). High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams

Continuous high beam headlights With the headlight switch in the (in dark conditions only, when the daytime running lights have automatically switched off and the low beam headlights have switched on) or position: • Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to position 2 and release it to toggle between low and high beams. Headlight switch in the AUTO position

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Switch AHB on or off by pulling the left steer- NOTE CAUTION ing wheel lever rearward (toward the steering wheel) as far as possible and releasing it. If • Keep the windshield in front of the In the following situations, it may be nec- AHB is switched off while the high beams are camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. essary to switch between high and low beams manually: on, the headlights will change to low beams. • Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could • In heavy fog or rain obstruct the camera. • In blowing snow or slush • In bright moonlight Active high beam Temporary If • In freezing rain 03 unavailable Switch manually is displayed in the instrument panel, switching between high • In areas with dim street lighting and low beams will have to be done man- • When oncoming vehicles have dim ually. However, the light switch can remain in front lighting the position. The same applies if • If there are pedestrians on or near the Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed road and the symbol is displayed. The • If there are reflective objects, such as symbol will go out when these messages are signs, near the road Models with an analog instrument panel displayed. • When oncoming vehicles' lights are obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc. When AHB is activated, the symbol will AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in illuminate in the instrument panel. The high heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active • When there are vehicles on connecting again or if the sensors in the windshield are roads beam indicator ( ) in the instrument panel no longer obscured, the messages will disap- will also illuminate when the high beams are • At the top of hills or in dips in the road on. pear and the symbol will illuminate. • In sharp curves Models with a digital instrument panel When AHB is activated, will illuminate See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for as a white symbol in the instrument panel. more information about the camera's limita- When the high beams are on, the symbol will tions. blue. change to Related information • High/low beam headlights (p. 88) • Lighting panel (p. 87)

89 03 Instruments and controls

Tunnel detection (models with the rain Active Bending Lights (ABL)* See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for a sensor* only) With ABL activated, the headlight beams description of the menu system. For models without automatic low beams, adjust laterally to help light up a curve tunnel detection activates the low beams according to movements of the steering NOTE when the vehicle enters a tunnel. The low wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the fol- This function is only active in twilight or beams are switched off approx. 20 seconds lowing illustration). dark conditions, and only when the vehicle after the vehicle leaves the tunnel. is in motion. The rain sensor reacts to the change in light- 03 ing conditions when, for example, the vehicle If a fault should occur in the system, the sym- enters a tunnel and the tunnel detection fea- bol will illuminate and a message will be dis- ture will then activate the low beam head- played as shown in the table. lights. The low beams will be switched off approx. 20 seconds after the vehicle leaves Symbol Display Explanation the tunnel. Headlamp The system is The rain sensor does not have to be activated failure not functioning for tunnel detection to function. Service properly and Related information required should be inspected/ • Lighting panel (p. 87) Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function deactivated (left) and activated (right) repaired by a • High/low beam headlights (p. 88) trained and 17 ABL is activated automatically when the qualified Volvo engine is started. service techni- The function can be deactivated/reactivated cian. in the MY CAR menu system under My V60 Active Bending Lights or under Settings Car settings Light settings Active Bending Lights.

17 The factory default setting is on.

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Cornering lights18 Auxiliary lights* Instrument and "theater" lighting Models equipped with ABL also have front If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the cornering lights that temporarily provide extra driver can use the MY CAR menu system to Instrument lighting light to the front left or right of the vehicle at choose to deactivate and turn these lights on Illumination of the display and instrument low speeds when making a sharp turn (for and off along with the high beam headlights. lights will vary, depending on ignition mode. example, when turning into a parking space) The display lighting is automatically subdued The auxiliary lights must be connected to the or when the turn signals are used. in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the vehicle's electrical system, which should only thumb wheel. This feature is activated when: be done by a trained and authorized Volvo 03 • High or low beam headlights are on service technician. See My Car – introduction The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumb wheel. and (p. 74) for more information about the menu system. • The vehicle's speed is below "Theater" lighting 20 mph (30 km/h) When the overhead courtesy lighting has The feature is also activated when the vehicle gone out and the engine is running, several is backing up. LEDs located near the roof console illuminate to provide faint lighting for the occupants of The cornering lights are deactivated when the the front seats. This lighting goes out just vehicle's speed exceeds approx. 25 mph after the overhead courtesy lighting when the (40 km/h). vehicle is locked. Related information Related information • Lighting panel (p. 87) • Lighting panel (p. 87) • High/low beam headlights (p. 88) • Front interior lighting (p. 94) • Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 88) • Rear interior lighting (p. 95) • Ignition modes (p. 77)

18 Certain models only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91 03 Instruments and controls

Parking lights Rear fog lights NOTE The rear fog lights are considerably brighter Turn the headlight switch to the posi- The rear fog lights are considerably than the normal taillights and should be used • tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the brighter than the normal taillights and only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, same time). should be used only when conditions smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehi- such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust cles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters). reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters). • Condensation may form temporarily on 03 the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time.

Headlight switch in the parking light position Related information • Lighting panel (p. 87) Canadian models: If the ignition is in position II or the engine is running, the daytime run- The rear fog lights will only function in combi- ning lights will also be on. nation with the high/low beam headlights. With the headlight switch in this position, the – Press the button to switch the rear fog parking lights will remain on even when the lights on/off. ignition is switched off. > The rear fog light indicator symbol In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear on the instrument panel and the parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate light in the button illuminate when the is opened to alert anyone traveling behind rear fog lights are switched on. your vehicle. This happens regardless of the position that the headlight control is in or which mode the ignition is in. Related information • Lighting panel (p. 87)

92 03 Instruments and controls

Hazard warning flashers Related information Turn signals The hazard warning flasher should be used to • Turn signals (p. 93) The turn signals are controlled by the left indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic steering wheel lever. hazard. When the function is activated, both turn signal indicators in the instrument panel will flash.

Turn signals When changing lanes The driver can automatically flash the turn signals 3 times by moving the turn signal Location of the hazard warning flasher button lever up or down to the first position and – To activate the flashers, press the button releasing it. in the center dash. Press the button again to turn off the flashers. When turning Move the lever as far up or down as pos- NOTE sible to start the turn signals. The turn signals will be cancelled automatically by the move- Regulations regarding the use of the • ment of the steering wheel, or the lever can hazard warning flasher may vary, be returned to its initial position by hand. depending on where you live. • The hazard warning flashers will be activated automatically if an airbag deploys.

}} 93 03 Instruments and controls

|| NOTE Front interior lighting Overhead courtesy lighting The lighting in the front part of the passenger The passenger compartment lighting is This automatic flashing sequence can • compartment is controlled with the buttons in switched on and off automatically when but- be interrupted by immediately moving the ceiling console. ton (3) is in the neutral position. the lever in the opposite direction. • If the turn signal indicator flashes The lighting comes on and remains on for faster than normal, check for a 30 seconds if: burned-out turn signal bulb. • the vehicle is unlocked from the outside with the key or remote control 03 Related information • the engine is switched off and the ignition • Hazard warning flashers (p. 93) is in mode 0. The lighting switches off when: • the engine is started • the vehicle is locked from the outside.

G021149 The lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open. Light switches, front roof lighting The passenger compartment lighting can be Drivers side front reading light, on/off switched on and off manually within Passenger's side front reading light, 30 minutes after the vehicle has been on/off unlocked. Overhead courtesy lighting. If the lighting is switched on manually and the vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will Switch (3) has three positions for all passen- switch off automatically after one minute. ger compartment lighting: Courtesy lights/door step lighting* • Off: right side depressed, automatic light- The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch ing off. on/off automatically when one of the front • Neutral position: automatic lighting is doors is opened/closed. on. Glove compartment lighting • On – left side depressed, passenger The glove compartment lighting switches compartment lighting on. on/off automatically when the lid is opened/ closed.

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Related information Rear interior lighting Home safe lighting • Rear interior lighting (p. 95) The lights are switched on or off by pressing When you leave your vehicle at night, you can each respective button. make use of the home safe lighting function to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.

This function illuminates the headlights, parking lights, lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights, front ceiling lighting and footwell lighting. These lights will remain on for 30 19, 03 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be set in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Home safe light duration. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for a description of the menu system.

G021150 1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to Rear reading lights put the ignition in mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 77) for information about the Cargo area lighting ignition modes). The cargo area lighting comes on automati- 2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible cally when the tailgate is opened. towards the steering wheel and release it. Related information 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. • Front interior lighting (p. 94) Related information • Approach lighting (p. 96)

19 Factory setting

95 03 Instruments and controls

Approach lighting Windshield wipers Windshield wipers off Approach lighting activates the parking lights, Move the lever toward the steering wheel to Move the lever to position 0 to door mirror lights, license plate lighting, dome start the windshield and headlight washers. switch off the windshield wipers. lighting and door step lighting when you After the lever is released the wipers make Single sweep approach the vehicle. several extra sweeps. Move the lever upward from posi- This function is activated by pressing the tion 0 to sweep the windshield one approach light button on the remote key (see stroke at a time for as long as the the illustration in Remote key – functions lever is held up. 03 (p. 149)). Intermittent wiping With the lever in this position, you The time interval for this lighting can be set can set the wiper interval by twisting by pressing MY CAR and going to Car the thumb wheel upward to increase settings Light settings Approach light wiper speed or downward to decrease the duration. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) speed. for a description of the menu system. Continuous wiping Related information The wipers operate at normal • Home safe lighting (p. 95) speed. Windshield wipers and washers The wipers operate at high speed. Rain sensor* on/off

Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency Windshield wiper service position The windshield wipers must be in the service CAUTION position before the wiper blades can be cleaned or replaced. See Wiper blades – • Use ample washer fluid when washing service position (p. 346) for additional infor- the windshield. The windshield should mation. be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation. Related information • Before using the wipers, ice and snow • Engine compartment – washer fluid should be removed from the wind- (p. 348) shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in place.

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Rain sensor* Deactivating Windshield washer The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the Move the lever toward the steering wheel to speed according to the amount of water on button or press the lever down to start the windshield and headlight washers. the windshield. another wiper position. After the lever is released the wipers make several extra sweeps. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be The rain sensor is automatically deactivated adjusted moving the thumb wheel up (the when the key is removed from the ignition wipers will sweep the windshield more fre- slot or five minutes after the ignition has been quently) or down (the wipers will sweep the switched off. windshield less frequently). 03 CAUTION NOTE The rain sensor should be deactivated The wipers will make an extra sweep each when washing the car in an automatic car time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward. wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the car wash and could be damaged. When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. Activating and setting the sensitivity Washing function When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle Heated washer nozzles* must be running or in ignition mode II and the The washer nozzles are heated automatically windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 in cold weather to help prevent the washer or in the single sweep position. fluid from freezing. Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but- High-pressure headlight washing* ton . The windshield wipers will make High-pressure headlight washing consumes a one sweep. large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, Press the lever up for the wipers to make an the headlights are washed using two alterna- extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active tives: mode when the stalk is released back to • Low/high beam headlights on. The 0 position . headlights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the headlights will only be washed once for

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97 03 Instruments and controls

|| every five times the windshield is washed Tailgate wiper/washer Tailgate wiper and reverse gear within a 10-minute period. The tailgate wiper operates at two speeds: If the windshield wipers are on and the trans- • Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend- intermittent and continuous. mission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate ing Lights will be washed once for every wiper will go into intermittent wiping func- five times the windshield is washed. Nor- tion20. This function is deactivated when a dif- mal halogen headlights will not be ferent gear is selected. washed. NOTE CAUTION 03 On vehicles with the optional rain sensor, • Use ample washer fluid when washing the tailgate wiper will be activated when the windshield. The windshield should reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is be thoroughly wet when the wipers are activated and it is raining. in operation. • When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continu- washer fluid remains in the reservoir, ous) wiping mode, selecting different gears the headlights will no longer be Move the lever forward to start the tailgate will not affect its function. washed. A text message will also be washer. displayed to remind the driver to fill the Related information Intermittent wiping washer fluid reservoir. • Engine compartment – washer fluid Normal (continuous) wiping (p. 348) Related information • Engine compartment – washer fluid NOTE (p. 348) The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-off function, which means that it will not operate if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will function again after a cool-down period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat of the motor and ambient temperature conditions).

20 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

98 03 Instruments and controls

Power windows WARNING vehicle has been running, the power windows All power windows can be operated using the can be operated for several minutes after the Always remove the ignition key when control panel in the driver's door. The control • remote key has been removed from the igni- the vehicle is unattended to put the panels in the other doors only operate the tion slot, or until a door has been opened. ignition in mode 0 (see Ignition modes window in the respective doors. (p. 77) for information about the igni- NOTE tion modes). • Never leave children unattended in the • Movement of the windows will stop if vehicle. they are obstructed in any way. 03 • Make sure that the windows are com- • To reduce buffeting wind noise if the pletely unobstructed before they are rear windows are opened, also open operated. the front windows slightly.

Operating Manual up/down – Move one of the controls up/down slightly. > The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position. Driver's door control panel Auto up/down Switch for disengaging rear door power – Move one of the controls up/down as far window buttons as possible and release it. Rear door window controls > The window will open or close com- Front door window controls. pletely. Resetting If the battery has been disconnected, the Operating the power windows auto open function must be reset so that it Manual up/down will work properly.

Auto up/down. 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for For the power windows to function, the igni- one second. tion must be in at least mode I. When the 2. Release the button briefly.

}} 99 03 Instruments and controls

3. Raise the front section of the button again Power door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* for one second. The control on the driver's door is used to The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv- adjust the position of the door mirrors. ing in narrow spaces: 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the same time. 2. Release them after approximately one second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position. 03 Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position. Storing the position* The mirror positions are stored in the key Door mirror controls memory when the vehicle has been locked with the remote key. When the vehicle is Adjusting unlocked with the same remote control the L 1. Press the button for the left door mirror mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored R or the button for the right door mirror. positions when the driver's door is opened. The light in the button comes on. The function can be activated/deactivated in 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the MY CAR under Settings Car settings center. Car key memory Personal settings in 3. Press the L or R button again. The light key memory. See My Car – introduction should no longer be on. (p. 74) for a description of the menu system. WARNING Objects seen in the mirrors may appear further away than they actually are.

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Tilting the door mirrors when parking* Home safe and approach lighting Power door mirrors – automatic The door mirrors can be tilted down to help The light on the door mirrors comes on when tilting/retraction give the driver a better view along the sides of approach lighting or home safe lighting is The control on the driver's door is used to the vehicle, for example when parallel park- selected, see Approach lighting (p. 96) and adjust the position of the door mirrors. ing. Home safe lighting (p. 95). Automatically tilting the door mirrors To activate this function, select reverse gear Related information when parking and press the L or R mirror control button to • Interior rearview mirror (p. 103) tilt the mirror down. The door mirrors can tilt down automatically Heated windshield*, rear window and • to help give the driver a better view along the 03 The function can be activated/deactivated in door mirror defrosters (p. 102) sides of the vehicle, for example when paral- MY CAR under Settings Car settings • Power door mirrors – automatic tilting/ lel parking. When the transmission is no Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt retraction (p. 101) longer in reverse, the mirrors will automati- right mirror. See My Car – introduction cally return to their original position. (p. 74) for a description of the menu system. This function can be activated/deactivated in The door mirror will reset to its normal posi- MY CAR under Settings Car settings tion: Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt • after 10 seconds when reverse is disen- left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right gaged and the car remains stopped. mirror. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for information about the MY CAR menu system. • immediately when reverse is disengaged and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds Automatic retraction when locking approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the • immediately if you press the correspond- remote key the door mirrors are automatically ing L or R button again. retracted/extended. • when the engine is turned off. The function can be activated/deactivated in • when the side mirrors are folded in. MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors NOTE when locking. See My Car – introduction Only one mirror can be tilted down at a (p. 74) for a description of the menu system. time.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101 03 Instruments and controls

|| Resetting to neutral Heated windshield*, rear window and Climate settings Automatic rear Mirrors that have been moved out of position door mirror defrosters defroster. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) by an external force must be electrically reset The heating function is used to defrost/de-ice for a description of the menu system. to the neutral position for electric retracting/ the windshield and/or the rear window and extending to work. door mirrors. • Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons. • Fold them out again with the L and R but- 03 tons. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. Related information • Interior rearview mirror (p. 103) • Heated windshield*, rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 102)

Max. defroster/heated windshield (1), rear window and door mirror defroster (2) Press button (1) to defrost/de-ice the windshield and/or button (2) to defrost the rear window and door mirrors. The indicator lights in the respective buttons indicate that the function is active. Switch the function off when then windshield/rear window/mirrors have cleared to help avoid battery drain. The heating function will also switch off automatically after a certain amount of time. Auto-defrosting for the rear window and door mirrors (if the vehicle is started when the ambient temperature is below 45 °F (7 °C) can be selected in MY CAR under Settings

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Interior rearview mirror Digital compass* Calibration The interior rearview mirror has an auto-dim The rear-view mirror has an integrated display North America is divided into 15 magnetic function that helps reduce glare from follow- that shows the compass direction in which zones and the compass will need to be cali- ing vehicle's headlights. the vehicle is traveling. brated if the vehicle is driven into a new one (see the magnetic zones on the map in the Auto-dim function Operation following section "Selecting a magnetic The interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim func- zone"). To do so: tion is controlled by two sensors: one point- 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, ing forward (located on the forward-facing safely out of traffic and away from steel 03 side of the mirror, which monitors the amount structures and high-tension electrical of ambient light) and one pointing rearward wires. (located on the side of the mirror facing the driver at the upper edge, which senses the 2. Start the vehicle. strength of following vehicles' headlights), and work together to help eliminate glare.21 NOTE • For best calibration results, switch off NOTE all electrical equipment in the vehicle Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g., (climate system, windshield wipers, parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the Rearview mirror with compass. audio system, etc.) and make sure that rear sensor by loading the cargo area or Eight different directions are shown with the all doors are closed. the rear seat in such a way that light is abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E Calibration may not succeed or be prevented from reaching the sensor will • (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (south- incorrect if the vehicle's electrical reduce the auto-dim function in the interior W NW rearview mirror and optional auto-dim west), (west) and (northwest). equipment is not switched off. function in the door mirrors. The compass is displayed automatically when the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To 3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object, Related information switch the compass on/off use a pen, paper- press and hold the button on the under- • Power door mirrors (p. 100) clip or similar object and press in the button side of mirror for approx. 6 seconds until on the underside of the mirror. C is displayed in the mirror.

21 The auto-dim function is also available as an option on the door mirrors. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103 03 Instruments and controls

|| 4. Press and hold the button for 3 seconds Selecting a magnetic zone Power moonroof* – introduction until the number of the current magnetic 1 The moonroof controls are located in the ceil- zone is displayed. ing console near the rearview mirror. 2 15 5. Press the button repeatedly until the 14 The moonroof's sun visor opens automatically number of the desired magnetic zone 3 but has to be closed manually. (1-15) is displayed. See the magnetic 13 There is a wind blocker in the moonroof's zones on the map in the following section 4 "Selecting a magnetic zone"). front edge. 12 03 6. Wait until C is again displayed in the mir- 5 8 The moonroof controls are located in the ceil- 11 ror. 9 10 ing console near the rearview mirror. The moonroof can be opened vertically and hori- 6 7

7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no G018632 zontally. The vehicle's ignition must be in more than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direc- mode I or II for the moonroof to be operated. tion is displayed. This indicates that cali- Magnetic zones. bration is complete. The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. CAUTION 8. Drive around in a circle an additional two The correct zone must be selected for the times to fine-tune the calibration. compass to work correctly. • Remove ice and snow before opening the moonroof. 9. Vehicles with an electrically heated 1. Put the ignition in mode II. • Do not operate the moonroof if it is windshield:* if C is displayed when the 2. Using a pen or similar object, press and frozen closed. heating function is activated, perform hold the button on the rear side of mirror step 7 with the heating function on. See • Never place heavy objects on the for at least 3 seconds. The number for the moonroof. also Max. defroster and electrically current area will be shown. heated windshield* (p. 129) for additional information about the heated windshield. 3. Press the button repeatedly until the Visor number for the required geographic area The moonroof features a sliding visor. The Repeat the calibration procedure if neces- (1 – 15) is shown. sary. visor slides open automatically when the 4. The display will revert to showing the moonroof is opened, and must be closed compass direction after several seconds. manually.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Wind blocker Power moonroof* – operation Automatic opening The moonroof controls are located in the ceil- – Pull the switch as far back as possible (to ing console near the rearview mirror. the position for automatic opening) and release it to automatically fully slide open The moonroof's sun visor opens automatically the moonroof. but has to be closed manually. Manual opening There is a wind blocker in the moonroof's – Pull the switch back to the first stop (the front edge. position for manual opening) and hold it Sliding moonroof until the moonroof has opened to the 03 position of your choice. Manual closing – Push the switch forward to the first stop (the position for manual closing) and hold The moonroof is equipped with a wind it until the moonroof has closed to the blocker that folds up when the moonroof is position of your choice, or has closed open. completely. G017823

Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105 03 Instruments and controls

|| Automatic closing Tilt position HomeLink® Wireless Control System* – Push the switch as far forward as possi- – introduction ble (the position for automatic closing) HomeLink® can be used to open garage and release it to automatically close the doors, gates, etc. moonroof.

WARNING • During manual closing, if the moonroof 03 is obstructed, immediately open it again. • Never open or close the moonroof if it is obstructed in any way. G028900 • Never allow a child to operate the Tilt position, raised at the rear edge moonroof. Open by pressing the rear edge of the • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. control upward. • When leaving the vehicle, ensure that Close by pulling the rear edge of the con- the ignition is in mode 0 (see Ignition trol downward and hold it until the moon- modes (p. 77) for information about the roof has closed completely. various ignition modes) to disable the moonroof. Never leave the remote key in the vehicle. • Never extend any object or body part though the open moonroof, even if the vehicle's ignition is completely switched off.

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

WARNING Retain the original transmitter of the RF HomeLink® Wireless Control System* device you are programming for use in other – programming • If you use HomeLink® to open a vehicles as well as for future HomeLink pro- garage door or gate, be sure no one is The HomeLink Wireless Control System programming. It is also suggested that upon the vides a convenient way to replace up to three near the gate or door while it is in sale of the vehicle, the programmed Home- motion. hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters Link buttons be erased for security purposes. used to activate devices such as gate opera- When programming a garage door • Refer to “Resetting HomeLink Buttons” in tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, opener, it is advised to park outside of ® HomeLink Wireless Control System* – pro- security systems, even home lighting. Addi- the garage. gramming (p. 107). tional information can be found on the Inter- 03 • Do not use HomeLink® with any Using HomeLink net atwww.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/ garage door opener that lacks safety HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at To operate, simply press and hold the pro- stop and reverse features as required 1–800–355–3515. by U.S. federal safety standards (this grammed HomeLink button until the trained includes any garage door opener device begins to operate (this may take sev- NOTE model manufactured before April 1, eral seconds). Activation will now occur for 1982). A garage door that cannot the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, Some vehicles may require the ignition to detect an object - signaling the door to gate operator, security system, entry door be switched on or be in the “accessories” stop and reverse - does not meet cur- lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For conven- position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that rent U.S. federal safety standards. For ience, the hand-held transmitter of the device a new battery be placed in the hand-held more information, contact HomeLink may also be used at any time. In the event transmitter of the device being pro- at: www.homelink.com. that there are still programming difficulties or grammed to HomeLink for quicker training questions, contact HomeLink at: and accurate transmission of the radio-fre- The HomeLink®22 Wireless Control System www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/ quency signal. The HomeLink buttons must be reset first. When this has been provides a convenient way to replace up to HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. completed, Homelink is in learning mode three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) trans- so that you can perform programming. mitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door NOTE locks, security systems, even home lighting. 1. Position the end of your hand-held trans- If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from Additional information can be found on the will function for 30 minutes after the driv- Internet at, www.homelink.com/ er's door has been opened. the HomeLink button you wish to pro- www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by gram while keeping the indicator light in phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. view.

22 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107 03 Instruments and controls

|| 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and chosen HomeLink and hand-held trans- release the programmed HomeLink but- mitter buttons until the HomeLink indica- ton up to two separate times to activate tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly the door. If the door does not activate, blinking light. Now you may release both press and hold the just-trained HomeLink the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter button and observe the indicator light. buttons. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete NOTE 03 and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and Some devices may require you to replace 4. At the garage door opener receiver released. this Programming Step 2 with procedures (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian • If the indicator light blinks rapidly for the “learn” or “smart” button. This can Programming” section. If the HomeLink two seconds and then turns to a indicator light does not change to a rapidly usually be found where the hanging constant light continue with “Pro- antenna wire is attached to the motor- blinking light after performing these steps, gramming” steps 4-6 to complete the contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com/ head unit. programming of a rolling code equip- www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. ped device (most commonly a garage door opener). “smart” button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process. HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

108 03 Instruments and controls

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink interference that may be received including Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- buttons until the indicator light begins to interference that may cause undesired opera- mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- flash. tion. eral seconds of transmission – which may not 2. Release both buttons. be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the NOTE > HomeLink is now in the training (or signal during programming. Similar to this learning) mode and can be pro- The transmitter has been tested and com- Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are grammed at any time beginning with plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or designed to “time-out” in the same manner. “Programming” - step 1. modifications not expressly approved by If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- the party responsible for compliance could 03 culties programming a gate operator or Reprogramming a Single HomeLink void the user’s authority to operate the device.23 garage door opener by using the “Program- Button ming” procedures, replace “Programming To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink” step 2 with the following: HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release - 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand- button. DO NOT release the button. held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rap- 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after idly blinking light. Now you may release 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home- both the HomeLink and hand-held trans- Link button, proceed with “Programming” mitter buttons. - step 1. Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com- For questions or comments, contact Home- plete. Link at: www.homelink.com/ www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by Resetting HomeLink Buttons phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. Use the following procedure to reset (erase This device complies with FCC rules part 15 programming) from the three HomeLink but- and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation tons (individual buttons cannot be reset but is subject to the following two conditions: (1) can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol- This device may not cause harmful interfer- lowing section): ence, and (2) This device must accept any

23 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

109 03 Instruments and controls

Volvo Sensus driving and operating the vehicle, such as Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR. Volvo Sensus is the core of the contact inter- City Safety, lock and alarm functions, auto- Internet connected vehicle. face with your vehicle. Sensus provides infor- matic blower speed, setting the clock, etc. mation, entertainment and offers access to Pressing the source buttons on the center Climate system. functions that make owning and operating a console (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, , NAV* and Park assist camera - CAM*. Volvo easier. CAM*, etc.) make it possible to select e.g., AM or FM radio, play a CD or DVD, use the Related information Bluetooth® hands-free feature, the navigation My Car – introduction (p. 74) 03 system* or the park assist camera*. • • Climate – general information (p. 122) See your on-board owner’s manual or the Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- separate printed supplements for detailed • duction (p. 241) information about the functionality offered by Volvo Sensus.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your vehicle and it enables you to interact intui- tively with the vehicle’s various features and functions, including accessing the Internet, when it suits you. Volvo Sensus uses the center console screen to display information and menus, and to offer a user interface that enables you to make personalized settings for e.g., vehicle, infotainment and climate system functions. Center console control panel The buttons on the center console or the steering wheel keypad are used to activate/ Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV: deactivate functions and change numerous see the separate VNS manual for operat- settings. ing instructions. Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL) Pressing the MY CAR button on the center console displays all of the settings related to

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Information display – menu controls Information display – menu overview The controls on the left steering wheel lever The menus displayed depend on the current are used to access the menus (p. 111) that ignition mode (p. 77). are displayed in the instrument panel (p. 66). The menus displayed depend on the current The following menu alternatives may vary, ignition mode (p. 77). depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. Analog instrument panel Digital speed 03 Trip comp. opt. Service status Digital Instrument panel* and menu controls 24 OK: access to the list of mes- Messages (##) sages (p. 112) and message confirmation. Digital instrument panel* Thumb wheel: browse among menus and Settings options in the list of functions. Themes Analog Instrument panel and menu controls RESET: reset the active function. Used in Contrast mode/Color mode certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each Service status respective function. Messages The menus shown on the information displays Trip computer reset in the instrument panel are controlled with the left lever. The menus displayed depend on Related information ignition mode. Press OK to erase a message Information displays – introduction (p. 66) and return to the menus. • • Information display – menu controls (p. 111) • Information display – messages (p. 112)

24 Number of messages in parentheses

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111 03 Instruments and controls

Information display – messages Message Description Message Description The controls on the left steering wheel lever are used to scroll among messages displayed Stop Stop and switch off the Time for Time for regular service at in the instrument panel and to confirm selec- engineA engine as soon as possi- regular an authorized Volvo work- tions. ble. Serious risk of dam- mainte- shop. The timing is deter- age. Contact an author- nance mined by the number of When information, indicator or warning sym- ized Volvo workshop. miles driven, number of bols illuminate, an explanatory message will months since the last A be displayed in the instrument panel. Stop safely Stop and switch off the service, engine running 03 engine. Serious risk of time. When a warning (p. 72), information (p. 70) or damage. Contact an indicator symbol (p. 70) comes on, a corres- authorized Volvo work- Mainte- If the service intervals are ponding message appears in the information shop. nance over- not followed, the warranty panel. An error message is stored in a mem- due does not cover any dam- ory list until the fault is rectified. Service Have the vehicle checked aged parts. Contact an A Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among urgent by an authorized Volvo authorized Volvo work- the messages. workshop immediately. shop for service. Service Have the vehicle checked Temporarily A function has been tem- NOTE A required by an authorized Volvo OFFA porarily switched off and If a warning message appears while you workshop as soon as pos- is reset automatically while are using the trip computer, the message sible. driving or after starting must be read and confirmed by pressing again. OK before the previous activity can be See man- Read the owner's manual. A resumed. ual Low battery The audio system is Power save switched off to save cur- Book time Time to book service at an mode rent. Charge the battery. for mainte- authorized Volvo retailer. nance A There will also be a system-specific part of this message

112 03 Instruments and controls

Related information Trip computer – introduction The instrument panel illuminates as soon as • Information displays – introduction (p. 66) The content and appearance of the trip com- the vehicle is unlocked and trip computer set- • Information display – menu overview puter varies depending on whether the vehi- tings can be made. If none of the trip com- (p. 111) cle is equipped with an Analog or Digital puter's controls are used within 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened, the Information display – menu controls instrument panel. • instrument panel lighting will go out and the (p. 111) trip computer cannot be used again until: • the ignition is put in mode II25 • the engine is started 03

NOTE If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged in order to return to the trip computer function. Acknowl- edge a message by pressing OK.

Analog information display and controls Related information • Trip computer – functions, analog instrument panel (p. 114) • Trip computer – functions, digital instrument panel (p. 117) • Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 119) • Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 120)

Digital information displays and controls

25 See Ignition modes (p. 77) for information about the various ignition modes.

113 03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer – functions, analog OK–press to access the trip computer's 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer instrument panel functions or acknowledge/confirm/erase controls are being used in a command a message sequence; reset them by pressing RESET Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of twice. trip computer information headings and 2. Press OK to open the list of functions. to scroll among the alternatives 3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func- functions and select/confirm your choice tion after a selection has been made by pressing OK. 03 The trip computer has two different menu 4. After completing your selection, exit by groups: pressing RESET twice. Trip computer functions • The following table lists the analog trip com- • Trip computer information headings in the puter's functions: instrument panel Information display and controls Functions To open and make settings in the trip computer functions:

114 03 Instruments and controls

Function Description

Digital speed This displays the vehicle's speed digitally in the center of the instrument panel – km/h • Open by pressing OK, scroll using the thumb wheel, confirm by pressing OK and exit by pressing ENTER. – mph – None

Trip comp. opt. Selections among the trip computer information headings are made here. The symbols that have already 03 been selected have a check mark and are displayed in white. Those not selected are not checked and – Distance to empty are displayed in gray: – Fuel consumption 1. Open the function by pressing OK and scroll to the desired heading using the thumb wheel. – Average speed 2. Confirm by pressing OK. The symbol will change colors from gray to white and will be checked. – Trip odometer T1 and total dist. 3. Continue this procedure or exit by pressing RESET. – Trip odometer T2 and total dist.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Messages (##) For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 111).

Information headings 2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display- Any of the information headings in the following the information headings. Stop on the ing table can be displayed. To do so: desired heading. 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer 3. See the table for an explanation of the controls are being used in a command heading or the actions that can be taken. sequence; reset them by pressing RESET twice.

}} 115 03 Instruments and controls

|| Information headings in the instrument Description panel Trip odometer T1 and total dist. • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1. Trip odometer T2 and total dist. • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2. Distance to empty See Distance to empty in Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 119).

03 Fuel consumption Current fuel consumption. Average speed Press and hold RESET to reset Average speed.

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information headings at any time by turning the thumb wheel until the desired heading is displayed. Related information • Trip computer – introduction (p. 113) • Trip computer – functions, digital instrument panel (p. 117) • Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 119) • Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 120)

116 03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer – functions, digital OK–press to access the trip computer's 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer instrument panel functions or to activate a selection controls are being used in a command Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of sequence; reset them by pressing RESET trip computer information headings and twice. to scroll among the alternatives 2. Press OK to open the list of functions. RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func- 3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the tion after a selection has been made functions and select/confirm your choice The trip computer has two different menu by pressing OK. groups: 03 4. After completing your selection, exit by • Trip computer functions pressing RESET twice. • Trip computer information headings in the The following table lists the digital trip com- instrument panel puter's functions: Functions Information displays and controls To open and make settings in the trip computer functions:

Function Description

Trip computer reset NOTE: This function does not reset the trip odometers, see Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 119) for a description of how this is done. – Average fuel consumption – Average speed

Messages For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 111).

Themes Set the way in which information is displayed in the instrument panel, see Information displays – introduction (p. 66).

Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117 03 Instruments and controls

|| Function Description

Contrast mode/Color mode Adjust the instrument panel's contrast and color.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Information headings 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer 3. See the table for an explanation of the Three trip computer headings can be dis- controls are being used in a command heading or the actions that can be taken. 03 sequence; reset them by pressing RESET played at the same time; one in each of the Scroll among the combinations of trip com- twice. displays (see the previous illustration). One of puter information headings at any time by the combinations of information headings in 2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display- turning the thumb wheel until the desired the following table can be displayed. To do ing the combinations of information head- combination is displayed. so: ings. Stop on the desired combination.

Heading combinations Description Average fuel consump- Trip odometer T1 + mile- Average speed • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1. tion age Current fuel consumption Trip odometer T2 + mile- Distance to empty • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2. age

Current fuel consumption Mileage mph<>km/h Change between mph<>km/h – see "Digital speed display" in Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 119).

- No trip computer informa- - No information will be displayed. This also indicates the begin- tion displayed ning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information Related information • Trip computer – Supplementary informa- headings at any time by turning the thumb • Trip computer – introduction (p. 113) tion (p. 119) wheel until the desired heading is displayed. • Trip computer – functions, analog instru- • Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 120) ment panel (p. 114)

118 03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer – Supplementary driving style will generally increase this dis- 2. Select one of the following alternatives information tance. using the thumb wheel and press OK: General information for both Analog and Digi- See Economical driving (p. 285) for informa- • mpg tal trip computer functions. tion about driving economically. • mph Average fuel consumption Digital speed display* • Reset both Fuel consumption since the last time this Speed is expressed in the unit not used by 3. Finish by pressing RESET. function was reset. the instrument panel's speedometer e.g., if the normal speedometer is in mph, the trip Changing units Average speed 03 computer will display in the speed in km/h To change the unit (miles/km) used to meas- The vehicle's average speed since the last and vice versa. ure distance and speed, go to MY CAR time this function was reset. Resetting an analog instrument panel Settings System options Distance Current fuel consumption and fuel units. Current fuel consumption is calculated Trip odometer(s) and average speed approximately once a second. When the vehi- 1. Display trip odometer T1 or T1, or Aver- NOTE cle is moving at low speed, fuel consumption age speed. In addition to changing units in the trip is displayed per unit of time. At higher 2. Press and hold RESET until selected computer, this also changes the units used speeds, it is displayed in terms of distance. function is reset. in the Volvo Navigation System (VNS)*. Miles or kilometers can be displayed, see the Each trip computer heading must be reset heading "Changing units". individually. Related information • Trip computer – introduction (p. 113) Distance to empty Resetting a digital instrument panel This function shows the approximate dis- • Trip computer – functions, analog instru- Trip odometer tance that can be driven on the fuel remaining ment panel (p. 114) thumb wheel in the tank. When Distance to empty shows 1. Turn the to select the com- • Trip computer – functions, digital instru- "----", there is very little useable fuel remain- bination of headings containing the trip ment panel (p. 117) odometer to be reset. ing in that tank; refuel as soon as possible. • Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 120) The calculation is based on average fuel con- 2. Press and hold RESET until selected trip sumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of odometer is reset. driving and the amount of fuel remaining in Average speed and fuel consumption the tank (the accuracy of this figure may vary 1. Select Trip computer reset and press if your driving style changes). An economical OK.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119 03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer – Trip statistics MY CAR My V60 Trip statistics: Trip information from previous trips regarding • Start new trip: press ENTER to erase all average fuel consumption and average speed pervious statistics. Exit the menu by is stored and can be displayed in the form of pressing EXIT. a bar chart. • Reset for every driving cycle: select by Function pressing ENTER. Exit the menu by pressing EXIT. Selecting Reset for every driving cycle era- 03 ses all trip statistics automatically if the ignition is switched off for at least 4 hours. When the engine is restarted, new statistics will be stored. To get new statistics if the engine is restarted before 4 hours have elapsed, the existing ones have to be erased manually by selecting Start new trip. For additional information, see Information Trip statistics26 display – menu controls (p. 111). Each bar represents a driving distance of See also the information about Eco Guide in 1 mile or 10 miles, depending on the current Eco Guide* and Power Meter* (p. 69). scale; the bar at the far right shows the value Related information for the current mile/10 miles. • Trip computer – introduction (p. 113) TUNE Use to change between 1 mile and • Trip computer – functions, analog instru- 10 miles; the marker at the right will also ment panel (p. 114) change according to the scale selected. • Trip computer – functions, digital instru- Settings ment panel (p. 117) Settings can be made in the MY CAR menu • Trip computer – Supplementary informa- system as follows: tion (p. 119)

26 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE 04 Climate

Climate – general information Temporary shut-off of the air Climate – sensors The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Cli- conditioning The climate system utilizes a number of sen- mate Control (ECC) (p. 126) that cools, heats The air conditioning (p. 129) is momentarily sors to help regulate the temperature and or dehumidifies the air in the passenger com- disengaged during full acceleration or when humidity level in the passenger compartment. partment. driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a temporary increase in cabin temperature. Sensor location Air conditioning • The sunlight sensor is located on the top Ice and snow side of the dashboard. NOTE Always keep the air intake grille at the base of the windshield free of snow. NOTE • The air conditioning can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible cli- Climate system maintenance The sunlight sensor monitors which side of mate comfort in the passenger com- Special tools and equipment are required to the car that is most exposed to sunlight. partment and to prevent the windows This can mean that the temperature may 04 maintain and carry out repairs on the climate from misting, it should always be on. differ between the right and left-side air system. Work of this type should only be vents, even if the temperatures set for both • In warm weather, a small amount of done by a trained and qualified Volvo service sides of the passenger compartment are water may accumulate under the car technician. the same. when it has been parked. This water is condensation from the A/C system Refrigerant The temperature sensor for the passen- and is normal. Volvo cares about the environment. The air • conditioning system in your car contains a ger compartment is located below the climate control panel. CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance Side windows and moonroof will not deplete the ozone layer. The air con- • The outside (ambient) temperature sensor To ensure that the air conditioning works ditioning system contains 1.76 lbs (800 g) of is located on the door mirror. optimally, the side windows, and the optional R134a. The systems uses PAG oil. The humidity sensor* is located in the moonroof should be closed. • interior rearview mirror. Related information Fog on the inside of the windows • Climate – sensors (p. 122) The defroster function (p. 129) should be NOTE • Climate – menu settings (p. 124) used to remove fog or mist from the inside of Do not cover or block the sensors with the windows. Keeping the windows clean clothing or other objects. with a commercially available window washing spray will also help prevent fogging or Related information misting. • Climate – general information (p. 122)

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Climate

Air quality NOTE Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* The passenger compartment has been The Air Quality System (IAQS) consists of a Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air fil- designed to be pleasant and comfortable, ter replacement intervals. multifilter and an air quality sensor. The filter even for people with asthma and contact helps remove gases and particles from the allergies. incoming air, thereby reducing the amounts of Materials used in the cabin odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. Passenger compartment filter The materials used in the cabin have been Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at developed to help minimize the amount of The air quality (p. 123) sensor detects the recommended intervals. Please refer to dust and make the cabin easier to keep increased levels of contaminants in the out- your Warranty and Service Records Informa- clean. All floor mats can be easily removed side air. When the air quality sensor detects tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified for cleaning. Use car cleaning products rec- contaminated outside air, the air intake closes Volvo service technician for these intervals. ommended by Volvo. See also the informa- and the air inside the passenger compart- The filter should be replaced more often when tion in Cleaning the interior (p. 366). ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated 04 filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should Related information passenger compartment air. When the always be replaced with a new one. • Climate – general information (p. 122) AUTO (p. 128) button is depressed the air • Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* quality sensor is always engaged. NOTE (p. 123) Activate or deactivate this function in Climate There are different types of cabin air filters. • Climate – menu settings (p. 124) settings Interior air quality system. Ensure that the correct type is installed. NOTE Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) • The air quality sensor should always A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles be engaged in order to obtain the best in the incoming air, thereby reducing the lev- air in the passenger compartment. els of odors and contaminants entering the Recirculation is limited in cold weather vehicle. The air quality sensor detects • to avoid fogging. increased levels of contaminants in the outside air. When the air quality sensor detects • If the insides of the windows start fog- contaminated outside air, the air intake closes ging, disengage the air quality sensor. and the air inside the passenger compart- Use the defroster function to increase airflow to the front, side, and rear win- ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters dows. the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123 04 Climate

|| Related information Climate – menu settings Air distribution – general • Climate – general information (p. 122) The default settings for four of the climate The incoming air is distributed through a • Max. defroster and electrically heated system's (p. 122) functions can be changed in number of different vents in the passenger windshield* (p. 129) the menu system. compartment. • Blower speed (p. 128) in automatic mode (p. 128). • Recirculation timer (p. 131) for passenger compartment air. • Automatic rear window defrosting (p. 102). • The optional Interior Air Quality Sys- tem (p. 123) (IAQS). 04 The functions can also be returned to factory settings in the menu system. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for a description of the menu system. Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO Related information mode (p. 128). • Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 126) If desired, air distribution can be controlled manually, see Air distribution – function (p. 130).

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Climate

Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars

04 Open Closed

Closed Open

Horizontal airflow Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow Vertical airflow Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. dows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat. Related information • Climate – general information (p. 122) • Air distribution – table (p. 132) • Air distribution – recirculation (p. 131) • Max. defroster and electrically heated windshield* (p. 129)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 04 Climate

Electronic climate control (ECC) set separately on the driver's and passenger's The AUTO function (p. 128) automatically ECC (Electronic Climate Control) helps main- sides. regulates the temperature, air conditioning, tain the selected temperature in the passen- blower speed, recirculation and air distribu- ger compartment and the temperature can be tion.

Temperature control (p. 128), driver's Heated rear window and door mir- side rors (p. 102) Heated driver's seat* (p. 127) Heated front passenger's seat* (p. 127)

Defroster (maximum effect), electrically Temperature control (p. 128), passeng- heated windshield* (p. 129) er's side Blower (p. 128) Recirculation (p. 131)

Manual air distribution (p. 124)—floor AUTO (p. 128)

Manual air distribution—dashboard air A/C (p. 129) on/off vents Manual air distribution—defroster Related information • Climate – general information (p. 122)

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Climate

Heated seats If no indicator lights are illuminated, the seat Related information The front seat heating has three levels to heating is switched off. • Climate – general information (p. 122) increase comfort for the driver and passenger Seat heating will automatically switch off • Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 126) in cold weather. when the engine is switched off. The rear outboard seat heating has three lev- Starting the seat heating automatically els to increase comfort for the passengers in This setting starts heating the driver's seat (at cold weather. the highest level) automatically when the Heated front seats* engine is started if the ambient temperature is below approx. 50° F (10° C). Activate/deactivate this function in the MY CAR menu system, under Settings Climate settings Auto start driver seat 04 heater. Heated rear seats*

The current seat temperature setting is shown in the center console display Press the lower section of the button repeatedly until the desired number of indicator lights illuminate: Highest heat level – three indicator lights. Heat control for the outboard seating positions is done in the same way as for the front Medium heat level – two indicator lights. seats. Lowest heat level – one indicator light.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127 04 Climate

Temperature and blower control NOTE Automatic climate control When the vehicle is started, the most recent The Auto function automatically controls tem- If the blower is turned off completely, the setting is resumed. air conditioning is disengaged, which may perature (p. 128), air conditioning (p. 129), blower speed (p. 128), recirculation (p. 131) The blower should always be activated to result in fogging on the windows. and air distribution (p. 124). help avoid condensation and fogging on the windows. Related information If you select one or more Climate – general information (p. 122) manual functions, the other Temperature control • functions continue to be The temperatures on the • Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 126) controlled automatically. The driver and passenger sides Air conditioning (p. 129) • air quality (p. 123) sensor is can be set separately. • Climate – sensors (p. 122) engaged and all manual settings are switched off when 04 AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE. NOTE Blower speed in automatic mode can be set under Climate settings Automatic blower Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal by selecting a higher/lower temperature High than the actual temperature required. or . NOTE Blower control Turn the control clockwise to Selecting the lowest blower speed may increase or counterclockwise increases the risk of fog forming on the windows. to decrease the blower speed. If AUTO (p. 128) is selected, blower speed will Related information be regulated automatically • Climate – general information (p. 122) and this will override manual adjustment.

128 04 Climate

Air conditioning Max. defroster and electrically heated Models without an electrically heated wind- The air conditioning function cools and dehu- windshield* shield midifies the air in the passenger compart- The heated windshield and max. defroster • Press the button once to start ment. functions are used to clear the windshield and defrosting/de-icing the windshield and front side windows of condensation and ice front side windows. The indicator light (2) When the indicator light in as quickly as possible. in the defroster button illuminates when the button is on, the air con- the function is active. ditioning is controlled automatically. This cools/heats • Press the button twice to switch off the defroster (the indicator light will switch and dehumidifies the incom- off). ing air. When the indicator light in the button is off, the Models with an electrically heated wind- air conditioning is disengaged. Other func- shield* tions are still controlled automatically. When • If this feature is switched off, press the 04 maximum defroster (p. 129) is selected, the button once to start heating the wind- air conditioning system is set for maximum shield1. Symbol (1) will illuminate in the blower speed and dehumidifies the cabin as center console display. quickly as possible. • Press the button twice to start both the Related information defroster and the windshield heating. The selected settings are shown in the center • Climate – general information (p. 122) Symbols (1) and (2) will illuminate in the console display center console display. • Automatic climate control (p. 128) Electrical heating* • If these features are on, press the button Max. defroster to switch them off. The symbols will no longer be displayed.

1 If a "C" appears in the rear-view mirror when the button is pressed, the compass* has to be recalibrated, see Digital compass* (p. 103). }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129 04 Climate

|| NOTE Related information Air distribution – function • Climate – general information (p. 122) The air distribution function consists of three Triangular areas at the far sides of the • buttons. windshield are not heated electrically • Automatic climate control (p. 128) and will take slightly longer to defrost/de-ice. • The heated windshield may affect the performance/range of e.g., transponders used to automatically pay highway tolls or other communication equipment.

The following occurs when the defroster/ 04 windshield heating functions have been activated: • Blower speed increases automatically and the air conditioning (p. 129) will Manual air distribution—defroster switch on (if not already on and if the passenger compartment blower is not turned Manual air distribution—dashboard air off) to dehumidify the air in the passenger vents compartment. Air conditioning can be Manual air distribution—floor switched off by pressing the AC button. When a button is pressed, the corresponding Recirculation (p. 131) will not function • figure will appear in the display with an arrow while defrost is engaged. indicating which manual air flow has been The climate system will return to its previous selected (see the following illustration). See settings when the defroster/windshield heat- also the air distribution chart (p. 132). ing function is switched off. See also Heated windshield*, rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 102) for additional information.

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Climate

Air distribution – recirculation Related information Recirculation can be used to shut out exhaust • Climate – general information (p. 122) fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger com- • Air distribution – general (p. 124) partment. • Air distribution – function (p. 130) The air in the passenger • Air distribution – table (p. 132) compartment is then recirculated, i.e., no air from outside the car is taken into the car when this function is activated. The indicator light in the button will illuminate Air distribution is shown in the center console when recirculation is selected. display If the air in the car recirculates for too long, 04 Related information there is a risk of condensation forming on the • Climate – general information (p. 122) insides of the windows, especially in winter. • Air distribution – general (p. 124) Timer • Air distribution – recirculation (p. 131) The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging, or stale air when the recirculation function is selected by automatically switching off the function after a certain length of time, depending on the ambient temperature. Acti- vate/deactivate the function under Climate settings Recirculation timer. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for a description of the menu system.

NOTE When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

131 04 Climate

Air distribution – table Air distribution (p. 124) is selected using the buttons in the center console climate panel.

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air To remove de-fog/de- Air to the floor and To ensure comfortable flows from the dashboard air ice the front side win- windows. Some air conditions and good de- vents. The air is not recircula- dows and windshield flows from the dash- fogging in cold or humid ted. Air conditioning is always quickly. board air vents. weather. engaged.

Air to windshield and side win- In cold or humid Air to floor and from In sunny weather with 04 dows. Some air flows from the weather (blower dashboard air vents. cool outside tempera- air dashboard vents. speed should be tures. moderate to high).

Airflow to windows and from To ensure good com- Air to floor. Some air To warm or cool the dashboard air vents. fort in warm, dry flows to the dashboard feet. weather. air vents and windows.

Airflow to the head and chest To ensure efficient Airflow to windows, To cool the feet or pro- from the dashboard air vents. cooling in warm from dashboard air vide warmer air to the weather. vents and to the floor. upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

132 04 Climate

Related information • Climate – general information (p. 122) • Air distribution – function (p. 130) • Max. defroster and electrically heated windshield* (p. 129)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133 LOADING AND STORAGE 05 Loading and storage

Storage spaces The following is an overview of the storage compartments in the passenger compartment.

}} 135 05 Loading and storage

|| Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions Glove compartment (p. 138)

Storage compartment

Storage compartment (p. 137), 12-volt socket (p. 137) and AUX input/USB connector Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Related information • Vanity mirror (p. 138) • 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 138) 05

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Loading and storage

Tunnel console Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets The tunnel console is located between the The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt front seats. accessories such as cell phone chargers and coolers. For the socket to supply current, the ignition must be in at least mode I (p. 77). The sockets are located between the cup holders in the tunnel console and on the rear side of the tunnel console (p. 137) for rear seat passengers.

12-volt socket in the rear center console The maximum current consumption is 10A (120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment is in use. If both Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) the front and rear sockets are used at the under armrest, AUX input/USB connec- same time, the maximum current consump- 05 tor. tion per socket is 7.5A (90W). Includes cup holder for driver and pas- The auxiliary sockets can also be used to senger, 12-volt socket (p. 137) and a power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette small storage compartment. 12-volt socket in the front tunnel console lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from Related information your Volvo retailer. • Storage spaces (p. 135) WARNING Always keep the sockets covered when not in use.

Related information • Storage spaces (p. 135) • 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 138)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137 05 Loading and storage

Glove compartment Vanity mirror 12-volt socket in the cargo area* The glove compartment provides a lockable The vanity mirrors are located on the upper The 12-volt socket can be used e.g., to con- storage compartment for small items. side of the sun visors. nect the tire sealing system's compressor (certain models) and other 12-volt accessories.

Vanity mirror with lighting The owner's manual and maps can be kept 05 here. There are also holders for pens and fuel The light comes on automatically when the cards. The glove compartment can be locked cover is lifted. Fold down the cover to access the electrical manually with the key blade, see Locking/ socket. Related information unlocking – glove compartment (p. 162). Storage spaces (p. 135) • NOTE Related information • Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 345) • Storage spaces (p. 135) The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery.

Related information • Storage spaces (p. 135) • Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 137)

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Loading and storage

Loading – general WARNING Loading – roof load carriers The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is Stop the engine, put the gear selector determined by factors such as the number of • Using load carriers in P, and apply the parking brake passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso- when loading or unloading long of any accessories that may be installed, etc. ries. Observe the following points when in objects. use: To increase loading space, the rear seat • The vehicle's driving characteristics To avoid damaging your vehicle and to backrests can be folded down, see Rear may change depending on the weight • achieve maximum safety when driving, seats – folding backrest (p. 84). and distribution of the load. we recommend using the load carriers When loading the cargo area, keep the fol- • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a that Volvo has developed especially for lowing in mind: force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a your vehicle. head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). Load objects in the cargo area against • Volvo-approved removable roof racks are • The cargo area and rear seat should the backrest whenever possible. • designed to carry the maximum allowable not be loaded to a level higher than roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg). • Unstable loads can be secured to the 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man- load anchoring eyelets with straps or web the rear side windows. Objects placed ufacturer's weight limits for the rack. lashings to help keep them from shifting. higher than this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain. • Never exceed the rack manufacturer's • Stop the engine and apply the parking weigh limits and never exceed the maxi- 05 brake when loading or unloading long mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg). objects. The gear selector can be Related information • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads knocked out of position by long loads, • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 140) which could set the vehicle in motion. evenly. • Steel cargo grid (p. 143) • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the • Loading – roof load carriers (p. 139) load. • Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. • Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity and handling change when you carry a load on the roof.

}} 139 05 Loading and storage

|| • The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel Load anchoring eyelets WARNING consumption will increase with the size of The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of Cover sharp edges on long loads to the load. the vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to • help prevent injury to occupants. Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast help anchor items in the cargo area. • Secure the load to help prevent shift- cornering and hard braking. ing during sudden stops. WARNING Related information • Always secure large and heavy objects • Loading – general (p. 139) The two upper hooks shown in the illustra- with a seat belt or cargo retaining tion are for holding grocery bags only. straps. • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 140) They are not intended for anchoring heavy objects. • Always secure the load to help prevent it from moving in the event of sudden stops. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the vehicle.

05 Related information • Loading – general (p. 139)

140 05 Loading and storage

Grocery bag holder Cargo net – general information Attaching the cassette(s) The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags The cargo net helps protect passengers from in place. objects in the cargo area in the event of a sudden stop or hard braking.

The two-sections of the net are attached to the rear side of the rear seat backrest. The Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo cassettes have different widths, and the wid- area Storage compartment for the cargo net est section should be mounted on the right side (seen from the rear of the vehicle). 05 The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags Two cassettes containing nylon cargo nets in place. are stored in a compartment under the cargo 1. Fold down the rear seat backrests. 1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo area floor. 2. Align the cassette’s mounting rail above area. the mounting brackets on the backrest 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap. . 3. Slide the cassette onto the mounting Related information brackets . • Loading – general (p. 139) 4. Return the backrest to the upright position.

}} 141 05 Loading and storage

|| Using the net(s) NOTE Using the cargo net with the cargo area cover • The net can be fastened in the same way if the rear seat backrests are folded down. In this case, use the retaining brackets near the ceiling, above the front seats. • The front passenger's seat backrest can also be folded down for carrying long objects.

Removing the cargo net cassettes G018246 1. Retract the net(s) in the reverse order. With the backrests upright 2. Fold the entire rear seat backrest down. Straps for pulling up the net The net is pulled up from the cassette and 3. Slide the cassettes outward until they locks in position after approximately 1 release from the mounting brackets. The cargo net(s) can also be pulled up from minute. the backrest when the cargo area cover is 05 pulled out. Pull up the right side of the net by grasp- WARNING The straps for pulling up the cargo net are ing its strap. When not in use, return the cassettes • located at the arrows in the illustration. Follow to their storage compartment under Insert the net’s rod in the retaining the same procedure as for using the nets with the cargo area floor. bracket on the right side near the ceiling the backrests upright. and press it forward. It will click into • Objects in the cargo area should be place. securely anchored, even if the cargo Extend the left section of the rod and net is correctly installed and in use. insert it in the bracket on the left side of the cargo compartment. Press it forward until it clicks into place. Pull up the left side of the cargo net and secure it on the rod.

142 05 Loading and storage

Cargo area cover 3. Press both sides of the cover until they Steel cargo grid The cargo area cover can be used to conceal click into place . The red mark will no Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid objects in the cargo area. longer be visible. that helps prevent objects in the cargo area 4. Check that both ends of the cover are from moving forward into the passenger com- securely locked in place. partment. Removing the cover 1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover inward. 2. Pull the cover carefully upward and outward. The other end will release automatically from its retaining bracket. Folding down the cargo area cover's rear flap The cargo area cover's rear flap points hori- Use zontally when the cover is retracted (rolled 05 • Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it up). To fold it down: into the holes in the rear cargo area pil- – Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup- Folding the grid up/down lars. ports and fold it down. Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it • To retract (roll up) the cover, release it rearward/upward, or push it downward/ from the holes and guide it toward the NOTE forward. rear seat backrest. On models equipped with this cover, it NOTE Installing the cover should be removed before a child seat is 1. Press the end piece on one side of the attached to the child restraint anchors. If the steel grid is to be used with the cargo area cover into the retaining optional cargo area cover, the grid must be folded down before the cargo area bracket in the side panel of the cargo Related information cover is put in place. area . • Loading – general (p. 139) 2. Do the same on the opposite side .

}} 143 05 Loading and storage

|| Installing the steel cargo grid For information about the necessary tools and procedures for installing/removing the steel cargo grid, please refer to the assembly instructions1 that were included when the grid was purchased. Related information • Cargo area cover (p. 143)

1 Assembly instruction no. 30756681.

144 LOCKS AND ALARM 06 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade Remote key – loss FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO Two remote keys are provided with your vehi- If either of the remote keys (p. 146) is lost, the 5WK49236 cle. They enable you to unlock the doors and other should be taken with the vehicle to a FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266 tailgate, and also function as ignition keys to Volvo retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the start the vehicle or operate electrical compo- code of the lost remote key must be erased FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO nents. The remote keys contain detachable from the system. 5WK49233 metal key blades for manually locking or FCC ID:KR55WK49233 unlocking the driver's door and the glove NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC compartment. The visible ends of these key Additional or duplicate remote control keys rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to blades are unique to make it easier to identify can be obtained from any authorized Volvo the following conditions: (1) This device may "your" remote key. Up to six remotes can be retailer. not cause harmful interference, and (2) this programmed for use on the same vehicle. You can also obtain additional or duplicate device must accept any interference remote control keys from certain inde- WARNING received, including interference that may pendent repair facilities and locksmiths cause undesired operation. Never leave the remote key in the ignition that are qualified to make remote control slot if children are to remain in the vehicle. keys. Each key must be programmed to Canada-5WK49264 work with your vehicle. IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO For more information on the various ignition California Only: 5WK49236 modes, see Ignition modes (p. 77). A list of independent repair facilities and/or IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266 locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut Related information and code replacement keys can be found: IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO 5WK49233 06 • Remote key – functions (p. 149) • on the Volvo website at • Remote key – functions (p. 149) http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys IC:267T-5WK49233 • Remote key – range (p. 150) • by calling Volvo Customer Care at Operation is subject to the following condi- 1-800-458-1552 tions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any The number of registered keys for the vehicle interference, including interference that may can be found by pressing MY CAR and going cause undesired operation of the device. Settings Information Number of into Related information keys. For a description of the menu system, Remote key – functions (p. 149) see My Car – introduction (p. 74). • USA-5WK49264

146 06 Locks and alarm

Key memory NOTE Locking/unlocking confirmation The memory in the remote key makes it possi- Settings can be made in the menu system for If the vehicle is locked with the remote key ble to store certain personal settings. or is left unlocked for more than 30 audible and visual confirmation when the minutes, the key memory function will be vehicle has been locked or unlocked. With The position of the side door mirrors, power deactivated. these functions activated, the following will driver's seat* and the selected instrument occur when the vehicle is locked/unlocked: panel theme1 are stored in the remote keys To reactivate the key's memory: when the vehicle is locked. The next time the • Press the unlock button on the remote Locking confirmation driver's door is unlocked with the same key. • The turn signals flash once, an audible remote key and the door is opened within signal sounds and the door mirrors will fold* in. 2 minutes, the power driver's seat and side For information regarding vehicles with the door mirrors will automatically move to the optional keyless drive, see Keyless drive*– Confirmation will only be given when all doors position that they were in when the doors locking/unlocking (p. 155). and the tailgate are properly closed and were most recently locked with the same locked. remote key. If the seat/mirrors have not been Related information readjusted since the vehicle was locked, they • Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 147) NOTE will already be in the position stored in that particular remote key and will not move. For If you do not receive confirmation when more information on this feature, see Front locking the vehicle, check whether a door or the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has seats – power seat (p. 79). been turned off in the menu. This feature can be activated or deactivated MY CAR in the vehicle's menu by pressing Unlocking confirmation 06 and going into Settings Car settings • The turn signals will flash twice and the Car key memory. For a description of the door mirrors will fold* out. menu system, see My Car – introduction (p. 74).

1 Optional digital instrument panel only }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 06 Locks and alarm

|| Making a setting A flashing indicator light at the base of the Immobilizer (start inhibitor) Different alternatives for locking/unlocking windshield verifies that the vehicle is locked. The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helps confirmation can be selected in the menus by Related information prevent unauthorized persons from starting pressing MY CAR on the center console con- the engine. trol panel. • Locking/unlocking – from the outside (p. 159) Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle To activate visual confirmation: go to • • Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160) contains a coded transponder. The code in Settings Car settings Light the key is transmitted to an antenna in the Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 162) settings and select Door lock • ignition slot where it is compared to the code confirmation light and/or Unlock stored in the start inhibitor module. The vehi- confirmation light by pressing OK/ cle will start only with a properly coded key. If MENU. you misplace a key, take the other keys to a • To activate audible confirmation: go to trained and qualified Volvo service technician Settings Car settings Lock for reprogramming as an anti-theft measure. settings and select Audible The following messages (which may appear in confirmation by pressing OK/MENU. the instrument panel display) are related to the immobilizer: For a description of the menu system, see My Car – introduction (p. 74). Lock indicator

Lock/alarm indicator light

148 06 Locks and alarm

Message Meaning interference that may cause undesired opera- Remote key – functions tion. The remote key is used e.g., to unlock the Insert car Remote key not recognized Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO doors and start the engine. key during start. Try to start the vehicle again. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- Car key Vehicles with keyless drive* ence, and (2) this device must accept any not found only. Remote key not recog- interference, including interference that may nized during start. Try to cause undesired operation of the device. start the vehicle again. For information on starting the vehicle, see If the problem continues, Starting the engine (p. 252). insert the remote key into the ignition slot and try to start the vehicle again.

Immobil- Remote key fault during izer Try start. Contact an authorized Remote key start Volvo workshop. Lock again Unlock

CAUTION Approach lighting Never use force when inserting the remote 06 Tailgate unlock key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot be started if the transponder is damaged. Panic alarm

USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO Buttons on the remote This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Lock – Press the Lock button on the rules. Operation is subject to the following remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate. condition: (1) This device may not cause The turn signals will flash once to confirm harmful interference, and (2) this device must locking. accept any interference received, including Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the remote once to unlock the driver's door.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 06 Locks and alarm

|| After a short pause, press the Unlock button After closing, the tailgate will not automati- Remote key – range a second time within 10 seconds to unlock cally relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm The remote key has a range of approximately the other doors and the tailgate. the alarm. 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle. This function can be changed so that all For information on opening the tailgate from doors unlock at the same time by pressing the passenger compartment, see Locking/ NOTE My Car and going to Settings Car unlocking – tailgate (p. 162) Buildings or other obstacles may interfere settings Lock settings Change doors with the function of the remote key. The Panic alarm – This button can be used vehicle can also be locked or unlocked unlock setting. For a description of the menu to attract attention during emergency situa- with the key blade, see Alarm-related func- system, see My Car – introduction (p. 74). tions. tions (p. 166). Approach lighting – As you approach To activate the panic alarm, press and hold the vehicle, press the button on the remote this button for at least 3 seconds or press it If the remote key is removed from the vehicle key to light the interior lighting, parking lights, twice within 3 seconds. The turn signals and while the engine is running or if the ignition is license plate lighting and the lights in the door horn will be activated. The panic alarm will in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed, mirrors*. stop automatically after 2 minutes and a message will appear in the instrument panel display and there will be an audible signal. These lights will switch off automatically after 45 seconds. 30, 60 or 90 seconds. For a description of the To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds When the remote key is returned to the vehi- menu system, see My Car – introduction and press the button again. cle, the message will be erased and the audi- (p. 74). ble signal will stop after one of the following The Panic alarm button will not unlock the has been done: Unlock tailgate – Press the button twice vehicle. within several seconds to disarm the alarm • The remote key is inserted in the ignition 06 Related information system (the alarm indicator light on the dash- slot Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160) board will go out), and unlock only the tail- • • The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph gate. • Locking/unlocking – from the outside (30 km/h) (p. 159) • The OK button on the left steering wheel NOTE • Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 147) lever is pressed As an added safety precaution, the parking Related information lights will come on automatically for a Remote key – functions (p. 149) short period when the tailgate has been • opened.

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Locks and alarm

Detachable key blade – general Detachable key blade – detaching/ Related information information reinserting • Detachable key blade – unlocking Each remote key contains a detachable metal The detachable key blade (p. 151) can be (p. 152) key blade (p. 146) for mechanically locking or removed or reinserted in the remote key as • Child safety locks (p. 61) unlocking the driver's door and the glove follows: compartment, and to enable the private locking(p. 152) function. For more information on Removing the key blade the key blade. The key blades have a unique code, which is used if new ones need to be produced. This code is available at an authorized Volvo retailer. The visible ends of these key blades are unique to make it easier to identify "your" remote key.

Related information • Detachable key blade – unlocking (p. 152) • Detachable key blade – detaching/rein- Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. serting (p. 151) Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key. 06 Reinserting the blade 1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up. 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place.

151 06 Locks and alarm

Detachable key blade – unlocking 3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in Private locking Your vehicle's remote key (p. 146) contains a the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade By utilizing the remote key with the key blade metal, detachable key blade that can be used to unlock the driver's door. This will trig- removed, the private locking feature enables to unlock the driver's door, lock the glove ger the alarm. you to block access to the glove compart- compartment, etc. 4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote ment and disconnect the tailgate from the key in the ignition slot. This also applies central locking system for e.g., valet parking to vehicles equipped with the optional or when the vehicle is brought to the retailer keyless drive. for service. 5. Press the cover back into place after the door has been unlocked. Related information • Remote key and key blade (p. 146) • Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 153)

Driver's door keyhole cover

If the remote key does not function normally G017869 (weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be Normal locking/unlocking points 06 unlocked with the detachable key blade. 1. Remove the detachable key blade (p. 151) from the remote key. 2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) straight up in the hole on the underside of the keyhole cover. > The cover will come off due to the pressure exerted when the key blade is pushed upward.

152 06 Locks and alarm

Activating the private locking function Remote key – replacing the battery The remote key can be opened if the battery needs to be replaced.

The battery should be replaced if: • The information symbol illuminates and Low battery in remote control. Please change batteries. is shown in the display and/or • if the locks do not react after several

G017870 attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking points with private locking activated. NOTE Insert the key blade in the glove compart- With the private locking function activated: The remote key's range is normally ment lock. approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehi- The vehicle's doors can be locked or • Turn the key blade180 degrees clock- cle. unlocked with the remote wise. • The engine can be started Remove the key blade from the lock. A • The glove compartment cannot be message will appear in the instrument unlocked panel display. • The tailgate cannot be unlocked or 06 opened with the remote Deactivating the private locking • The rear floor hatch cannot be opened function Turn the key blade 180 degrees counter- NOTE clockwise in the glove compartment lock to deactivate private locking. The floor hatch must be closed completely before the tailgate can be closed. For information on locking the glove compartment normally, without activating the private locking function, see Locking/unlocking the glove compartment (p. 162).

}} 153 06 Locks and alarm

|| Opening the remote key To open the remote key 3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. 4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place. Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key. NOTE Insert a small screwdriver in the hole Volvo recommends that the batteries used behind the spring loaded catch and care- in the remote control meet the UN Manual fully pry up the cover. Turn the remote of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section key with the buttons upward so that the 38.3. battery does not fall out when the cover is Batteries installed in the key from the fac- removed. tory and batteries exchanged by an Inserting a new battery authorized Volvo workshop fulfill the above criteria. CAUTION Old batteries should be disposed of properly at a recycling center or at your Volvo When handling batteries, avoid touching retailer. their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key. Related information • Remote key – functions (p. 149) Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–) 06 sides. 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old battery. 2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward. Closing the remote key 1. Press the remote key's cover into place. The remote key has one CR 2430, 3V battery only 2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up.

154 06 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking Both of the remote keys provided with the NOTE This system makes it possible to unlock and vehicle have the keyless function, and additional ones can be ordered. The system can On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selec- lock the vehicle without having to press any P accommodate up to six remote keys. tor must be in the Park ( ) position, all buttons on the remote key. It is only neces- doors and the tailgate must be closed and sary to have a keyless drive remote key in The red rings in the illustration indicate the the ignition must be switched off before your possession to operate the central locking area around the vehicle that is within range of the vehicle can be locked. system. the keyless drive antennas. Unlocking the vehicle Locking the vehicle • A keyless drive remote key must be on the same side of the vehicle as the door to be opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the door's lock or the tailgate (see the shaded areas in the illustration). • Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door or pull the tailgate opening control. The number of doors that are unlocked at the same time can be set in the vehicle's menu system. Press MY CAR and go to Car Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft settings Lock settings Keyless entry. (1.5 meters) Models with keyless drive have a pressure-sensi- For a description of the menu system, see My tive area on the outside door handles and a rub- Car – introduction (p. 74). 06 NOTE ber-covered button next to the tailgate opening control • The gear selector must in the P posi- NOTE The doors and the tailgate can be locked by tion before the vehicle can be locked In some cases, wearing thick gloves or and the alarm can be armed. pressing the pressure-sensitive area on each pulling the door handle too quickly may of the outside door handles or the rubber- • The buttons on the keyless drive affect the unlocking function. If this remote key can also be used to lock covered button next to the tailgate opening occurs, try pulling the door handle again or and unlock the vehicle. For more infor- control. The lock indicator on the dash will pull it after taking off the glove. mation, see Remote key and key blade begin to flash. (p. 146). Related information • Alarm indicator (p. 165)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155 06 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive* – unlocking with key 4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote Keyless drive* – key memory blade key in the ignition slot. This also applies When you leave the vehicle with a remote key If the remote key does not function normally to vehicles equipped with the optional in your possession and lock any door, the (weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be keyless drive. unlocked with the detachable key blade. 5. Press the cover back into place after the door has been unlocked. Related information • Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 155) • Alarm – general information (p. 164)

Driver's door keyhole cover 1. Remove the key blade from the remote key (see Detachable key blade – detach- 06 ing/reinserting (p. 151) for instructions). 2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) straight up in the hole on the underside of the keyhole cover. > The cover will come off due to the pressure exerted when the key blade is pushed upward. 3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to unlock the driver's door. This will trigger the alarm.

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Locks and alarm position of the driver's seat2 and door mirrors NOTE Keyless drive* – messages will be stored in the remote key's memory. If all of the remote keys are removed from the If the vehicle is locked by pressing the but- vehicle while the engine is running or if the The next time a door is opened by a person ton on one of the door handles or by ignition modes (p. 77) is in mode II and all of with the same remote key in his/her posses- pressing the lock button on the remote the doors are closed, a message will appear sion, the driver's seat and door mirrors will key, or if it is left unlocked for more than 30 minutes, the key memory function will in the instrument panel display and an audible automatically move to the position that they be deactivated. signal will sound. were in when the door was most recently To reactivate the key's memory: locked. When at least one remote key has been • Unlock the vehicle by pulling a door returned to the car, the message will be NOTE handle with the remote key in your erased in the display and the audible signal possession or by pressing the unlock will stop when: If several people carrying remote keys button on the remote key. approach the vehicle at the same time, the • A door has been opened and closed driver's seat and door mirrors will assume The remote key has been inserted in the the positions they were in for the person Related information • ignition slot who opens the driver's door. • Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 155) • The OK button has been pressed. For the • Remote key – functions (p. 149) location of this button, see Information See also power seats (p. 79) for information display – menu controls (p. 111) on adjusting and storing the seat's position in the seat memory.

2 Power seats only }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 06 Locks and alarm

CAUTION For Automobile Use Keyless drive* – antenna locations The keyless drive system has a number of Keyless drive remote keys should Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952, • antennas located at various points in the vehi- never be left in the vehicle. In the event 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 cle. of a break-in, a remote found in the NOTE vehicle could make it possible to start the engine. This device complies with RSS -210 of Indus- try Canada. Operation is subject to the fol- Electromagnetic fields or metal • lowing two conditions: (1) This device may obstructions can interfere with the not cause harmful interference, and (2) this keyless drive system. The remote key should never be placed closer than device must accept interference received, approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to including interference that may cause unde- cell phones, metallic objects or e.g., sired operation. stored in a metal briefcase. CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, approved by the manufacturer could void the KR55WK48964 user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE On the inside center of the rear bumper This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Left rear door handle Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause Under the floor of the cargo area, near 06 harmful interference, and (2) this device must the rear seat accept interference received, including inter- Right rear door handle ference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION Under the rear section of the center console Changes or modifications not expressly Under the front section of the center con- approved by the manufacturer could void the sole user's authority to operate the equipment. Siemens VDO 5WK48891 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Locks and alarm

WARNING Locking/unlocking – from the outside In this case the vehicle can be unlocked with The remote key (p. 146) is used to lock/unlock the detachable key blade (p. 152). People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer all of the doors and the tailgate at the same Related information time. Different settings for unlocking the vehi- than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless • Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160) drive system's antennas. This is to help cle can be selected, see Remote key – func- prevent interference between the pace- tions (p. 149). maker and the keyless drive system. Before the vehicle can be locked from the outside with the remote key, the driver's door Related information must be closed. If the tailgate or any other • Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 155) door is open, it will be locked and the alarm will be armed.

NOTE Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are closed to help avoid locking the remote inside the vehicle.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional keyless drive system, all doors/tailgate must be closed before the vehicle can be locked. 06 The first press on the unlock button unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the tailgate (see also remote key and key blade (p. 146)). This setting can be changed in the menu system. See MY CAR (p. 74) for a description. If the locks repeatedly do not react when the unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary to replace the battery in the remote, see Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 153).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 06 Locks and alarm

Manual locking In the horizontal position, the door cannot Locking/unlocking – from inside In certain situations (e.g., if there is no electri- be opened from the outside. The lock buttons on the door panel can be cal current in the vehicle), the doors can be In the vertical position, the door can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tail- locked manually. opened from the inside and the outside. gate at the same time. Press to lock and to unlock. The detachable key blade (p. 151) can be NOTE used in the lock cylinder in the driver's door From inside the vehicle (central locking to lock that door. If the manual child safety lock (p. 61) is activated for a rear side door and that door button) The other doors do not have lock cylinders is also locked manually, the door cannot and the slot on the rear edge of each door be opened from the outside or inside. The has to be used to lock it. This will lock the door can only be unlocked with the remote door from the outside but it can still be key or the central locking button. opened from inside the vehicle. To do so: Related information • Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 153)

Central locking button 06 The lock buttons on the door panel can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time. Press to lock and to unlock. Manually locking a door – Insert the key blade into the slot and turn it 90 degrees to lock that door (the slot in a particular door locks that door only).

160 06 Locks and alarm

Unlocking NOTE Lock buttons in the rear side doors The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the vehicle in two ways: Please be aware that locking the vehicle in this way makes it possible to lock the • By pressing the unlock button . remote key in the passenger compartment. To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from • The front doors can be unlocked and the outside by pressing the lock button on opened by pulling the door handle once. the remote key. The rear doors can be unlocked by pulling the door handle once and opened by If the vehicle is locked using the central locking button, be sure that the remote key pulling the handle again. is in your possession before closing the Locking door. • Press the lock button after the front doors have been closed. Indicator light in the lock buttons There are two versions of the central locking The indicator light in the button is on when the • Press the lock button : all of the door is locked doors that are closed will lock. system that affect the indicator light in the driver's door central locking button. The button in each of the rear side doors Each door can be locked individually with • locks that door only. the lock button on the respective doors. If only the driver's door has a central locking The door must be closed first. button: To unlock the door: Alternative locking when parking • If the light is on, this indicates that all of • The door can be unlocked by pulling the The central locking button on the driver's the doors are locked. door handle once and opened by pulling door can also be used to lock the vehicle the handle again. If there are central locking buttons in both 06 when you leave it. To do so: front doors and electric lock buttons in the Automatic relocking 1. Open the door. rear side doors: If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- 2. Press the lock section of the button. • If a light is on in one of the buttons, this matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will means that only that door is locked. re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the 3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle When the lights are on in all of the but- tailgate has been opened. completely and arm the alarm. tons, all of the doors are locked. Automatic locking When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and tailgate can be locked automatically. This feature can be turned on or off by pressing

}} 161 06 Locks and alarm

|| MY CAR and going to Car settings Lock Locking/unlocking – glove Locking/unlocking – tailgate settings Automatic door locking. compartment The tailgate can be opened, locked and The glove compartment can only be locked unlocked in several ways. Related information and unlocked using the detachable key blade • Locking/unlocking – from the outside in the remote key. For information on remov- (p. 159) ing the key blade from the remote key, see • Alarm – general information (p. 164) Detachable key blade – detaching/reinserting • Remote key – functions (p. 149) (p. 151).

Tailgate unlock button on the remote key

06 Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock. Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock.

162 06 Locks and alarm

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote Unlocking the tailgate from the driver's Opening that tailgate manually key seat – Press the tailgate unlock button on the remote key to unlock (but not open) the tailgate. See Remote key and key blade (p. 146) for more information. > The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out to indicate that the alarm is not monitoring the entire vehicle.

NOTE • If the doors are locked while the tailgate is open, the tailgate will remain The tailgate is held closed by an electronic unlocked until the vehicle is relocked – Press the button on the lighting panel (1) locking mechanism. To open: by pressing the Lock button on the to unlock (but not open) the tailgate. 1. Press lightly on the wider rubberized plate remote key. under the handle to release the lock. • On keyless drive vehicles, the gear NOTE P 2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate. selector must be in the Park ( ) posi- The taillights will illuminate automatically tion, all doors and the tailgate must be for a short period when the tailgate has CAUTION closed and the ignition must be been opened. 06 switched off before the vehicle can be • When pressing the rubberized plate, locked. Locking the tailgate with the remote only light pressure is necessary to release the tailgate's electronic locking key mechanism. Press the lock button ( ) on the remote. When opening the tailgate, pull it up See also (p. 146). • using the handle. Too much pressure The alarm indicator on the dashboard will on the rubberized plate can damage begin flashing to show that the vehicle is its electrical connections. locked and that the alarm has been armed.

}} 163 06 Locks and alarm

|| Related information Alarm – general information Related information • Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160) The alarm system provides a warning if an • Alarm – turning off (p. 166) • Locking/unlocking – from the outside attempt is made to break into the vehicle. • Alarm signal (p. 166) (p. 159) The alarm is automatically armed (p. 165) • Alarm indicator (p. 165) whenever the vehicle is locked with the remote key. When armed, the alarm continuously monitors a number of points on the vehicle. The following conditions will trigger the alarm: • The hood is forced open. • The tailgate is forced open. • A door is forced open. • The ignition slot is tampered with. • An attempt is made to start the vehicle with a non-approved key (a key not coded to the car's ignition). • The battery is disconnected (while the alarm is armed). • The siren is disconnected when the alarm 06 is disarmed. A message will appear in the information display if a fault should occur in the alarm system. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

NOTE Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself. This could affect the insurance policy on the vehicle.

164 06 Locks and alarm

Alarm indicator Alarm – arming/disarming Disarming the alarm The status of the alarm system is indicated by The alarm system provides a warning if an – Press the Unlock button on the remote the red indicator light on the dashboard (see attempt is made to break into the vehicle. key. illustration): > Two short flashes from the car's direc- Arming the alarm tion indicators confirm that the alarm – Press the Lock button on the remote key. has been deactivated and that all One long flash of the turn signals will con- doors are unlocked. firm that the alarm (p. 164) is armed. Related information Alarm confirmation settings can be changed • Alarm indicator (p. 165) in MY CAR, under Car settings Lock Alarm signal (p. 166) settings Keyless entry. For a description • of the menu system, see My Car – introduc- • Alarm – turning off (p. 166) tion (p. 74). • Alarm-related functions (p. 166) USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following • Indicator light off: the alarm is not conditions: (1) This device may not cause armed (p. 165) harmful interference, and (2) this device must • The indicator light flashes at one-second accept any interference received, including intervals: the alarm is armed interference that may cause undesired opera- • The indicator light flashes rapidly before tion. 06 the remote key is inserted in the ignition slot and the ignition is put in mode I: the Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) alarm has been triggered. This device is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- Related information ence, and (2) this device must accept any • Alarm – general information (p. 164) interference, including interference that may • Alarm – turning off (p. 166) cause undesired operation of the device. • Alarm signal (p. 166)

165 06 Locks and alarm

Alarm signal Alarm – turning off Alarm-related functions An audible (p. 164) signal is given by a battery The alarm system provides a warning if an The following is general information regarding powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for attempt is made to break into the vehicle. the alarm system in your vehicle. 30 seconds. If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by Automatic re-arming The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all pressing the Unlock button on the remote key If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- turn signals for approximately 5 minutes or or by inserting the remote key in the ignition matically re-engage (re-lock) and the alarm until the alarm is turned off. slot. Two short flashes from the car's turn sig- will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or nals confirm that the alarm has been turned the tailgate has been opened. Related information off. • Alarm indicator (p. 165) Remote key not functioning • Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 165) Related information If the remote key is not functioning properly, the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle • Alarm – turning off (p. 166) • Alarm indicator (p. 165) can be started as follows: • Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 165) 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade. • Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 153) > This will trigger the alarm.

2. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote key into the ignition slot (also on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). 3. Start the engine.

166 06 Locks and alarm

Related information • Detachable key blade – unlocking (p. 152) • Detachable key blade – general information (p. 151) • Starting the engine (p. 252)

167 DRIVER SUPPORT 07 Driver support

Active chassis* (Four C) Sport Stability system – introduction Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the reduced during cornering and steering consists of a number of functions designed to characteristics of the shock absorbers so that response is more immediate. The transmis- help reduce wheel spin, counteract skidding the vehicle's driving characteristics can be sion shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driv- and to generally help improve directional sta- adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, ing. The indicator light in the button will be on bility. Sport and Advanced. to indicate that Sport mode has been selected. A pulsating sound will be audible Operation when the system is actively operat- Advanced ing and is normal. Acceleration will In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal also be slightly slower than normal. and steering response is very direct. Gear shifting is done at high rpm in each gear for WARNING dynamic and active driving. ESC is a supplementary aid and cannot Related information deal with all situations or road conditions. Adjustable steering force* (p. 174) • The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner in accordance with current traffic regulations.

ESC consists of the following functions: Chassis settings • Traction control Use the buttons in the center console to • Spin control change setting. The setting in use when the • Active Yaw Control engine is switched off is activated the next Engine Drag Control time the engine is started. • • Corner Traction Control 07 Comfort Traction Control (TC) Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride and the transmission shifts gears at lower This function is designed to help reduce rpm. This mode is particularly suitable for wheel spin at low speeds by transferring long-distance highway driving. The indicator power from a drive wheel that begins to lose light in the button will be on when this mode traction to the wheel on the opposite side of is selected. the vehicle (on the same axle).

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 07 Driver support

|| Spin Control (SC) begun to sway. See Trailer Stability Assist Stability system – operation The SC function is designed to help prevent (TSA) (p. 288) for more information. Operation the drive wheels from spinning while the vehi- This system is automatically deactivated if the cle is accelerating. driver selects Sport mode. Sport mode Active Yaw Control (AYC) The stability system is always activated and This function helps maintain directional stabil- Related information cannot be switched off. • Stability system – operation (p. 170) ity, for example when cornering, by braking However, the driver can one or more of the wheels if the vehicle • Stability system – symbols and messages select Sport mode, which (p. 172) shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally. offers more active driving Corner Traction Control (CTC) • Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 288) characteristics. CTC compensates for understeering and Sport mode can be selected helps provide additional stability when accel- in the MY CAR menus, see erating through a curve by preventing the My Car – introduction (p. 74). inside wheel from spinning. This is particularly useful when accelerating on a curving high- In Sport mode, the engine management sys- way on-ramp. tem monitors movement of the accelerator pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving CTC is most effective if the stability system's by allowing more lateral movement of the rear Sport mode is selected. See the section wheels before ESC is activated. about Sport mode. Engine Drag Control (EDC) Under certain circumstances, such as when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep EDC helps keep the engine running if the snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when temporarily use Sport mode for maximum shifting down in the Geartronic manual shift- tractive force. ing mode or while using the engine's braking function on a slippery surface. If the engine If the driver releases pressure on the acceler- 07 were to stop, power steering would not func- ator pedal, ETC will also activate to help station, making the vehicle more difficult to bilize the vehicle. steer. To switch to Sport mode: Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) Sport mode remains active until the driver The TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is tow- switches it off in the menu or until the engine ing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have is switched off. ETC will return to normal mode when the engine is restarted.

170 07 Driver support

Related information • Stability system – introduction (p. 169) • Stability system – symbols and messages (p. 172)

171 07 Driver support

Stability system – symbols and messages

Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel A text message can be erased by pressing briefly the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

ESC Temporarily OFF The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required The ESC system is not functioning properly. • Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. • If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected.

"Message" Read the message in the instrument panel.

and

07 Steady glow for The system is performing a self-diagnostic test. 2 seconds.

172 07 Driver support

Symbol Message Description

Flashing symbol. ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

Steady glow. Sport mode has been activated. Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced.

WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

Related information • Stability system – introduction (p. 169) • Stability system – operation (p. 170)

173 07 Driver support

Adjustable steering force* Road Sign Information (RSI)* – Related information Steering force increases with the speed of the introduction • Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation vehicle to give the driver enhanced sense of RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road (p. 175) control and stability. At low speed the vehicle signs with the posted speed limit. • Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations is easy to steer in order to facilitate parking, (p. 175) etc. Introduction Adjustable steering force* Steering force can be changed under MY CAR Car settings Steering wheel force. Select Low, Medium or High. For a description of the menu system, My Car – introduction (p. 74).

NOTE This steering force level menu function cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in motion. Examples of readable road signs If the vehicle passes a sign showing the NOTE speed limit, this will be displayed in the center In certain situations, the power steering console. may become too warm and will have to be temporarily cooled down. While this is WARNING happening, the power steering effect will be reduced slightly and somewhat more RSI does not function in all situations and 07 effort may be required to turn the steering is only intended to provide supplementary wheel. information. If this occurs, a message will be displayed The driver is always responsible for oper- in the instrument panel. ating the vehicle safely.

Related information • Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 169)

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Road Sign Information (RSI) – Displaying the speed limit indication can be Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation deactivated. To do so: limitations • Deselect the alternative in MY CAR RSI's camera has the same limitations as the Settings Car settings Road Sign human eye. See The camera’s limitations Information or cancel by pressing EXIT. (p. 212) for more information about the cam- Speed alert era's limitations. The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit exceeds the posted speed limit by more than (such as a sign with a town's name and the 3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the permitted speed limit) will not be registered symbol with the posted speed limit in the by RSI. instrument panel begins to flash. Other factors that may interfere with RSI To activate speed alert: include: • Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR • Faded signs Speed limit information Settings Car settings Speed alert or cancel by pressing EXIT. • Signs located in a curve When RSI registers a road sign showing the • Twisted or damaged signs speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol Related information • Obstructed signs on the instrument panel. • Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduction (p. 174) • Signs that are partially covered by snow, Settings in MY CAR ice, etc. • Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations (p. 175) Related information • My Car – introduction (p. 74) • Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduction (p. 174) • Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation (p. 175) 07 • The camera’s limitations (p. 212)

Possible settings in MY CAR

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175 07 Driver support

Cruise control (CC) – introduction Related information Cruise control (CC) – engaging and Cruise control is designed to assist the driver • Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set- setting speed by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily ting speed (p. 176) Cruise control is designed to assist the driver intended for use on long straight roads in • Cruise control (CC) – deactivating by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily steady traffic, such as on highways and other (p. 178) intended for use on long straight roads in main roads. steady traffic, such as on highways and other main roads. Operation Engaging the cruise control function

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Standby mode Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Standby mode Resume set speed Resume set speed Deactivating Deactivating 07 Activate/set speed Activate/set speed Selected speed (gray symbol indicates standby mode) Selected speed (gray symbol indicates Cruise control active: white symbol (gray standby mode) symbol indicates standby mode) Cruise control active: white symbol (gray symbol indicates standby mode)

176 07 Driver support

Before a speed can be set, the cruise control Adjusting the set speed Related information system must be engaged (put in standby After a speed has been set, it can be • Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 176) mode). increased or decreased by using the or • Cruise control (CC) – deactivating – Press the CRUISE button (1). buttons. (p. 178) > The symbol illuminates and the text 1. Press or briefly and release the (---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con- button to increase or decrease vehicle trol is in standby mode. speed by approximately 1 mph or 1 km/h. > This will become the set speed when NOTE the button is released. Putting cruise control in standby mode 2. Press and hold one of these buttons to does not set a cruising speed. increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or 1-km/h increments. Release the button Setting a speed when you have reached the desired Use the or buttons set the vehicle's speed. current speed. The set speed is shown in the display. NOTE • A temporary increase in speed by NOTE pressing the accelerator pedal, for less than 1 minute (e.g. when passing Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). another car), does not affect the current cruise control setting. The vehicle will automatically return to the previously set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. • If one of the cruise control buttons is 07 kept depressed for more than approx. 1 minute cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off in order to reset cruise control.

177 07 Driver support

Toggling between ACC and CC completely." The next time the system is Cruise control (CC) – deactivating (standard Cruise Control) switched on, ACC will be reactivated. Cruise control is designed to assist the driver Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) helps the Related information by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily driver maintain a safe distance/time interval to intended for use on long straight roads in • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction the vehicle ahead. steady traffic, such as on highways and other (p. 179) main roads. Switching from ACC to CC • Adaptive Cruise Control – function This may be useful if, for example, the radar (p. 180) Automatic deactivation sensor is obstructed in some way. See The cruise control is automatically deacti- Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 188) vated temporarily if one of the following for additional information. occurs: • Press and hold the button; the symbol • If the speed drops below approximately in the instrument panel will switch from 20 mph (30 km/h). to . • When the brake pedal is depressed. > This activates the standard cruise control • If the gear selector is moved to position function (see Cruise control (CC) – intro- N. duction (p. 176)). • During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. • If the vehicle's speed is increased by WARNING using the accelerator pedal for more than Switching from ACC to CC means that: 1 minute. Engine speed (rpm) is too high or too low. • Your vehicle will no longer automati- • cally maintain a set distance to a vehi- The currently set speed will be saved in the cle ahead. system's memory. • Only the set speed will be maintained Temporary deactivation and the driver will have to apply the 07 The driver can temporarily deactivate the brakes when needed. cruise control by pressing 0. The saved speed is shown in brackets in the information Switching from CC to ACC display. Switch off cruise control by pressing once or twice as needed according to the instructions in the previous section "Turning ACC off

178 07 Driver support

Resume set speed Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction WARNING If the cruise control has been deactivated ACC is an optional system designed to assist Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set • all driving situations and traffic, time interval to the vehicle ahead. It is primar- . The vehicle's speed returns to the most weather and road conditions. The recently set speed. ily intended for use on long straight roads in "Function" section provides informa- steady traffic, such as on highways and other tion about limitations that the driver WARNING main roads. must be aware of before using this feature. There may be a significant increase in When the driver has set the desired speed speed after the button has been and the time interval to the vehicle ahead, • This system is designed to be a sup- pressed. ACC functions as follows: plementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's • If there are no other vehicles in the lane attention and judgement. The driver is Deactivation ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at responsible for maintaining a safe dis- The Cruise control is disengaged by pressing the set speed. tance and speed and must intervene if or by switching off the engine. The set • If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower Adaptive Cruise Control does not speed is cleared. moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys- maintain a suitable speed or suitable tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to distance to the vehicle ahead. WARNING help maintain the set time interval to the • Maintenance of ACC components may vehicle ahead. When there are no longer only be performed by a trained and Cruise control should not be used in heavy slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehi- qualified Volvo technician. traffic or when driving on wet or slippery cle will accelerate to resume the set roads. Cruise control may not maintain set speed. speed on steep downgrades. If ACC is switched off completely or in standby mode and your vehicle comes too Related information close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will • Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 176) be warned by the Distance Alert system (see • Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set- Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193)). 07 ting speed (p. 176)

}} 179 07 Driver support

|| Operation • Adaptive Cruise Control – troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control – function (p. 192) • Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols and Function messages (p. 190) • Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time interval (p. 184) • Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed (p. 183) • Radar sensor (p. 188) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – Queue Assist (p. 186) • Adaptive Cruise Control – passing Controls and display another vehicle (p. 186) Resume previous settings. Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations • 1 (p. 188) Function overview Off/On/Standby mode • Adaptive Cruise Control – function Warning light, braking by driver required Decrease/increase time interval (p. 180) Controls in steering wheel Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging Put in active mode and set a speed (each • (p. 182) Radar sensor in front grille additional press increases/decreases speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h)) • Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control consists of: (p. 184) Set speed (shown in green when active, • A cruise control system to maintain a set shown in white when in standby mode) speed Time interval • A system to maintain a set distance to the 07 vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a ACC active (green symbol) or in standby time interval. For example, you can mode (white symbol) choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead. The Related information actual distance required to maintain a • Toggling between ACC and CC (standard 2-second interval will vary according the Cruise Control) (p. 178) speed of the vehicles. • Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 176)

180 07 Driver support

WARNING WARNING WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- The brake pedal moves when the adaptive When Adaptive Cruise Control is in sion avoidance system. The driver is cruise control system modulates the standby mode or is switched off com- always responsible for applying the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the pletely, the brakes will not be modulated brakes if the system does not detect brake pedal. automatically. The driver must assume full another vehicle. control over the vehicle. • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react The ACC system is designed to smoothly to people or animals, or small vehicles regulate speed. However, the driver must Warning light—driver braking required such as bicycles and motorcycles. It apply the brakes in situations that require Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force also does not react to slow moving, immediate braking. This applies when there that is equivalent to approximately 40% of parked or approaching vehicles, or are great differences in speed between vehi- the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situa- stationary objects. cles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. tions requiring more brake force than ACC • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in can provide and if the driver does not apply demanding driving conditions such as WARNING the brakes, an audible signal from the Colli- city driving or other heavy traffic situa- sion Warning system will sound and warning Due to limitations in the radar sensor, light will illuminate (see Collision warning* – tions, in slippery conditions, when braking may occur unexpectedly or not at there is a great deal of water or slush all, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limita- function (p. 206)) in the windshield to alert on the road, during heavy rain or tions (p. 188). the driver to react. snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. NOTE Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active mode at any permitted speed. However, if the Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h) contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the same lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, driver is not looking straight ahead may Your vehicle's speed is regulated by acceler- ACC disengages (goes into standby mode) make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. ating and braking. The brakes may emit a and will no longer modulate the brakes. The sound when they are being modulated by the driver will then have to maintain a safe dis- 07 adaptive cruise control system. This is nor- tance to the vehicle ahead. mal.

1 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 07 Driver support

|| WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging NOTE Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of Putting ACC in standby mode The driver's door must be closed and the vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see driver's seat belt must be fastened before Before ACC can be used to regulate speed Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv- (p. 188). In some cases there may be no and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's warning or the warning may be delayed. must first be put in standby mode. door is opened, ACC will return to standby The driver should always apply the brakes To do so: mode. when necessary. Related information Steep inclines and/or heavy loads • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly (p. 179) level roads. The system may have difficulty maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situations, the driver should always be prepared to apply the brakes if necessary. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction (p. 179) Controls and display Off/On/Standby mode

• Press (2). > The same symbol (7) appears (in white) in the instrument panel to indicate that ACC 07 is in standby mode.

182 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – setting This symbol indicates that NOTE speed you are approaching a vehicle ahead. • If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control Setting a speed buttons is pressed for more than ACC will switch from main- Once ACC has been put in standby mode: approximately one minute, ACC will be taining a set speed to main- deactivated. The engine must then be taining a set distance from switched off and restarted to reset that vehicle. ACC. When this happens, a speed • In some situations Adaptive Cruise range will be indicated on Control cannot be put in active mode. the speedometer: Cruise control Unavailable is shown in the display, see Adaptive Cruise The higher speed (the cur- Control – symbols and messages rently set speed (5)) will be (p. 190). marked in green. The lower speed in the range is the speed of Related information the vehicle ahead. • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction (p. 179) Controls and display Changing the set speed Put in active mode and set a speed (each • After a speed has been set, it can be additional press increases/decreases increased or decreased by briefly press- speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h)) ing the or buttons. Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the vehicle's • Press or (4). speed changes by 5 mph or 5 km/h. If the > The set speed, for example 60 mph (5), speed is increased by pressing the accel- will be magnified for several seconds and erator pedal, the vehicle's speed when the frame around the speed will change the button is pressed will be set. 07 colors from white to green to indicate • Press and hold one of these buttons to that this speed has been stored (set). increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or When this symbol has changed col- 1-km/h increments. Release the button ors from white to green, ACC is in when you have reached the desired active mode and the vehicle will speed. maintain the set speed.

183 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time Different time intervals can Adaptive Cruise Control – interval be selected and are shown in deactivating the instrument panel2 as 1–5 Setting a time interval horizontal bars. The greater Standby mode (temporary deactivation) the number of bars, the To temporarily deactivate ACC (put it in longer the time interval. One standby mode): bar represents a time interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds. To set/change a time interval: • Press the / buttons (3). At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows Controls and display the time interval to vary considerably in cer- Decrease/increase time interval tain situations. Controls and display The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be WARNING increased by pressing and decreased by Resume previous settings. Only use a time interval that is suitable pressing . The current time interval is • Off/On/Standby mode in current traffic conditions. shown briefly in the display following adjust- A short time interval gives the driver • ment. • Press (2). limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. This symbol and the marking for the set 07 speed with change colors from green to white. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction The previously set speed and time interval are (p. 179) resumed by pressing (1).

2 The same symbol appears if Distance Alert (see Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193)) is activated

184 07 Driver support

WARNING Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the Turning ACC off completely instrument panel. The driver must then inter- The vehicle may accelerate quickly after vene and adapt the vehicle's speed to the has been pressed if its current speed is surrounding traffic and regulate the distance considerably lower than the set speed. to the vehicle ahead. An automatic switch to standby mode may be Standby mode due to action by the caused if: driver • engine speed (rpm) is too high/low ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in The driver's door is opened standby mode: • • The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt • if the brakes are applied • the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph • if the gear selector is moved to N (30 km/h) Controls and display • if the driver drives faster than the set • the wheels lose traction speed for more than 1 minute. Resume previous settings. • brake temperature is high In this happens, the driver will have to regu- Off/On/Standby mode late the vehicle's speed. • the radar sensor is obstructed by, for example, wet snow or rain. • From standby mode, press (2) once. NOTE Resuming the set speed • From active mode, press (2) twice. If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactiva- If the accelerator pedal is only depressed The set speed and time interval are then for a short time, such as when passing ted by pressing the button on the steering cleared from the system's memory and can- another vehicle, ACC is deactivated tem- wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the not be resumed by pressing (1) . porarily and is reactivated when the pedal most recently set speed. is released. Related information WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction Automatic standby mode 07 The vehicle may accelerate quickly after (p. 179) ACC is linked to other systems such as the stability system. If this system is not function- has been pressed if its current speed is considerably lower than the set speed. ing properly, ACC will switch off automatically. In the event of automatic deactivation, an audible signal will sound and the message

185 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – passing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – Enhanced speed interval another vehicle Queue Assist Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is NOTE Passing another vehicle linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis- If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by The driver's door must be closed and the sion. driver's seat belt must be fastened before ACC and the driver indicates that he/she ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv- would like to pass the vehicle ahead by using Introduction er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's the left turn signal, ACC can assist by accel- Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is door is opened, ACC will return to standby erating briefly. linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis- mode. sion. This function is active at speeds above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). Queue Assist consists of the following func- Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval tions: to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed, including a complete stop. WARNING • Enhanced speed interval (including when Please be aware that this function will also the vehicle is at a complete stop or is In order to activate ACC at speeds below cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in moving at speed below 18 mph 18 mph (30 km/h): certain situations other than passing (30 km/h)) The vehicle ahead must be within a rea- another vehicle, for example using the left • • Automatic standby mode when ACC sonable distance (not farther away than turn signal to indicate a lane change or a changes target vehicles turn toward a highway exit at speeds approx. 100 ft/30 meters) above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). • No automatic braking when at a standstill • The lowest speed that can be selected is • The parking brake is applied automati- 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also Related information cally help maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction Please note that the lowest speed that can be • a complete stop. (p. 179) set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle During short stops (less than approximately ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist 3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehi- 07 consists of the following features: cle will begin moving again automatically as soon as the vehicle ahead begins to move. If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automatically go into standby mode.

186 07 Driver support

The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in The following only applies at speeds below This happens if: one of the following ways: approximately 18 mph (30 km/h): • The driver presses the brake pedal • By pressing If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle • The parking brake is activated that the radar sensor has detected) from a • By accelerating up to at least 3 mph The gear selected is moved to P, N or R moving vehicle to a stationary one, the sys- • (4 km/h). ACC will then resume following • the vehicle ahead. tem will apply the brakes in your vehicle. The driver presses the button to put ACC in standby mode Your vehicle will then resume following the WARNING vehicle ahead at the set time interval. The parking brake is applied At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC automatically NOTE will not react to a stationary vehicle and In certain situations, ACC will apply the park- apply the brakes but will instead acceler- ing brake in order to continue keeping the ACC can remain active and keep your ate to the previously set speed. The driver vehicle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes. must actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle at a standstill. After 4 minutes have elapsed, the parking vehicle. This happens if: brake will be engaged and ACC will go into standby mode. • The driver opens the door or takes off ACC disengages and goes into standby his/her seat belt To reactivate ACC, the driver must release mode if: the parking brake (see Parking brake – • The stability system is put in Sport mode general information (p. 274)). • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph (see Stability system – operation (p. 170)) (15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if • ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill the target object is a stationary vehicle or for more than 2 minutes Automatic standby mode when ACC some other type of object such as e.g., a changes target vehicles speed bump. • The engine has been switched off • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph • The brakes have overheated (15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so Related information that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction follow. • 07 (p. 179) No automatic braking when at a standstill In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply the brakes and go into standby mode while If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be the vehicle is not moving. This means that the a stationary vehicle ahead driver will have to apply the brakes.

187 07 Driver support

Radar sensor heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations The radar sensor is designed to help detect obscuring the radar sensor. The ACC cannot cover all driving situations cars or larger vehicles driving in the same and traffic, weather and road conditions. direction as your vehicle, in the same lane. NOTE Situations where ACC may not function The radar sensor and its limitations Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean. optimally In addition to being used by the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), the radar sensor is also WARNING used by Distance Alert (see Distance Alert – • if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi- introduction (p. 193)) and Collision Warning cantly different from your own speed. • The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may detect with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detec- Related information tion (see Collision warning – introduction a vehicle later than expected or not • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction detect other vehicles at all. (p. 204)). (p. 179) • If ACC is not functioning properly, Collision warning – introduction (p. 204) WARNING • cruise control will also be disabled. • Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193) • If there is visible damage to the front grille or you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged in any way, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. The radar sensor may only function partially (or not at all) if it is damaged or is not securely fastened in place. • Accessories or other objects, such as extra headlights, must not be installed in front of the grille. 07 • Modification of the radar sensor could make its use illegal.

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles ahead is impeded: • if the radar sensor is obstructed and cannot detect other vehicles, for example in

188 07 Driver support

WARNING WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover • Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- all driving situations and traffic, sion avoidance system. The driver is weather and road conditions. The always responsible for applying the "Function" section provides informa- brakes if the system does not detect tion about limitations that the driver another vehicle. must be aware of before using this • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react feature. to people or animals, or small vehicles • This system is designed to be a sup- such as bicycles and motorcycles. It plementary driving aid. It is not, how- also does not react to slow moving, ever, intended to replace the driver's parked or approaching vehicles, or attention and judgement. The driver is stationary objects. responsible for maintaining a safe dis- • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in tance and speed and must intervene if demanding driving conditions such as Adaptive Cruise Control does not city driving or other heavy traffic situa- maintain a suitable speed or suitable tions, in slippery conditions, when distance to the vehicle ahead. there is a great deal of water or slush • Maintenance of ACC components may on the road, during heavy rain or only be performed by a trained and snow, in poor visibility, on winding qualified Volvo technician. roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink) In certain situations, the radar sensor Related information cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction for example a vehicle that suddenly (p. 179) enters the lane between your vehicle and the target vehicle. 07 Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected. In curves, the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle.

189 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols and messages

Symbols and messages in the display A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

Green symbol A speed has been set.

White symbol ACC is in standby mode but no speed has been set.

- Standard cruise control has been selected manually.

- Set ESC to Normal to ACC cannot be put in active mode until the stability system is switched normal operating mode, see enable Cruise Stability system – introduction (p. 169) for more information.

- Cruise control Cancel- ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver has to regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the led vehicle ahead.

- Cruise control Unavail- ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to: able • high brake temperature 07 • the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.) Radar blocked See ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect manual other vehicles. In this situation, the driver can switch to standard cruise control, see Toggling between ACC and CC (standard Cruise Control) (p. 178) See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 188) for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

190 07 Driver support

Symbol Message Description

- Cruise control Service ACC is not functioning. required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

- Press Brake To hold + The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep an audible signal the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll. The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

- Below 30 km/h Only This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle following ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction (p. 179)

191 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – from the sensor have been obstructed and System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian troubleshooting that a vehicle ahead cannot be detected. Detection will not function. This, in turn, means that the functions of the The table lists possible causes for this mes- If the message Radar blocked See manual ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning sage being displayed, and suitable actions. is displayed, this means that the radar signals

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction. way.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect with the radar signals. the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that display. it is no longer obstructed.

Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction (p. 179)

192 07 Driver support

Distance Alert – introduction NOTE Distance Alert – operation Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- Distance Alert only monitors distance to trol and is a function that provides information the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise trol and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. Control is in standby mode or off. about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. Introduction Distance Alert is active at speeds above WARNING approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time inter- Distance Alert only indicates the distance val information is only given for a vehicle that to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the is driving ahead of your vehicle in the same speed of your vehicle. direction. No information is provided for vehicles driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a standstill. Related information • Distance Alert – operation (p. 193) • Distance Alert – limitations (p. 194) • Distance Alert – symbols and messages (p. 196) Press the button in the center instrument panel to switch this function on or off. The indicator light in the button illuminates when the function is on. Depending on the optional equipment selected, there may not be room for a Dis- tance Alert button in the center console. In this case, the function is controlled through Amber warning light3. the menu system. Press MY CAR and go to 07 An amber warning light in the windshield Settings Car settings Distance alert glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the On/Off. one ahead than the set time interval.

3 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model }} 193 07 Driver support

|| Setting a time interval NOTE Distance Alert – limitations Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- The higher your vehicle’s speed, the • trol and is a function that provides information greater the distance to the vehicle about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a given time interval. Limitations • The set time interval is also used by Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor Adaptive Cruise Control, see Adaptive used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col- Cruise Control – setting speed (p. 183). lision Warning system. See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 188) for more infor- WARNING mation on the radar sensor’s limitations. Only use a time interval that is suitable in NOTE current traffic conditions. Controls and display Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light Time interval: Increase/decrease contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the Related information driver is not looking straight ahead may Time interval On • Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193) make the visual warning signal in the wind- Distance Alert – limitations (p. 194) shield difficult to see. Press to increase the interval or to • decrease it. • Distance Alert – symbols and messages (p. 196) WARNING Five different time intervals can be selected and are • Bad weather or winding roads may shown in the display as 1–5 affect the radar sensor’s capacity to horizontal bars. The greater detect vehicles ahead. the number of bars, the • The size of the vehicle ahead, such as longer the time interval. One a motorcycle, may also make it difficult 07 bar represents approximately to detect. This may result in the warn- 1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is ing light illuminating at a shorter dis- approximately 3 seconds. tance than the one that has been set, or that the light will not come on at all.

194 07 Driver support

Related information • Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193) • Distance Alert – operation (p. 193) • Distance Alert – symbols and messages (p. 196)

195 07 Driver support

Distance Alert – symbols and Symbols and text messages messages A text message can be erased by pressing Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- briefly on the OK button on the turn signal trol and is a function that provides information lever. about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and can- manual not detect other vehicles. See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 188) for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Serv- Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning prop- ice required erly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Related information • Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193) • Distance Alert – operation (p. 193) • Distance Alert – limitations (p. 194)

196 07 Driver support

City Safety – introduction which means that the system cannot help the WARNING City Safety™4 is a support system designed driver in all situations. • City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles to help the driver avoid low speed collisions City Safety™ should not be used to alter the traveling in the same direction as your when driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go way in which the driver operates the vehicle. vehicle and does not react to small traffic. The driver should never rely solely on this vehicles or motorcycles or to people or system to safely stop the vehicle. animals. City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s speed is below approximately 2 mph Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will • City Safety™ is not activated when (4 km/h). This means that City Safety™ will not be aware of City Safety™ except when your vehicle is backing up. not react if your vehicle approaches another the system intervenes when a low-speed col- • City Safety™ functions at speeds up vehicle at very low speed, for example, when lision is imminent. to 30 mph (50 km/h). This system can parking. If the vehicle is also equipped with the help prevent a collision if the difference in speed between your vehicle The function is active at speeds up to optional Collision Warning with Full Auto- and the vehicle ahead is less than approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists brake and Pedestrian Detection system, the 9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in two systems interact. For more information the driver by applying the brakes automati- speed is greater, a collision cannot be about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake cally, thereby avoiding or helping to reduce avoided but the speed at which the system, see Collision warning – introduction the effects of a collision. collision occurs can be reduced. The (p. 204) . City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late driver must apply the vehicle’s brakes as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa- for full braking effect. WARNING tion. • City Safety™ will not intervene in a potential collision situation if the vehi- City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if • City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to cle is being driven actively. The driver a low-speed collision is imminent. However, the driver. It can never replace the driver’s attention to traffic conditions is always responsible for maintaining a the system will not intervene in situations or his/her responsibility for operating safe distance to a vehicle or object where the driver actively steers the vehicle or the vehicle in a safe manner. ahead. applies the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoided. This is done in order to always • City Safety™ does not function in all 07 give the driver’s actions highest priority. driving situations or in all traffic, Related information weather or road conditions. • City Safety – function (p. 198) City Safety™ activates in situations where the driver has not applied the brakes in time, • City Safety – operation (p. 199) • City Safety – limitations (p. 199)

4 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation }} 197 07 Driver support

• City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200) City Safety – function tion display to indicate that the system is/has • City Safety – symbols and messages been active. (p. 202) Function • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203) NOTE • When City Safety™ applies the brakes, the brake lights will illuminate. • In cases where City Safety™ has stopped the vehicle, the system will then release the brakes. The driver must apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.

Related information • City Safety – introduction (p. 197) Location of the laser sensor in the windshield5 • City Safety – operation (p. 199) City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you • City Safety – limitations (p. 199) using a laser sensor mounted in the upper • City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200) section of the windshield. If a collision is City Safety – symbols and messages imminent, City Safety™ will automatically • (p. 202) apply the brakes, which may feel like hard braking. • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203) If the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ 07 alone cannot prevent a collision from taking place. The driver must apply the brakes to help avoid a collision or reduce its effect. When the function activates and applies the brakes, a message will appear in the informa-

5 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

198 07 Driver support

City Safety – operation Related information City Safety – limitations • City Safety – introduction (p. 197) Using City Safety™ • City Safety – function (p. 198) Limitations City Safety – limitations (p. 199) NOTE • WARNING • City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200) The City Safety™ function is activated The laser sensor has certain limitations automatically each time the engine has • City Safety – symbols and messages and its function may be reduced (or it may been switched off and restarted. (p. 202) not function at all) in conditions such as • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203) heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensa- On and Off • My Car – introduction (p. 74) tion, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield In certain situations, it may be desirable to may also interfere with the sensor’s func- switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving tion. in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc. may obscure the hood and windshield. The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed When the engine is running, City Safety™ can to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles be switched off as follows: ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and darkness. Press My Car in the center console control panel and go to Settings Car settings Objects such as warning flags hanging from long objects on the roof or accessories such Driver support systems City Safety. as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the Select Off. front of the vehicle that are higher than the If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will hood may also impede the sensor’s function. reactivate when the engine is restarted. Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increases on slippery road surfaces, which may WARNING reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli- 07 The laser sensor emits light when the igni- sion. In situations like this, the stability sys- tion is in mode II or higher, even if City tem (see Stability system – introduction Safety™ has been switched off. (p. 169)) will help provide the best possible braking capacity and stability. To switch City Safety™ on again: City Safety™ emits a laser beam and meas- • Follow the same procedure as for switch- ures the way in which the light is reflected. ing City Safety™ off but select On. }} 199 07 Driver support

|| Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflec- City Safety – troubleshooting NOTE tive surfaces may not be detected. Normally, the license plate and taillight reflectors give Troubleshooting If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in front the laser sensor, contact a trained reflective surfaces to be detected. the information display, this indicates that the and qualified Volvo service technician to City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in repair or replace the windshield (see the NOTE some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead illustration showing the location of the sen- of you, which means that the system is not sor in City Safety – function (p. 198)). Fail- • Keep the windshield in front of the functioning. ing to do so may result in reduced City laser sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, Safety™ functionality. etc., see City Safety – function However, this message will not be displayed (p. 198). in all situations in which the sensor is To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following: • Snow or ice on the hood deeper than obstructed. For this reason, the driver must 2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen- ensure that the area of the windshield in front • Volvo recommends that cracks, sor. Keep the hood free of ice and of the sensor is always kept clean. scratches or stone chips on the wind- snow. shield in front of the laser sensor The following table shows some of the situa- should not be repaired; in such cases, • Do not mount or in any way attach tions that can cause the message to be dis- the entire windshield should be anything on the windshield that could played and suggested actions. replaced. obstruct the laser sensor. • Before the windshield is replaced, Cause Action contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that Related information the correct windshield is ordered and The area of the wind- Clean the • City Safety – introduction (p. 197) installed. If the wrong type of windshield in front of the sen- windshield or • City Safety – function (p. 198) shield is used, this may cause City sor is dirty or covered by remove the ice/ Safety™ to function improperly or not • City Safety – operation (p. 199) ice or snow. snow. at all. Volvo recommends the use of City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200) only Genuine Volvo Replacement • The laser sensor's field Remove the Windshields. 07 • City Safety – symbols and messages of view is obstructed. obstruction. (p. 202) • When replacing windshield wipers, use • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203) the same type or ones approved by Volvo.

200 07 Driver support

Related information • City Safety – introduction (p. 197) • City Safety – function (p. 198) • City Safety – operation (p. 199) • City Safety – limitations (p. 199) • City Safety – symbols and messages (p. 202) • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203)

201 07 Driver support

City Safety – symbols and messages main instrument panel may illuminate and its A text message can be erased by pressing associated message will be displayed. briefly on the OK button on the turn signal Symbols and messages in the display lever. When City Safety™ automatically applies the brakes, one or more of the symbols in the

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically. Safety

Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction. blocked • Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s). For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see City Safety – limitations (p. 199).

City Safety Service City Safety™ is not functioning. required • If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Related information • City Safety – introduction (p. 197) • City Safety – function (p. 198) • City Safety – operation (p. 199) 07 • City Safety – limitations (p. 199) • City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200) • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203)

202 07 Driver support

City Safety – Laser sensor Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ WARNING

The laser sensor Maximum average output 45 mW Eye injury may occur if any of the following points are not followed: Pulse length 33 ns • It is essential that all pertinent instructions be followed when handling laser Divergence (horizontal × verti- 28° × 12° instruments. Testing, repairing, remov- cal) ing, adjusting and/or replacing any components in the laser sensor may NOTE only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The function of aftermarket laser detectors may be affected by City Safety's laser sen- • Do not remove the laser sensor sor. (including removal of the lenses). A laser sensor that has been removed belongs to laser class 3B according to WARNING standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser The upper decal describes the laser beam's class 3B present a risk of injury to the The laser sensor emits light when the igni- classification and contains the following text: tion is in mode II or higher, even if City eyes. Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly Safety™ has been switched off. • The laser sensor’s connector must be with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class disconnected before the sensor is 1M laser product. removed from the windshield. The laser sensor must be mounted in The lower decal describes the laser beam's • place on the windshield before con- physical data and contains the text: necting the sensor’s connector. IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with • Do not view the laser sensor (which FDA performance standards for laser prod- emits spreading, invisible laser beams) ucts except for deviations pursuant to Laser with optical instruments from a dis- 07 Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001 tance of less than 4 inches (100 mm). The laser beam's physical data is listed in the following table: Related information • City Safety – introduction (p. 197) • City Safety – function (p. 198) • City Safety – operation (p. 199)

}} 203 07 Driver support

• City Safety – limitations (p. 199) Collision warning – introduction ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on • City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200) Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full the system, the chances of an accident even- tually occurring increase considerably. • City Safety – symbols and messages Auto Brake is designed to assist the driver if (p. 202) there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian, The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full a cyclist, a vehicle ahead that is at a standstill Auto Brake and City Safety™ systems sup- or one that is moving in the same direction as plement each other. See City Safety – intro- your vehicle. duction (p. 197) for detailed information about City Safety™. This system consists of the following three functions: WARNING • Collision Warning warns the driver of a potential collision situation. No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations. • Brake Support helps the driver brake For that reason, never test the Auto-brake efficiently in a critical situation. system by driving toward a person or • Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati- object. This could result in serious injury or cally if a collision with a pedestrian, a death. cyclist or another vehicle cannot be avoided and the driver does not apply the brakes in time or steer around the person/vehicle. Auto-brake can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at which a collision occurs. Since Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is activated in circumstances where the driver should have begun braking much sooner, the system will not be able to 07 assist the driver in all situations. This system is designed to activate as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary interven- tion. The system should not be used in such a way that the driver changes his/her way of operat-

204 07 Driver support

WARNING WARNING • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 208) Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with • • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210) Full Auto Brake does not work in all Full Auto Brake will not provide a • driving, traffic, weather and road con- warning or brake the vehicle for • The camera’s limitations (p. 212) ditions. It does not react to vehicles pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, • The camera’s limitations (p. 212) not traveling in the same direction as even if there is street lighting in the Collision warning – troubleshooting your vehicle. area. • (p. 213) Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with The auto-brake function can help pre- • • Collision warning – symbols and mes- Full Auto Brake does not react to ani- vent a collision or reduce the speed at • sages (p. 215) mals. impact but the driver should always • Warnings are only provided when the apply the brakes for the best possible risk of collision is high. The "Function" braking effect, even if auto-brake is section provides information about actively applying the brakes. limitations that the driver must be • Never wait for a collision warning. This aware of before using Collision Warn- system is designed to be a supple- ing. mentary driving aid. It is not, however, • Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with intended to replace the driver's atten- Full Auto Brake will not provide a tion and judgement. The driver is warning or brake the vehicle for responsible for maintaining a safe dis- pedestrians or cyclists at speeds tance and speed, even when the colli- above 50 mph (80 km/h). sion warning system is in use. • Maintenance of the Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake system's components must only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician. 07

Related information • Collision warning* – function (p. 206) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 207) • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection (p. 209)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205 07 Driver support

Collision warning* – function Brake Support • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection If the risk of collision continues to increase (p. 209) after the collision warning has been given, • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection Brake Support is activated. Brake Support (p. 208) prepares the brake system to react quickly, • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210) and the brakes are applied slightly. This may be experienced as a light tug. • Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 213) If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking • Collision warning – symbols and mes- effect will be provided. Brake Support also sages (p. 215) increases brake force if the system determines that the driver has not applied adequate pressure on the brake pedal. Auto-brake Function overview If a collision is imminent and the driver has Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk not applied the brakes or begun to steer around the vehicle, pedestrian or a cyclist, Radar sensor the auto-brake function is activated without Camera the driver pressing the brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help reduce the vehicle’s speed when the collision occurs or limited Collision Warning brake force is applied if this is sufficient to The radar sensor and the camera work avoid the collision. together to detect a pedestrian, a cyclist, stationary vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle. If there NOTE is a risk of collision with a vehicle, a cyclist or 07 The auto-brake and brake support func- a pedestrian, the driver is alerted by a flash- tions are always on and cannot be turned ing red warning light and an audible warning off. signal. The system is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h). Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 204) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Collision warning* – operation ter console control panel and going to NOTE Settings Car settings Driver support MY CAR • When Adaptive Cruise Control is used, Settings are made by pressing on systems Warning sound if risk of the center console control panel and using the warning light and signal will be collision. the menus displayed. used by that function, even if the warnings provided by Pedestrian and Setting a warning distance Activating/deactivating both warning Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake This setting determines the distance at which signals have been deactivated by the driver. the visual and audible warnings are triggered. audible visual To switch the system's and Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing • In situations where traffic is moving at MY considerably different speeds, or if the signals on or off at the same time, press MY CAR on the center console control panel CAR on the center console control panel and vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn- and going to Settings Car settings go to Settings Car settings Driver ings may be considered to be late, Driver support systems Collision even if the setting Long has been support systems Collision Warning. If Warning Warning distance. selected. Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is on, the system will perform a The warning distance determines the level of self-test each time the engine is started by sensitivity used by the system. The warning Checking settings briefly illuminating the warning light. See My distance Long provides an earlier warning. The current system settings can be checked Car – introduction (p. 74) for a description of Begin by using Long and if the system gives by pressing MY CAR on the center console the menu system. too many warnings, try changing to Normal. control panel and going to Settings Car When the engine is switched on, the system settings Driver support systems setting that was being used when it was WARNING Collision Warning. switched off will be the default setting. • The setting Short should only be used in situations where traffic is light and Related information NOTE moving at low speeds. • Collision warning – introduction (p. 204) The auto-brake and pedestrian/cyclist • Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with • Collision warning* – function (p. 206) detection features are always on, even if Full Auto Brake alerts the driver to the • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection 07 the audible and visual warning signals risk of a collision but this function can- (p. 209) have been deactivated. not reduce the driver’s reaction time. • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection • For the system to be as effective as (p. 208) Activating/deactivating the audible possible, it is recommended that Dis- warning signal only tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see Dis- • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210) The audible warning signal can be activated/ tance Alert – operation (p. 193). • The camera’s limitations (p. 212) deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the cen-

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207 07 Driver support

• Collision warning – symbols and mes- Collision warning* – Cyclist detection sages (p. 215) The system can detect a cyclist and auto- • Collision warning – troubleshooting brake if certain parameters are fulfilled. (p. 213)

The function only detects cyclists from behind who are moving in the same direction as your vehicle The Cyclist Detection feature requires the fol- Optimal example of what the system considers lowing in order to function: to be a cyclist: clear body/bike contours, straight from behind and directly in front of the vehicle • The cyclist must be an adult riding an "adult-size" bike In order to help detect a cyclist, the system has to receive clear information about the • The bike must be equipped with an contours of the cyclist's body and the bike. It approved and clearly visible rear-facing has to able to clearly detect the bike, the red reflector that is mounted at least cyclist's head, arms, shoulders, legs and 27 in. (70 cm) above the road surface upper and lower body combined with the per- • The feature can only detect a cyclist son's pattern of movement when cycling. straight from behind and who is moving in 07 the same direction as your vehicle • A cyclist who is to the left or right of your vehicle may be detected late or not at all. • The camera's capacity to see a cyclist at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for the human eye. • The camera's function is deactivated and will not detect a cyclist in darkness or in

208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

tunnels, even if there is street lighting in • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210) Collision warning* – Pedestrian the area. • Collision warning – troubleshooting detection • For optimal cyclist detection, City (p. 213) Safety™ must be activated. • Collision warning – symbols and messages (p. 215) WARNING Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

The system cannot detect a bike/cyclist if: • He/she is wearing loose-fitting clothing The system cannot identify all pedestrians that may obscure body contours The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full • The bike is approaching your vehicle Auto Brake system can only identify and from the side detect a pedestrian who is standing upright. • The bike is not equipped with a rear- This person can be standing still, walking or facing red reflector running. • The bike is carrying large objects This means that the system has to be able to • Most of the cyclist's body or the bike identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, itself cannot be "seen" by the system's legs, the upper and lower parts of the body camera and a person's pattern of movement when walking or running. 07 Related information If parts of the body are not visible to the cam- • Collision warning – introduction (p. 204) era, the system cannot detect the pedestrian. • Collision warning* – function (p. 206) The following conditions apply: • Collision warning* – operation (p. 207) • In order to detect a pedestrian, the sys- • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection tem must have a full view of the person's (p. 209)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209 07 Driver support

|| entire body and the person must be at • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection Collision warning* – limitations least 32 in. (80 cm) tall. (p. 208) • The system cannot detect a pedestrian • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210) Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the carrying a large object. Collision warning – troubleshooting • driver is not looking straight ahead may make The camera's capacity to see a pedes- (p. 213) • the visual warning signal in the windshield dif- trian at dawn or dusk is limited, much as • Collision warning – symbols and mes- ficult to see. For this reason, always activate it is for the human eye. sages (p. 215) the audible warning signal. • The camera's function is deactivated and will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or Slippery driving conditions increase braking in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in distance, which can reduce the system's the area. capacity to avoid a collision. In these conditions, the ABS and stability systems provide WARNING the best possible braking effect while helping to maintain stability. • Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is designed to be a NOTE supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driv- The visual warning signal may be tempo- er's attention and judgement. The rarily disengaged in the event of high pas- driver is always responsible for operat- senger compartment temperature due to ing the vehicle in a safe manner. strong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible warning signal will be used, even if • The system cannot detect all pedes- it has been deactivated in the menu sys- trians in all situations, such as in dark- tem. ness/at night and cannot detect partially hidden pedestrians, people who are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) 07 tall, or people wearing clothing that obscures the contours of their bodies.

Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 204) • Collision warning* – function (p. 206) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

WARNING NOTE Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 204) • In certain situations, the system can- If warnings are given too frequently, the not provide warnings or warnings may warning distance can be reduced (see Col- • Collision warning* – operation (p. 207) be delayed if traffic conditions or other lision warning* – operation (p. 207)). This • Collision warning* – function (p. 206) external factors make it impossible for causes the system to provide later warnings, which decreases the total number of • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection the radar sensor or camera to detect a (p. 209) pedestrian, a cyclist or a vehicle warnings provided. ahead. • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 208) • Warnings may not be provided if the WARNING distance to the vehicle ahead is short, • The camera’s limitations (p. 212) The system is not activated at speeds or if movements of the steering wheel/ • • Collision warning – symbols and mes- under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There- brake pedal are great, such as during sages (p. 215) fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you active driving. approach a vehicle ahead at very low • Collision warning – troubleshooting • The sensor system has a limited range speed, such as when parking. (p. 213) for pedestrians/cyclists and provides The driver's actions always have high- warnings and braking effect most • est priority and override the Pedestrian effectively at speeds up to 30 mph and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto (50 km/h). For stationary or slow-mov- Brake system. This means that the ing vehicles, the system functions best system will not intervene in situations if your vehicle’s speed is below where the driver is actively steering, approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). braking or pressing the accelerator • Warnings for stationary or slow-mov- pedal, even if a collision is imminent. ing vehicles may not be provided in When Auto-brake has prevented a col- dark conditions or in poor visibility. • lision with a stationary object, your vehicle will remain at a standstill for The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle 07 Auto Brake system uses the same radar sen- has been braked for a moving vehicle sors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For more ahead, your vehicle's speed will be information on the radar sensor and its limita- reduced to the same speed as that tions, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limita- vehicle's. tions (p. 188).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211 07 Driver support

The camera’s limitations WARNING • Collision warning – troubleshooting The camera has the same limitations as the (p. 213) The camera has the same type of limi- human eye. • Collision warning – symbols and mes- tations as the human eye, i.e., it can- • sages (p. 215) The camera is used by Pedestrian and Cyclist not see as well in heavy snowfall or Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc- Detection with Full Auto Brake Collision warn- rain, thick fog or in heavy blowing dust • tion (p. 174) ing – introduction (p. 204), Active High Beams or snow. In such conditions, systems (Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 88)), Road Sign depending on the camera may experi- • Driver Alert System (p. 217) ence greatly reduced functionality or Information (Road Sign Information (RSI)* – • Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 88) may be temporarily deactivated. introduction (p. 174)) and Driver Alert System (Driver Alert System (p. 217)) with Lane • Never place any objects, decals, etc., Departure Warning or Lane Keeping Aid. on the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the NOTE camera’s function, and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize • To help protect the camera in very hot the camera to stop functioning. conditions, it may be temporarily • Strong sunlight, reflections from the switched off for approximately 15 road surface, ice or snow covering the minutes after the engine has been road, a dirty road surface, or unclear started. lane marker lines may drastically • Keep the section of the windshield in reduce the camera’s capacity to front of the camera clean and free of detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, ice, snow, or condensation. a cyclist or another vehicle.

Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 204) 07 • Collision warning* – function (p. 206) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 207) • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection (p. 209) • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 208) • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210)

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Collision warning – troubleshooting pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road marker Lane Keeping Aid will not have full functional- lines in front of the vehicle. ity. Fault tracing and actions This, in turn, means that Pedestrian and The table lists possible causes for this mes- Windscreen Sensors If the message Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake, Driver sage being displayed, and suitable actions. blocked is displayed, this means that the Alert Control, Lane Departure Warning or camera is obscured and cannot detect

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera. with ice or snow.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to regis- display. ter visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this dirty. surface cleaned.

}} 213 07 Driver support

|| Maintenance • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210) • The camera’s limitations (p. 212) • Collision warning – symbols and messages (p. 215)

Camera and radar sensor6. In order to function properly, the camera and radar sensor must be kept clean. Dirt, ice, snow, etc., will reduce the function of these components. Remove ice and snow when necessary and wash these areas regularly with a suitable car washing liquid. Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 204) • Collision warning* – function (p. 206) 07 • Collision warning* – operation (p. 207) • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection (p. 209) • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 208)

6 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Collision warning – symbols and A text message can be erased by pressing messages briefly on the OK button on the turn signal The table lists possible causes for collision lever. warning-related messages being displayed, and suitable actions.

Symbol Message Description

Collis'n warning Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is switched off. This message is displayed when the OFF engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake cannot be activated. This message is displayed when Unavailable the driver attempts to activate the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button. activated

Windscreen Sen- The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow, sors blocked ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for more information on the camera’s limitations.

Radar blocked See Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is manual blocked, for example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other vehicles, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 188) for more information on the radar sensor’s 07 limitations.

Collision warn. Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is partially or completely not functioning. Service required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

}} 215 07 Driver support

|| Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 204) • Collision warning* – function (p. 206) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 207) • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection (p. 209) • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 208) • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210) • Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 213)

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Driver Alert System WARNING Driver Alert Control (DAC) – The Driver Alert System is designed to help a introduction The Driver Alert System does not function driver who may be becoming fatigued or who in all situations and is designed to be a DAC is intended to alert the driver if his/her is inadvertently leaving the lane. supplementary aid. It is not, however, driving becomes erratic, such as if the driver intended to replace the driver’s attention is distracted or fatigued. Introduction and judgement. The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- DAC is designed to help detect a slowly ent functions that can be switched on changing driving pattern. It is primarily together or separately. intended to be used on main roads and is not meant for use in city traffic. • Driver Alert Control (DAC), see Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction (p. 217) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW)7, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 222) or • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)8, see Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction (p. 227) When one or both of the functions has been switched on, it is in standby mode and is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h). A camera monitors the painted lines marking The function deactivates if the vehicle's the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and speed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h). compares the direction of the road with the driver’s movements of the steering wheel. Both functions use a camera that is depend- 07 The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not ent on the road/lane being clearly marked by follow the lane smoothly. painted lines on each side.

7 Models with 5- or 6-cylinder engines only. 8 Models with 4-cylinder engines only. }} 217 07 Driver support

|| NOTE • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro- Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation duction (p. 222) The camera has certain limitations, see Operating DAC Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction Settings are made using menu system and (p. 188). (p. 227) the display in the center console. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for more information on WARNING the menu system. • DAC is not intended to extend the On/Off duration of driving. Always plan breaks To put Driver Alert in standby mode: at regular intervals to help remain alert. • In the MY CAR menu, scroll to Car • A warning from DAC should not be settings Driver support systems ignored. A driver may not be aware of Driver Alert and check the box. If the box how fatigued he/she has become. is not checked, the function is off. • In certain cases, fatigue may not affect the driver’s behavior. In situations of Related information this type, no warning will be provided. • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction Therefore, it is important to take (p. 217) breaks at regular intervals, regardless • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function of whether or not DAC has given a (p. 219) warning. • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations (p. 219) Related information • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function messages (p. 220) (p. 219) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation (p. 217) 07 (p. 218) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro- • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations duction (p. 222) (p. 219) • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and (p. 227) messages (p. 220) • Driver Alert System (p. 217)

218 07 Driver support

Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and Driver Alert Control (DAC) – messages (p. 220) limitations Function • Driver Alert System (p. 217) Driver Alert is activated when the vehicle Limitations • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro- exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h) and will duction (p. 222) In certain situations, DAC may provide warn- remain active as long as the speed is over ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has approx. 37 mph (60 km/h). • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction not become erratic: (p. 227) If the vehicle is being driven errati- • in strong crosswinds cally, the driver will be alerted by an • on grooved road surfaces. audible signal and the message if the driver is testing the LDW function, Driver Alert Time for a break is • see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – displayed. The warning will be repeated after introduction (p. 222) a short time if the driving pattern remains the same. or Press the OK button to erase a message. • if the driver is testing the LKA function, see Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduc- WARNING tion (p. 227) • An alert should be taken seriously Related information since it is sometimes difficult for a • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction driver to realize that he/she is fatigued. (p. 217) • In the event of a warning or if the • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function driver feels fatigued, stop as soon as (p. 219) possible in a safe place and rest. • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation (p. 218) Related information • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and 07 • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction messages (p. 220) (p. 217) • Driver Alert System (p. 217) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro- (p. 218) duction (p. 222) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction (p. 219) (p. 227)

219 07 Driver support

Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and messages Depending on the situation, DAC may display certain symbols and text messages in the instrument panel or center console screen. Symbols and messages Instrument panel Symbol Message Description

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message. break

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of blocked the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message required remains in the display.

220 07 Driver support

Center console display Symbol Message Description

- Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

- Driver Alert Available The function is active.

- Driver Alert Standby <65 The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h). km/h

- Driver Alert Unavailable The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Related information • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction (p. 217) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function (p. 219) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation (p. 218) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations (p. 219) • Driver Alert System (p. 217) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 222) 07 • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction (p. 227)

221 07 Driver support

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera- introduction tion (p. 223) The LDW function is designed to help reduce • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- the risk of accidents in situations where the tions (p. 224) vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off the road or into the opposite lane.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)9 Your vehicle may be equipped with Lane Departure Warning (LDW) or Lane Keeping Aid (LKA), depending on your choice of engine. If you are uncertain as to which of The illustration is generic these optional systems is in your vehicle: LDW uses the camera located at the center, • Press the MY CAR button on the center upper edge of the windshield to monitor the console to open the menu system. Scroll road's/lane’s side marker lines. If the vehicle to Settings Driver support system. crosses a side marker line or the road’s cen- The system in your vehicle (Lane ter dividing line, the driver will be alerted by Departure Warning or Lane Keeping an audible signal. Aid) will be displayed there. If your vehicle is equipped with Lane Keeping WARNING Aid (LKA), see Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – intro- This feature is only intended to assist the duction (p. 227) for detailed information. driver and does not function in all driving, weather, traffic or road conditions. As the driver, you have full responsibility 07 for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

Related information • Driver Alert System (p. 217) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols and messages (p. 225)

9 Models with 5- or 6-cylinder engines only.

222 07 Driver support

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – WARNING operation The driver will only be warned once for Operation and function each time the wheels cross a marker line. No alarm will be given if a marker line is between the wheels.

Settings Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be made in the menu system by pressing My Car. Go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Lane Departure LDW displayed in the instrument panel Warning. • The LDW symbol has white side marker There are two alternatives: lines: – the function is active and "sees" one or both of the road's side marker • On at start-up: This selection switches lines. LDW on each time the engine is started. LDW can be switched on or off by pressing Otherwise, the system will be in the mode the button on the center console. A light in • The LDW symbol has gray side marker that it was in when the engine was the button illuminates when the function is lines: – the function is active but cannot switched off. on. This is supplemented by graphic displays "see" one or both of the road's side marker lines. • Increased sensitivity: This selection in the instrument panel, for example: increases the function’s sensitivity. Warn- or ings will be given at an earlier stage and • The LDW symbol has gray side marker fewer limitations apply. When this setting lines: – the function is in standby mode is being used, the system only needs to because the vehicle's speed is below monitor lane marker lines on one side of 40 mph (65 km/h). the vehicle to change status to Lane 07 Depart Warn Available. • The LDW symbol has no side marker lines: – the function is deactivated. Related information • Driver Alert System (p. 217) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols and messages (p. 225)

}} 223 07 Driver support

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - duction (p. 222) limitations • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 224) Limitations The camera used by LDW has the same limitations as the human eye. See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for more information about the camera's limitations.

NOTE No warning signal will be given in the certain situations, such as: • If the turn signal is being used • The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal10 • The accelerator pedal is pressed quickly10 • If the steering wheel is moved quickly10 • In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s body to sway

Related information • Driver Alert System (p. 217) 07 • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols and messages (p. 225) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – operation (p. 223) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 222)

10 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

224 07 Driver support

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols and messages

Symbols and messages A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

Lane departure warning ON/ The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds. Lane departure warning OFF

- Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

- Lane Depart. Warning The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph Unavailable at this speed (65 km/h).

- Lane Depart Warn Unavaila- The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See The camera’s ble limitations (p. 212) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the mes- 07 required sage remains in the display.

}} 225 07 Driver support

|| Related information • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – operation (p. 223) • Driver Alert System (p. 217) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 222) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 224)

226 07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction Related information The LKA function is designed to help reduce • Driver Alert System (p. 217) the risk of accidents in situations where the • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane and (p. 228) there is a risk of driving off the road or into the • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations opposite lane. (p. 230) LDW or LKA • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and Your vehicle may be equipped with Lane messages (p. 231) Departure Warning (LDW) or Lane Keeping • The camera’s limitations (p. 212) Aid (LKA), depending on your choice of engine. If you are uncertain as to which of these optional systems is in your vehicle: The illustration is generic • Press the MY CAR button on the center LKA uses the camera located at the center, console to open the menu system. Scroll upper edge of the windshield to monitor the to Settings Driver support system. road's/lane’s side marker lines. The system in your vehicle (Lane If the vehicle crosses a side marker line or the Departure Warning or Lane Keeping road’s center dividing line, LKA will provide Aid) will be displayed there. active steering assistance to help steer it If your vehicle is equipped with Lane back into the lane. Departure Warning (LDW), see Lane Depar- ture Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 222) for The driver will also be alerted by vibrations in detailed information. the steering wheel. LKA function WARNING The LKA function is primarily intended for use This feature is only intended to assist the 07 on highways or other major roads with clearly driver and does not function in all driving, marked side marker and center lines. weather, traffic or road conditions. As the driver, you have full responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

227 07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation the button illuminates when the function is on. LKA is active at speeds above 40 mph Depending on the number of optional fea- (65 km/h) on highways or other major roads tures installed in the vehicle, there may not be with clearly marked side/lane marker and space for the On/Off button on the center center lines. On narrow roads where the dis- console. If this is the case, LKA can be tance between side/lane marker lines is less switched on or off in the MY CAR menu sys- than approximately 8.5 feet ( 2.6 meters), LKA tem. will be temporarily deactivated. The following LKA-related settings can also be made in MY CAR, under Settings Lane Keeping Aid settings Assistance mode: LKA intervening on the right side (the red line) • Vibration only: Warning by vibrations in When LKA is working actively, this is indi- the steering wheel On or Off. cated by: • Steering assist only: Active steering On • Red side marker line: the line being or Off. crossed. • Full function: Both vibrations and active On/Off steering On or Off.

LKA monitors and follows the marker lines (the red lines in the illustration) • White side marker lines: the function is active and "sees" one or both of the road's side marker lines. 07 • Gray side marker lines: the function is active but cannot "see" one or both of the road's side marker lines.

LKA can be switched on or off by pressing the button on the center console. A light in

228 07 Driver support

Steering assist Vibration warnings Dynamic cornering LKA attempts to keep the vehicle within the lane's side marker lines.

LKA provides vibrations in the steering wheel LKA does not intervene in sharp left curves and steering assistance11. In certain cases, LKA allows the vehicle to LKA provides steering assistance If the vehicle crosses a marker line, LKA pro- cross marker lines without providing a vibra- vides a warning in the form of vibrations in tion warning or steering assistance, for exam- If the vehicle approaches one of the lane's the steering wheel. This occurs even if the ple, during dynamic cornering as shown in side marker lines and the turn signals are steering assist function has been deactivated. the illustration where the driver's view of the not being used, LKA will attempt to steer the road and traffic conditions make this possi- vehicle back into the lane. ble. Related information • Driver Alert System (p. 217) • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction (p. 227) 07 • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations (p. 230) • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and messages (p. 231)

11 The illustration shows 3 vibration warnings when the vehicle crosses the marker line

229 07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations Related information • Driver Alert System (p. 217) The camera used by LKA has the same limi- • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction tations as the human eye. See The camera’s (p. 227) limitations (p. 212) for more information about the camera's limitations. • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation (p. 228) NOTE • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and messages (p. 231) In certain cases, it may be difficult for LKA to assist the driver correctly. In the following conditions, it may be preferable to turn LKA off: • Road construction areas • Winter road conditions • Poor road surfaces • A very sporty driving style • Bad weather conditions with poor visibility

WARNING Hands on the steering wheel: In order for LKA to function correctly, the driver's hands have to be on the steering wheel, which LKA monitors steadily. If this is not 07 the case, the driver will be alerted by a text message to actively steer the vehicle. If this is not done, LKA will go into standby mode and will remain disengaged until the driver begins to actively steer the vehicle again.

230 07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and messages

A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

- Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph at this speed (65 km/h).

- Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See The camera’s for current markings limitations (p. 212) for information on the camera’s limitations.

- Lane Keeping Aid Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

Windscreen sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the See manual area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Lane Keeping Aid Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the required message remains in the display.

Lane Keeping Aid Interrupted The function has gone into standby mode. The lines in the LKA symbol in the instrument panel will indicate when the function is active again. 07 Related information • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations • Driver Alert System (p. 217) (p. 230) • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction (p. 227) • Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation (p. 228)

231 07 Driver support

Park assist – introduction • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function Park assist – function The park assist system is designed to assist (p. 241) you when driving into parking spaces, Signals from the park assist system garages, etc. An audible signal and symbols in the audio system’s display indicate the distance to the object.

The park assist system utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the distance to a vehicle or an object that may be close to the front or rear of your vehicle.

NOTE A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with the vehicle's electrical system will be View in the display (warning for objects front left/ included in the measurement of the availa- right rear) ble space behind the vehicle. Visual indicator The audio system’s display gives an overview WARNING of the vehicle’s position in relation to a detected object. Park Assist is an information system, NOT a safety system. This system is designed The marked sectors in the display indicate to be a supplementary aid when parking that one or more of the sensors has detected the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to an object. The closer the car symbol comes replace the driver's attention and judge- to a sector, the closer the vehicle is to the ment. 07 object. If the infotainment system is switched off, the Related information park assist system will not be able to provide • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) a visual indicator. An audible signal will still • Park assist – function (p. 232) be provided. • Park assist – operation (p. 234) • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240)

232 07 Driver support

Audible signal Rear park assist NOTE The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to • Rear park assist is deactivated auto- an object, and becomes constant when you matically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used. If a non- are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an Volvo trailer hitch is being used, it may object in front of or behind the vehicle. If be necessary to switch off the system there are objects within this distance both manually, see Park assist – operation behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone (p. 234). alternates between front and rear speakers. • The system will not detect high NOTE objects, such as a loading dock, etc. • Objects such as chains, thin shiny The level of the audible signal can be low- poles or low objects may temporarily ered/raised with the infotainment volume not be detected by the system. This control. The level can also be set in the MY The distance monitored behind the vehicle is may result in the pulsing tone unex- CAR menu system. See My Car – introduc- approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal tion (p. 74) for a description of the menu pectedly stopping instead of changing system. comes from the rear speakers. to a constant tone as the vehicle approaches the object. In such cases, The system must be deactivated when towing use caution when backing up or stop a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted If the volume of another source from the the vehicle to help avoid damage. audio system is high, this will be automati- carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park cally lowered. assist system's sensors.

}} 233 07 Driver support

|| Front park assist • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function Park assist – operation (p. 241) Function

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible Park assist and CTA* button signal comes from the audio system's front speakers. The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the It may not be possible to combine auxiliary button in the center console illuminates when headlights and front park assist since these the system is on. lights could trigger the system's sensors. • The front park assist system is active NOTE from the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approxi- Front park assist is deactivated when the mately 6 mph (10 km/h). It is also active parking brake is applied and or when the when the vehicle is backing up. gear selector is in the P position. 07 • Rear park assist is active when the engine is running and reverse gear has been Related information selected. • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) • Park assist – operation (p. 234) • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240)

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Activating/deactivating Park assist – limitations Ice and snow covering the sensors may The system is activated automatically when cause incorrect warning signals. the vehicle is started. Cleaning the sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to – Press the Park assist button on the center NOTE ensure that they work properly. Clean them console to temporarily deactivate the sys- If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, with water and a suitable car washing deter- tem(s). snow, or ice, this could result in false gent. > The indicator light in the button will go warning signals from the park assist system. out when the system has been deactivated. Related information Park assist will be automatically reactivated • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) the next time the engine is started, or if the button is pressed (the indicator light in the • Park assist – function (p. 232) button will illuminate). • Park assist – operation (p. 234) • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240) NOTE • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function Park assist is disengaged automatically (p. 241) when the parking brake is applied.

Related information Location of the front sensors • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) • Park assist – function (p. 232) • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240) • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function 07 (p. 241)

Location of the rear sensors

235 07 Driver support

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction NOTE Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function The Park Assist Pilot provides assistance If a trailer hitch is configured in the vehi- when parallel parking by measuring the park- PAP's function is to measure the parking cle's electrical system, PAP will take the space and to turn the steering wheel during ing space and turning the steering wheel. trailer hitch into consideration when deter- the parallel parking procedure. The driver is mining the necessary size of a parking Introduction space. responsible for following the instructions shown in the instrument panel and for: shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) when WARNING required, regulating the vehicle's speed, • PAP does not function in all situations applying the brakes and stopping the vehicle. and is only intended to assist the PAP can be activated in the following condi- driver when parallel parking. tions: • As the driver, you have full responsibil- • When the stability or ABS systems are ity for parking the vehicle in a safe not working actively manner. • The vehicle is not towing a trailer The vehicle's speed is below Related information • 30 mph (50 km/h) The off/on button shown is located on the center • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function console (p. 236) Park Assist Pilot (PAP) is a semi-automatic • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation system that provides assistance when parallel (p. 237) parking by: • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations (p. 239) • Finding a parking space and determining if it is big enough for the vehicle • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and messages (p. 240) 07 • Helping to steer the vehicle into the parking space • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) Information about the actions required of the • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- driver is provided in the instrument panel in duction (p. 241) the form of symbols, images and text. How PAP works PAP helps park the vehicle by:

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

1. Searching for and measuring a parking Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation NOTE space. While this is taking place, the vehicle's speed must be below 20 mph 1: Searching and measuring PAP normally searches for available park- (30 km/h). See also steps A and B in the ing spaces along the curb on the right illustration in the section "1: Searching (passenger's) side of the vehicle. However, and measuring" in Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* it can also assist in finding and parking in spaces on the driver's side. To do so: – operation (p. 237). 2. Steering the vehicle as it backs into the • Activate the left turn signal. PAP will parking space. See also steps C and D in then search for a parking space on the the illustration in the section "2: Backing left side of the vehicle. into the parking space" in Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation (p. 237). 3. Adjusting the vehicle's position in the parking space by moving forward and rearward. See also steps E and F in the illustration in the section "3: Adjusting the vehicle's position" in Park Assist Pilot PAP searches for a potential parking space (PAP)* – operation (p. 237). and measures it to see if there is sufficient space for your vehicle. To start this proce- Related information dure: • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction 1. Activate PAP by pressing (p. 236) this button on the center • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations console and if necessary (p. 239) slowing down to a speed • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and below 20 mph (30 km/h). messages (p. 240) 2. Keep an eye on the instru- • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) ment panel and be prepared to stop the vehi- 07 • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- cle when you are instructed by PAP to do so. duction (p. 241)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237 07 Driver support

|| 2: Backing into the parking space NOTE 1. Put the gear selector in D, wait until the steering wheel has turned and drive for- • Release the wheel while PAP is steer- ward slowly. ing the vehicle. 2. Stop the vehicle when you are instructed • The steering wheel must be able to by PAP to do so. turn freely. 3. Put the gear selector in R, back up slowly • For PAP to function optimally, wait and stop when you are instructed by PAP until the steering wheel is no longer to do so. turning before beginning the next When the parking procedure is finished (this phase of the parking procedure. will be indicated by a text message and a graphic image in the instrument panel) , PAP 3: Adjusting the vehicle's position switches off automatically. If necessary, the driver may need to make minor adjustments When the vehicle is backing up, PAP will to ensure that the vehicle is parked correctly. steer it into the parking space. Related information 1. Check that the area behind the vehicle is • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction clear and put the gear selector in R. (p. 236) 2. Back up slowly without moving the steer- • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 236) ing wheel. The vehicle's speed must be Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations below approximately 4 mph 7 km/h. • (p. 239) 3. Keep an eye on the instrument panel and Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and be prepared to stop the vehicle when you • messages (p. 240) are instructed by PAP to do so. • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) After the vehicle has backed into the parking • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- 07 space, its position in the space has to be duction (p. 241) adjusted by driving slightly forward and backing up.

238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations • PAP's function is based on the way that WARNING the vehicles are parked behind and in The PAP parking procedure will be cancelled front of your parking space. If they are, • The front end of your vehicle may turn if. for example, parked too close to the curb, out toward oncoming traffic during the there is a risk that your vehicle's tires or parking procedure. The vehicle's speed goes above approxi- • wheel rims could be damaged by the mately 4 mph 7 km/h • Objects located above the parking curb during the parking procedure. sensors' field of vision are not included The driver moves the steering wheel • • PAP is intended to provide parking assis- when PAP measures a parking space. • If the stability or ABS systems are acti- tance on straight streets, not sections of For this reason, PAP may turn into the vated (e.g., if a wheel starts to spin street with curved or irregular curbs. Be parking space too soon. Avoid parking because of a slippery road surface sure that your vehicle is parallel to the spaces of this type. If the system has been switched off, this will curb when PAP measures the parking • The driver is always responsible for be indicated by a text message in the instru- space. determining if PAP has selected a suit- ment panel. • PAP may not be able to provide parking able parking space. assistance on narrow streets due to lack NOTE of space to maneuver the vehicle. In sit- Maintenance uations like this, it may help to drive as • PAP will not function correctly if its close to the side of the road as possible sensors are obstructed by dirt, snow, where the parking space is located. etc. • Use only approved tires with the correct • In certain situations, PAP may not be inflation pressure because this affects able to measure a parking space. This PAP's capacity to provide parking assis- could be due to external sources of tance. See the table in Tire inflation – sound (e.g., a vehicle's horn, tires on pressure table (p. 305). Changing to a wet asphalt, pneumatic brakes, noise different approved tire size may affect from a motorcycle's exhaust, etc.) PAP's parameters. Consult a trained and emitting ultrasound using approxi- qualified Volvo service technician. mately the same frequencies as PAP. 07 • Heavy rain or snow may inhibit PAP's capacity to correctly measure a parking Generic illustration. The PAP sensors are located Information to keep in mind space. in the front and rear bumpers PAP is only intended to provide parallel park- Do not use PAP if snow chains or a tem- • PAP uses the same sensors as the Park ing assistance but may not be able to func- porary spare tire is being used. tion fully in all situations. assist system, see Park assist – limitations • Do not use PAP if there are any objects (p. 235)). protruding from the vehicle.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239 07 Driver support

|| The sensors must be cleaned regularly to Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and Park assist – troubleshooting ensure that they work properly. Clean them messages with water and a suitable car washing deter- Faults in the system gent. Various PAP-related combinations of sym- If the information symbol illuminates and bols, graphics and text messages are dis- Park assist syst Service required is shown Related information played in the instrument panel and some- on the information display, this indicates that • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction times also include suitable actions. the system is not functioning properly and (p. 236) A text message can be erased by pressing has been disengaged. Consult a trained and Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 236) • briefly on the OK button on the turn signal qualified Volvo service technician. • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation lever. (p. 237) CAUTION Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and qualified Volvo service technician If a mes- In certain circumstances, the park assist messages (p. 240) sage indicating that PAP is not functioning system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) properly is displayed. sources that use the same ultrasound fre- • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- Related information quencies as the system. This may include duction (p. 241) such things as the horns of other vehicles, • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, (p. 236) motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 236) not indicate a fault in the system. • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation (p. 237) Related information • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) (p. 239) • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) • Park assist – function (p. 232) Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- 07 • • Park assist – operation (p. 234) duction (p. 241) • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function (p. 241)

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – WARNING Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduction function • PAC is designed to be a supplemen- The Park Assist Camera is designed to pro- tary aid when parking the vehicle. It is Function vide the driver with a view of the area behind not, however, intended to replace the the vehicle when backing up. driver’s attention and judgment. Introduction • The camera has blind spots where it PAC uses the display in the center console to cannot detect objects or people show the area behind the car while you are behind the vehicle. backing up. • Pay particular attention to people or animals that are close to the vehicle. PAC also shows guiding lines in the on- screen image to indicate the direction that the • Objects seen on the screen may be vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which closer than they appear to be. helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the Related information vehicle. • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera- The images of vehicles in this section are tion (p. 242) The driver sees what is behind the vehicle generic and may not depict your specific • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita- and if a person or animal should suddenly model. tions (p. 245) appear from the side. PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the NOTE opening handle. A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated The camera has built-in electronics that help with the vehicle's electrical system will be reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image included in the measurement of the availa- shown on the screen is as natural as possible space behind the vehicle. ble. This may cause some objects on the screen to “lean,” which is normal. 07

}} 241 07 Driver support

|| Ambient lighting conditions Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – trailer hitch, a guiding line showing the hitch's The camera automatically monitors the ambi- operation path toward the trailer will be projected. ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and The guiding lines for the wheels and for the Activation constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the same may cause the brightness and quality of the time. To select a view: image on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitiv- ity to light is increased in dark conditions or in 1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is bad weather, which may affect image quality. displayed. 2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Tow bar If the image on the screen seems too dark, trajectory guide line. brightness can be increased with the thumb wheel on the lighting panel. 3. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU and press EXIT. NOTE Zoom When necessary, the camera view can be In order to function properly, the camera lens should always be kept clean. This is zoomed: particularly important in bad weather. • PressCAM or turn TUNE. Pressing or Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow. PAC is activated when the gear selector is turning again returns you to normal view. moved to R if the system is selected in the If there are additional alternatives, press/turn Related information MY CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM button in the center console. See My until the desired camera view is displayed. Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- • Automatic zoom duction (p. 241) Car – introduction (p. 74) for a description of the menu system. Automatic zoom is a feature that is available • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera- on models equipped with a trailer hitch and tion (p. 242) If PAC is not activated when the gear selector the optional (p. 232)Park assist system. With is moved to R, press the CAM button on the • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita- this alternative selected, the camera will center console. tions (p. 245) zoom in on the trailer hitch automatically if 07 PAC will automatically override the view cur- the vehicle approaches an object/trailer. rently on the screen and will display the cam- See also the "Settings" section below. era's view behind the vehicle. Trailer hitches Deactivation Move the gear selector from R to another The camera can be useful when attaching a gear. The camera remains active for approx. trailer. With the camera zoomed in on the

242 07 Driver support

5 seconds after the gear selector has been Related information Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – moved from R or until the vehicle's forward • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) guiding and marker lines speed exceeds 6 mph/10 km/h • Park assist – function (p. 232) (21 mph/35 km/h in reverse). The screen will Guiding lines then revert to the view that was displayed • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240) before R was selected. • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- NOTE duction (p. 241) If any button on the center console control panel is pressed, the camera image will disappear from the display. Pressing CAM will return the camera image to the display.

Settings By default, PAC is set to activate when the gear selector is moved to R To change PAC settings when a camera view The lines on the screen are projected as if is displayed: they were a path on the ground behind the vehicle and are directly affected by the way in 1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is which the steering wheel is turned. This ena- on the screen. A menu will be displayed. bles the driver to see path the vehicle will 2. Turn TUNE to scroll to the desired set- take, even if he/she turns the steering wheel ting. while backing up. 3. Press OK/MENU to make the setting and exit the menu by pressing EXIT. NOTE Summary When backing up with a trailer, the guiding 07 lines show the path that the vehicle will Pressing CAM will activate the camera • take, not the trailer. even if the gear selector is not in Reverse. • Toggle between normal view and zoom by pressing CAM or by turning TUNE.

}} 243 07 Driver support

|| WARNING The "wheel tracks" (2) show where the wheels Color Distance to object will roll and can extend up to approximately Keep in mind that the image on the screen 10.5 ft (3.2 m) behind the bumper if there are Orange 1–1.6 ft (0.3–0.5 m) only shows the area behind the vehicle. no objects in the way. The driver must always watch for people, Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m) animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides Vehicles equipped with Park Assist of the vehicle when turning while backing up. Related information • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – operation (p. 242) Marker lines • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limitations (p. 245)

Colored markers (one for each sensor) indicate distance If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park Assist system (see Park assist – intro- The PAC system's lines duction (p. 232)), the distance to an object The unobstructed area behind the vehicle will be indicated more exactly and colored markers in the display indicate which of the "Wheel tracks" sensor(s) has detected the object. 07 The dashed line (1) indicates the clear zone of approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the Color Distance to object bumper. These lines also indicate the outermost limits that any object (door mirrors, cor- Pale yellow 2.3–5 ft (0.7–1.5 m ) ners of the body, etc.) extends out from the Yellow 1.6–2.3 ft (0.5–0.7 m) vehicle, even when it turns.

244 07 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – BLIS* – introduction NOTE limitations The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is The door panel indicator light illuminates an information system that indicates the pres- Limitations on the side of the vehicle where the sys- ence of another vehicle moving in the same tem has detected another vehicle. If your Even if a fairly small section of the screen direction as your vehicle on roads with several vehicle is passed on both sides at the image appears to be obstructed, this may lanes. same time, both lights will illuminate. mean that a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hidden and objects there may not The system helps provide information about: be detected until they are very near the vehicle. • Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind area" NOTE • Vehicles that are about to pass your vehicle in the left and/or right lanes Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supple- camera's field of view. mentary BLIS function intended to detect vehicles crossing behind your Keep in mind vehicle while you are backing up. • Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and snow. Remove ice and snow care- Location of the BLIS indicator light12. fully to avoid scratching the lens. Indicator light • Clean the lens regularly with warm water and a suitable car washing detergent. BLIS symbol Related information BLIS and CTA13 are activated when the • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- engine is started; this is confirmed when the duction (p. 241) indicator lights on the front door panels flash 07 • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera- once. tion (p. 242) • Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

12 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model 13 Cross Traffic Alert }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245 07 Driver support

|| WARNING BLIS* – function WARNING • BLIS and CTA are information sys- When does BLIS function • BLIS does not function in sharp tems, NOT warning or safety systems The system functions when your vehicle is curves. and do not function in all situations. moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). • BLIS does not function when your • BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the vehicle is backing up. need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need Related information for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely • BLIS* – introduction (p. 245) change lanes or back up. • BLIS* – operation (p. 247) • As the driver, you have full responsibil- • BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247) ity for changing lanes/backing up in a • BLIS* – limitations (p. 249) safe manner. • BLIS* – messages (p. 250) Related information • BLIS* – function (p. 246) • BLIS* – operation (p. 247) Zone 1. Blind area, Zone 2. Area for passing • BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247) vehicles • BLIS* – limitations (p. 249) BLIS is designed to react to: • BLIS* – messages (p. 250) • Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind area" • Vehicles that are passing your vehicle When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a passing vehicle in zone 2, the indicator light in 07 the door panel will glow steadily. If the driver then uses the turn signal on the side on which the warning is given, the indicator light will flash and become brighter.

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

BLIS* – operation When BLIS is deactivated/reactivated, the BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) indicator lights will go out/illuminate (the indi- Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementary cators will also flash once when the function 15 Activating/deactivating BLIS BLIS function intended to detect vehicles is reactivated) and a message will appear in crossing behind your vehicle while you are the instrument panel. backing up. To erase the message: • Press the OK button on the left steering wheel lever or • Wait for approx. 5 seconds for the message to disappear Related information • BLIS* – introduction (p. 245) Button for activating/deactivating BLIS • BLIS* – function (p. 246) • BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247) BLIS and CTA14 are activated when the engine is started; this is confirmed when the • BLIS* – limitations (p. 249) Park assist/CTA button indicator lights on the front door panels flash • BLIS* – messages (p. 250) On vehicles equipped with the optional Park once. assist system (p. 232), Cross Traffic Alert BLIS can be deactivated/reactivated by (CTA) can be deactivated/reactivated by pressing the button on the center console. pressing the Park assist button on the center console. The BLIS indicator lights on the front The number or combinations of options on doors will flash when CTA is reactivated by the vehicle may not leave a space available pressing the button. on the center console for the BLIS button. If 07 this is the case, BLIS can be deactivated/ reactivated in the MY CAR menu system, see My Car – introduction (p. 74) • Select Off or On in Settings Car settings BLIS.

14 Cross Traffic Alert }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 07 Driver support

|| WARNING example, when backing out of a parking space. • BLIS and CTA are information systems, NOT warning or safety systems It is primarily designed to detect another vehi- and do not function in all situations. cle but in certain cases may also detect pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicy- BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the • cles. need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need CTA is only activated when the vehicle is for you to turn your head and should- backing up and is activated automatically ers to make sure that you can safely when the gear selector is put in reverse. change lanes or back up. • An audible signal indicates that CTA has • As the driver, you have full responsibil- detected something that is approaching ity for changing lanes/backing up in a from the side. The signal will come from The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space safe manner. either the left or right audio system CTA's blind area speakers, depending on which the side of When does CTA function your vehicle the approaching vehicle/ CTA's "field of vision" object has been detected. • CTA also provides a warning by illuminating the BLIS indicator lights. • An icon will also illuminate in the Park assist graphic on the center console display. Limitations CTA has limitations in certain situations, for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" 07 through other parked vehicles or obstructions.

How CTA works The following are several examples where In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver CTA's "field of vision" may initially be limited one side of crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for and approaching vehicles cannot be detected until they are too close:

15 Blind Spot Information System

248 07 Driver support

However, as you back your vehicle out of a BLIS* – limitations Related information parking space, CTA's "field of vision" • BLIS* – introduction (p. 245) expands. Maintenance • BLIS* – function (p. 246) Examples of other limitations include: • BLIS* – operation (p. 247) • Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors • BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247) may reduce the system's function or • BLIS* – messages (p. 250) make it impossible to detect other vehicles or objects. • Do not attach tape, decals, etc., on the surface of the sensors (see the illustration in the following "Maintenance" section). • BLIS and CTA are deactivated if a trailer's wiring is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. Location of the BLIS/CTA sensors16 Related information • BLIS* – introduction (p. 245) The BLIS/CTA17 sensors are located on the • BLIS* – function (p. 246) inside of the rear fenders/bumper. • BLIS* – operation (p. 247) The surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept clean for the system to function opti- BLIS* – limitations (p. 249) • mally. • BLIS* – messages (p. 250) CAUTION Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or repainting the rear bumper should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- 07 ice technician.

16 Generic illustration 17 Cross Traffic Alert

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249 07 Driver support

BLIS* – messages Related information • BLIS* – introduction (p. 245) 18 If BLIS/CTA are not functioning normally, a • BLIS* – function (p. 246) symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and a text message will be displayed. Follow • BLIS* – operation (p. 247) any instructions that may be provided. • BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247) These messages include: • BLIS* – limitations (p. 249)

Message System status

CTA OFF CTA has been switched off manually. BLIS remains active.

BLIS and BLIS and CTA are tempo- CTA OFF rarily deactivated because Trailer a trailer's wiring has been attached connected to the vehicle's electrical system.

BLIS and BLIS and CTA are not CTA Serv- functioning normally. ice required • If this message recurs, the systems should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo 07 service technician.

Messages can be erased by pressing the OK button on the left steering wheel lever.

18 Cross Traffic Alert

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING 08 Starting and driving

Starting the engine WARNING 3. Press and release the START/STOP The engine can be started/switched off using ENGINE button. The autostart function Never use more than one floor mat at the remote key and the START/STOP • will operate the starter motor until the a time on the driver's floor. Before ENGINE button. engine starts or until its overheating func- driving, remove the original mat from tion stops it. the driver's seat floor before using any other type of floor mat. Any mat used The starter motor operates for a maxi- in this position should be securely and mum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not properly anchored in the attaching started, repeat the procedure. pins. An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator and/or CAUTION brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impe- If the engine does not start after the third ded. try, wait for approximately 3 minutes before trying to start it again to give the • Volvo's floor mats are specially manu- battery time to recover its starting factured for your car. They must be capacity. firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become Ignition slot with remote key inserted (see Igni- trapped under the pedals on the driv- NOTE tion modes (p. 77) for more information on igni- er's side. tion modes) Keyless drive* To start a vehicle equipped with the key- WARNING 1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot less drive feature, one of the remote keys as far as possible, with the metallic key must be in the passenger compartment. Before starting the engine: blade pointing outward (not inserted into Follow the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to • Fasten the seat belt. the slot)1. start the vehicle. • Check that the seat, steering wheel 2. Depress the brake pedal2. and mirrors are adjusted properly. • Make sure the brake pedal can be depressed completely. Adjust the seat if necessary.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment. 2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

WARNING NOTE CAUTION • Always remove the remote key from • After a cold start, idle speed may be • When starting in cold weather, the the ignition slot when leaving the vehi- noticeably higher than normal for a automatic transmission may shift up at cle and ensure that the ignition in short period. This is done to help bring slightly higher engine speeds than nor- mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 77) for components in the emission control mal until the automatic transmission information about the ignition modes). system to their normal operating tem- fluid reaches normal operating tem- • On vehicles with the optional keyless perature as quickly as possible, which perature. drive, never remove the remote key enables them to control emissions and • Do not race a cold engine immediately from the vehicle while it is being driven help reduce the vehicle's impact on after starting. Oil flow may not reach 3 or towed. the environment . some lubrication points fast enough to • Always place the gear selector in Park prevent engine damage. and apply the parking brake before • The engine should be idling when you leaving the vehicle. Never leave the move the gear selector. Never acceler- vehicle unattended with the engine ate until after you feel the transmission running. engage. Accelerating immediately after • Always open garage doors fully before selecting a gear will cause harsh starting the engine inside a garage to engagement and premature transmis- ensure adequate ventilation. The sion wear. exhaust gases contain carbon monox- • Selecting P or N when idling at a ide, which is invisible and odorless but standstill for prolonged periods of time very poisonous. will help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid.

Related information • Switching off the engine (p. 254)

3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

253 08 Starting and driving

Switching off the engine Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – WARNING Switch off the engine by pressing the START/ introduction Keep the following in mind before using STOP ENGINE button. ERS is a feature that makes it possible to ERS: remotely start the engine using the remote If the gear selector is not in the P position or key to cool or heat the passenger compart- • The vehicle should be in view. if the vehicle is moving, press the START/ ment before driving. • The vehicle should be unoccupied. STOP ENGINE button twice or press and The vehicle must not be parked hold it in until the engine switches off. The climate/ and infotainment systems will • indoors or in an enclosed area. start using the same settings as when the Exhaust fumes are harmful to the Related information engine was switched off. • Ignition modes (p. 77) health. When the engine is started using ERS, it will run for a maximum of 15 minutes before Related information automatically switching off again. After 2 ERS • Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the starts, the engine must be started in the nor- engine (p. 255) mal way before ERS can be used again. • Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching off the engine (p. 255) NOTE • Always adhere to applicable State, Province and/or Local laws regarding engine idling when using ERS. • The service life of the remote key's battery is affected by ERS use. If this feature is used frequently, the battery should be replaced once a year, see Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 153).

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting 1. The turn signals will flash several times. Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – the engine 2. The engine will start. switching off the engine 3. The turn signals will illuminate for Any of the following will switch off the engine 3 seconds to indicate that the engine has if it has been started with ERS: started. After the engine has started, the vehicle • Pressing the lock button (1) or the unlock remains locked but the alarm is disarmed. button (2) on the remote key • Unlocking the vehicle Active functions When the engine is started with ERS, the fol- • Opening a door lowing functions are activated: • Depressing the accelerator or brake pedal • The climate control system • Moving the gear selector from the P position • The infotainment system. • If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons Deactivated functions (10 liters) of fuel in the tank Remote key buttons used for remote engine start When the engine is started with ERS, the fol- More than 15 minutes have elapsed. Lock lowing functions are deactivated: • If the engine has been started with ERS and Headlights Approach lighting • switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for • Parking lights 3 seconds. Starting the engine • License plate lights Message in the instrument panel The maximum range for ERS is approximately • Windshield wipers display 100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is unobstructed. The vehicle must also be Related information If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be displayed in the instrument panel. locked. • Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching off the engine (p. 255) To start the engine: Related information • Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction 1. Press the lock button (1 ) briefly. • (p. 254) (p. 254) 2. Immediately press the approach lighting Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the button (2) for approximately 2 seconds. • engine (p. 255) If the requirements for ERS have been met, 08 the following will occur:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255 08 Starting and driving

Jump starting 3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) WARNING Follow these instructions to jump start your terminal on your vehicle's battery (2), Do not connect the jumper cable to vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another marked with a "+" sign, located under a • any part of the fuel system or to any vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. folding cover. moving parts. Avoid touching hot 4. Connect the black jumper cable to the manifolds. auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, and to the ground point in your vehicle's which is flammable and explosive. engine compartment (right engine mount at the top, on the outer screw) (4). • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, 5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If then start the engine in the vehicle with contact occurs, flush the affected area dead battery. immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affec- 6. After the engine has started, first remove ted. the negative (–) terminal jumper cable Never expose the battery to open G021347 (black). Then remove the positive (+) ter- • minal jumper cable (red). flame or electric spark. Connecting the jumper cables • Do not smoke near the battery. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in WARNING • Failure to follow the instructions for another vehicle, check that the vehicles are jump starting can lead to injury. not touching to prevent premature comple- PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! tion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump star- Battery posts, terminals, and related Related information ting instructions provided for the other vehi- accessories contain lead and lead com- Starting the engine (p. 252) cle. pounds, chemicals known to the state of • California to cause cancer and reproduc- To jump start your vehicle: tive harm. Wash hands after handling. 1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to mode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 77)). CAUTION 2. First connect the red jumper cable to the Connect the jumper cables carefully to auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1). avoid short circuits with other components 08 in the engine compartment.

256 08 Starting and driving

Transmission – general information CAUTION Transmission – positions The transmission automatically shifts between The transmission’s temperature is moni- Park: position P the various forward gears, based on the level tored to help prevent damage to the trans- Select the P position when starting or park- of acceleration and speed. mission or other drivetrain components. If there is a risk of overheating, the warning ing. symbol on the instrument panel will illuminate and a text message will be displayed. Follow the instructions provided there.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)4 HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a hill by retaining pressure on the brake pedal for several seconds after the pedal has been released in order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. G021351 The brakes will be released after several sec- Shiftgate positions onds or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal. Depress the button on the front of the gear selector knob to move the gear selector Related information between the R, N, D, and P positions. • Transmission – positions (p. 257) The gear selector can be moved freely • Transmission – Geartronic (p. 259) between the Geartronic (manual shifting) and • Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 261) Drive (D) positions while driving. • All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 269) • Fuel tank volume – specification and volume (p. 384)

4 Certain models only }} 257 08 Starting and driving

|| Shiftlock CAUTION Related information When P has been selected, the transmission • Transmission – general information is mechanically blocked in this position. The The vehicle must be stationary when posi- (p. 257) tion P is selected. brake pedal must be depressed and the igni- • Transmission – Geartronic (p. 259) tion must be in at least mode II (see Ignition • Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 261) modes (p. 77)) before the gear lever can be Gear indicator moved from the P position. The gear currently being • Fuel tank volume – specification and vol- used is displayed on the right ume (p. 384) WARNING side of the instrument panel. Always apply the parking brake when the The "S" symbol turns orange vehicle is parked, particularly when park- if Sport mode is being used. ing on a hill. The transmission's P mode may not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if it is parked on an incline. Reverse: position R The vehicle must be stationary when position R is selected. Press the control to apply the parking brake, see Parking brake – general information Neutral: position N (p. 274). No gear is engaged and the engine can be started with the gear selector in this position. Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is stationary with the gear selector in position N. In order to move the gear selector from the N position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least mode II. Drive: position D D is the normal driving position. The car automatically shifts between the various forward gears, based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be at a standstill when 08 shifting from position R to position D.

258 08 Starting and driving

Transmission – Geartronic This option indicates when to shift up or In order to move the gear selector from N to Geartronic allows you to manually shift among down to help conserve fuel. A white arrow will another gear position, the brake pedal must your vehicle's forward gears. The manual appear above or below the number of the be depressed and the ignition must be in at position (+S–) can be selected at any time. current gear to prompt the driver to shift up least position II, see Ignition modes (p. 77). or down. Geartronic: manual shifting (+S–) While driving To shift gears manually, move the If you select the manual shifting position gear selector to the side from D • while driving, the gear that was being +S– +S– toward . The symbol in the used in the Drive position will also initially instrument panel will change from be selected in the manual shifting posi- white to orange and the number of the gear tion. currently being used (1, 2, 3, etc.) will be dis- Move the gear selector forward (toward +) played (see the following illustration)5. • to shift to a higher gear or rearward • To return to automatic shifting mode from (toward –) to shift to a lower gear. +S–, move the gear selector to the side • If you hold the gear selector toward "–", toward D. the transmission will downshift one gear Gear shift indicator* at a time and will utilize the braking power of the engine. If the current speed is too high for using a lower gear, the downshift will not occur until the speed has decreased enough to allow the lower gear to be used. • If you slow to a very low speed, the transmission will automatically shift down. Shiftlock: Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked. 6 Gear shift indicator in a digital instrument panel* 08

5 If Sport mode is being used, the symbol will change to "S". 6 Analog instrument panel: the gear shift indicator is displayed in the center of the speedometer. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259 08 Starting and driving

|| Geartronic: steering wheel paddles* • Pull the paddle toward the steering wheel Geartronic: Sport mode (S)7 In addition to the manual gearshift function and release it. This transmission mode provides sportier using the gear selector, this option makes it Deactivating the paddles: shifting characteristics and enables a more possible to manually shift gears from the active driving style by making it possible to • Hold the "+" paddle for approximately steering wheel. drive at higher rpm in each gear before shift- 3 seconds. ing up. The engine also responds faster when the accelerator pedal is pressed. NOTE To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move If the gear selector was in D when paddle the gear selector to the left. The transmission shifting was activated (D changed to the number of the gear being used), the trans- will not switch to manual shifting mode until mission will automatically revert to D after the gear selector is moved forward or rear- approximately 5 seconds if the paddles ward toward + or –. are not used to shift gears. Sport mode can be selected any time. This will not occur: NOTE • during active driving (e.g., on a winding road, while accelerating, etc) • On vehicles equipped with Sport mode, the transmission symbol in the Steering-wheel mounted gear shift paddles • if the gear selector was in S when the paddles were activated main instrument panel will change "–": Shift down to a lower gear. from D to S when the gear selector is If the transmission reverts to D, the pad- moved to the manual shifting mode. If "+": Shift up to a higher gear. dles will have to be reactivated (pull either the gear selector is moved toward "+" paddle toward the steering wheel and In order to shift gears with the paddles, they release it) before they can be used to shift or "-", the number of the gear currently have to first be activated. The gear selector gears again. being used will be displayed, see Infor- can be in either the D or S position. mation displays – introduction (p. 66). The paddles can also be manually deacti- Activating the paddles: vated by pulling both paddles toward the • Please be aware that using Sport steering wheel and holding them until the mode may result in a slight decrease in • Pull either paddle toward the steering gear number shown in the instrument fuel economy. Driving in D can help wheel and release it; the D in the instru- panel changes to D. improve fuel economy. ment panel will change to the number of the gear currently being used. 08 Shifting gears:

7 Certain models only

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

Geartronic: starting on slippery Transmission – shiftlock override Related information surfaces If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example • Transmission – general information Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual because of a dead battery, the gear selector (p. 257) shifting mode can help provide better traction must be moved from the P position before the • Transmission – positions (p. 257) 8 when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do vehicle can be moved . • Transmission – Geartronic (p. 259) so: Shiftlock override • Fuel tank volume – specification and vol- 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the ume (p. 384) gear selector to the side from D toward +S–. 2. Press the gear selector forward and release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the selector forward again and release it to select 3rd gear. The optional steering wheel paddles can also be used; see the previous section "Geartronic: steering wheel paddles." 3. Release the brake pedal and press gently on the accelerator pedal. Related information Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the storage compartment behind the cen- Transmission – general information • ter console to expose the small opening (p. 257) for overriding the shiftlock system. • Transmission – positions (p. 257) Insert the key blade into the opening. Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 261) • Press the key blade down as far as possi- • Fuel tank volume – specification and vol- ble and keep it held down. ume (p. 384) Move the gear selector from the P position. For information on the key blade, see Detachable key blade – general information (p. 151). 08

8 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 256).

261 08 Starting and driving

Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) Start/Stop – introduction Start/Stop – function Start/Stop is a function that temporarily When starting on steep hills, HSA (see Trans- switches off the engine when the vehicle is Function and use mission – general information (p. 257)) retains not moving, for instance in heavy traffic or at a pressure on the brake pedal for several sec- traffic light to help reduce fuel consumption. onds after the pedal has been released in order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. The Start/Stop is available with certain engines/ Start/Stop symbol in the instrument panel brakes will be released after several seconds transmissions. or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal. The pedal will return to its normal posi- Related information tion somewhat slower than normal. • Start/Stop – function (p. 262) • Start/Stop – settings (p. 265) Related information Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262) • • (p. 263) • Start/Stop – function (p. 262) Start/Stop button on the center console • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions • Start/Stop – settings (p. 265) (p. 264) Start/Stop is activated automatically each time the engine is started9. The symbol in the • Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) • instrument panel will be displayed for several (p. 263) (p. 262) seconds when the engine starts and the indi- • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions • Start/Stop – symbols and messages cator light in the On/Off button will remain (p. 264) (p. 266) illuminated while the function is activated. • Start/Stop – symbols and messages (p. 266) All of the vehicle's systems will function while the engine is auto-stopped, although the function of certain systems may reduced at this time. For example, blower speed and high infotainment system volume may be reduced to help conserve the battery's capacity.

9 Not when the engine is started using the optional Engine Remote Start feature, Starting the engine (p. 252)

262 08 Starting and driving

Auto-stopping the engine Related information Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions Normally, when Start/Stop is activated and • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262) the brakes are applied until the vehicle comes • Start/Stop – settings (p. 265) In certain situations or conditions, the engine to a standstill, the engine will auto-stop auto- may not auto-stop when the vehicle comes Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions matically if the driver keeps the brake pedal • to a standstill, such as if: (p. 263) depressed. • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions Condition/situation To remind the driver that the engine (p. 264) has been auto-stopped, the Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) The vehicle's speed has not reached a Start/Stop symbol will illuminate in • (p. 262) speed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h) after the the instrument panel and remain on most recent auto-start or after the driver until the engine restarts. • Start/Stop – symbols and messages (p. 266) has started the engine. If the ECO function* (ECO* (p. 267)) is activated, the The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt. engine may auto-stop before The main battery's charge is below the the vehicle comes to a com- minimum level. plete standstill. The engine has not reached its normal operating temperature. Auto-starting the engine The engine restarts as soon as the driver The ambient temperature is below approx. releases the brake pedal. 25°F (-4°C) or above approx. 85°F (30°C). Deactivating Start/Stop The windshield's heating function* is acti- In certain situations (e.g., vated. driving in heavy, stop-and-go traffic), it may be preferable The climate system cannot keep the to deactivate Start/Stop. desired settings in the passenger compart- This is done by pressing the ment; the blower will operate at high button in the center console. speed. The indicator light in the button will go out. The vehicle is backing up. Start/Stop will remain deactivated until the 08 button is pressed again or until the engine is The main battery's temperature is below switched off and restarted by the driver. freezing or too high.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263 08 Starting and driving

|| Condition/situation • Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 262) The driver is turning the steering wheel • Start/Stop – symbols and messages In certain situations or conditions, the engine hard. (p. 266) may auto-start even though the driver is still pressing the brake pedal, such as if: The road's incline is very steep.

A trailer's electrical system is connected to Condition/situation the vehicle. Condensation forms on the windows. The hood has been openedA. The climate system cannot keep the The transmission has not reached its nor- desired settings in the passenger compart- mal operating temperature. ment.

Atmospheric pressure is below a level Electrical current consumption is tempo- equivalent to an altitude of approx. 4,900– rarily high or the main battery's charge is 8,200 ft (1500–2500 m) above sea level. below the minimum level. The actual pressure is also affected by current weather conditions. The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly.

The Adaptive Cruise Control's* Queue The hood has been openedA. Assist feature is activated. The vehicle begins to move or increases The gear selector is in the SB or "+/–" posi- speed slightly (if the engine auto-stopped tion. before the vehicle was at a standstill (see ECO* (p. 267))). A Certain engines only B Sport mode (where applicable) The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt while the gear selector is in the D or N positions. Related information • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262) The steering wheel is turnedA. • Start/Stop – function (p. 262) 08 • Start/Stop – settings (p. 265) • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 264)

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

Condition/situation Related information Start/Stop – settings • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262) Settings for the Start/Stop function can be B • Start/Stop – function (p. 262) The gear selector is moved from D to S , R made in the MY CAR menu system. or "+/–". • Start/Stop – settings (p. 265) Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions The driver's door is opened with the gear • (p. 263) selector in D – an audible signal and a text message will inform the driver that • Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) Start/Stop is active. (p. 262) • Start/Stop – symbols and messages A Certain engines only B Sport mode (where applicable) (p. 266)

WARNING Do not open the hood if the engine has auto-stopped. The engine could suddenly auto-start. Before opening the hood: Related information • Switch off the ignition using the • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262) START/STOP ENGINE button. • Start/Stop – function (p. 262) • Be aware that if the engine has been • Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions running, components in the engine (p. 263) compartment will be very hot. • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 264) If the engine does not auto-start, this • Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) could be due to: (p. 262) • The driver's seat belt is not fastened • Start/Stop – symbols and messages • The gear selector is in P and the driver's (p. 266) door is opened In these cases, the driver will have to restart 08 the engine by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

265 08 Starting and driving

Start/Stop – symbols and messages Start/Stop function may also display messages in certain situations. Follow the instruc- Text messages tions provided in the message. The following Combined with the information sym- table gives several examples. bol in the instrument panel, the

Symbol Message Information/action

Auto Start/Stop Service Start/Stop is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo required service technician.

Autostart Engine running + an This is triggered if the driver's door is opened while the engine is auto-stopped. audible signal

- Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Start the engine normally by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

- Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

- Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

If the message does not disappear after the • Start/Stop – settings (p. 265) suggested action has been taken, contact a • Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo (p. 263) service technician. • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 264) 08 Related information • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262) • Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) • Start/Stop – function (p. 262) (p. 262)

266 08 Starting and driving

ECO* NOTE The ECO symbol will be displayed in the Eco is a function10 developed by Volvo to give instrument panel and the indicator light in the When Eco is activated, several climate ECO button will be on when Eco is activated. the driver the opportunity to actively drive system parameters are changed and the more economically and to help reduce fuel function of certain current-consuming sys- Eco on or off consumption. tems will be reduced. When ECO is deactivated, Introduction Some of these functions can be restarted the ECO symbol will not be manually but full functionality will not be displayed in the instrument When Eco is activated, the restored until Eco is deactivated. following functions are modi- panel and the indicator light fied: in the ECO button will be off. Function The function will remain deactivated until the button is pressed again.

• The automatic transmission's shifting Eco Coast points Eco Coast is an integral part of the Eco func- • The engine management system and tion and essentially deactivates engine brak- accelerator pedal response ing, allowing the vehicle to roll freely. • Stop/stop function (Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262)): the engine can auto-stop NOTE before the vehicle has come to a full stop To function optimally, Eco Coast should • Eco Coast functionality is activated: primarily be used when the vehicle can engine braking is disabled coast as far as possible. • Climate system settings: certain functions ECO On/Off button in the center console (e.g., air conditioning) will be temporarily When the driver releases the accelerator ECO symbol in the instrument panel reduced or deactivated pedal, the transmission is automatically dis- When the engine is switched off, ECO is engaged from the engine and engine rpm will deactivated and must be reactivated each be reduced to the idle level time the engine is started (with the exception (approx. 700-800 rpm), which helps reduce of certain engines). fuel consumption. 08

10 Option on models equipped with certain 4-cylinder engines }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267 08 Starting and driving

|| This feature is primarily intended to be used • The vehicle's speed is between approxi- • The engine and/or transmission have not in driving situations where a decrease in mately 40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). Always reached their normal operating tempera- speed is expected, such as when approach- observe posted speed limits ture ing an intersection or a traffic light. • The gradient of a down-slope is less than • The gear selector is moved from D to the Eco Coast enables proactive driving with as approximately 6% manual "S+/–" position little braking as possible. Deactivating Eco Coast • The vehicle's speed is not within the 40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). interval Combinations of On and Off In certain situations, it may be advisable to switch off the Eco Coast function, such as: Depending on the driving situation, Eco can Additional information and settings be used in different ways to help reduce fuel • When driving down steep hills, in order to consumption: utilize engine braking • With Eco activated: this enables Eco • Prior to passing another vehicle, in order Coast, which allows the vehicle to roll to do so as safely as possible freely for as far as possible when the Deactivating Eco Coast (and reactivating driver releases the accelerator pedal (e.g., engine braking) can be done in the following when approaching a traffic light or inter- ways: section). • Press the ECO button on the center con- or sole • With Eco deactivated: engine braking • Move the gear selector to the manual "S can be used when the vehicle will only +/–" position roll for a short distance (in heavy traffic, • Change gears using the steering wheel etc.) or when driving down hills. Other ECO-related settings can be made in paddles* the vehicle's MY CAR menu. See My Car – To help keep fuel consumption as low as • Press the brake or accelerator pedal possible, Eco Coast should not be used in introduction (p. 74) for more information. traffic situations where the brakes have to be Eco Coast limitations Related information used frequently. This function will not be available if: • Climate – general information (p. 122) Activating Eco Coast • Cruise control is activated • Transmission – general information Eco Coast is activated when the accelerator • The gradient of a down-slope is more (p. 257) pedal is released completely if: than approximately 6% 08 • Eco is activated • The steering wheel paddles* are used to • The gear selector is in D manually change gears

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

All Wheel Drive (AWD) NOTE Hill Descent Control (HDC)11 – Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent introduction The message AWD disabled Service All Wheel Drive, which means that power is required will be appear in the information HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and distributed automatically between the front display if an electrical fault should occur in makes it possible to increase or decrease the and rear wheels. the AWD system. A warning light will also vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using illuminate in the instrument panel. If this only the accelerator pedal, without applying occurs, have the system checked by a the brakes. The brake system functions auto- trained and qualified Volvo service techni- matically to maintain a low and steady speed. cian. Introduction Related information Normally, when the accelerator pedal is • Transmission – general information released while driving down hills, the vehicle's (p. 257) speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm (the normal engine braking effect). However, if the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases despite the engine braking effect. In this situation, the brakes must be applied to reduce the vehicle's speed. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to the front HDC is particularly useful when driving down wheels. However, if there is any tendency for steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the the front wheels to spin, an electronically road may have slippery patches. controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have the best traction. WARNING HDC does not function in all situations, and is a supplementary braking aid. The driver has full responsibility for driving in a safe manner.

11 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only. }} 269 08 Starting and driving

|| Related information Hill Descent Control (HDC)13 – NOTE • Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation operation (p. 270) HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector is the D position. • Brakes – general (p. 271) Function Using HDC HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph (7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator pedal can be used to select any speed that is possible in first or reverse gears. When the accelerator pedal is released, speed is quickly reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or 4 mph (7 km/h), depending on the gear selected, regardless of the hill's gradient. It is not necessary to apply the brakes.

• HDC can be switched on and off with the • The brake lights illuminate automatically button in the center console. An indicator when HDC is controlling the vehicle's light in the button illuminates when HDC speed. is activated. • The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at any time by applying the brakes. • The indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates and a message is dis- HDC is deactivated when: played when the system is controlling the • The button on the center console is vehicle's speed. pressed • HDC only functions when first or reverse • A gear higher than first gear is selected gears are selected (1 will be shown in the D is selected on vehicles with an auto- instrument panel display when first gear • matic transmission is selected). HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is done while driving down a steep hill, the sys- 08 tem's braking effect will decrease gradually.

13 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.

270 08 Starting and driving

NOTE Brakes – general Brake pad inspection The brake system is a hydraulic system con- On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi- Engine response to pressure on the accel- tion of the brake pads can be checked by erator pedal may be slightly slower than sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a normal when HDC is activated. problem should occur in one of these circuits, raising the vehicle (see Changing a wheel – it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the removing wheel (p. 296) for information other brake circuit. about using the jack and removing a wheel) Related information and performing a visual inspection of the • Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction If the brake pedal must be depressed farther brake pads. (p. 269) than normal and requires greater foot pres- • Brakes – general (p. 271) sure, the stopping distance will be longer. WARNING A warning light in the instrument panel will • If the vehicle has been driven immedi- light up to warn the driver that a fault has ately prior to a brake pad inspection, occurred. the wheel hub, brake components, If this light comes on while driving or braking, etc., will be very hot. Allow time for stop immediately and check the brake fluid these components to cool before car- level in the reservoir. rying out the inspection. • Apply the parking brake and put the NOTE gear selector in the Park (P) position. Press the brake pedal hard and maintain • Block the wheels standing on the pressure on the pedal – do not pump the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or brakes. large stones.

WARNING If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. 08

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271 08 Starting and driving

|| WARNING Water on brake discs and brake pads braking gently for a short period while the affects braking vehicle is moving. Use the jack intended for the vehicle • Driving in rain and slush or passing through when changing a tire. For any other Related information an automatic car wash can cause water to job, use stands to support the vehicle. Parking brake – general information collect on the brake discs and pads. This will • (p. 274) • The jack should be kept well-greased cause a delay in braking effect when the and clean, and should not be dam- pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay • Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) aged. when the brakes are needed, depress the (p. 274) • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, pedal occasionally when driving through rain, • Brakes – general (p. 271) non-slippery surface. slush, etc. This will remove the water from the • Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 273) • No objects should be placed between brakes. Check that brake application feels the base of jack and the ground, or normal. This should also be done after wash- between the jack and the attachment ing or starting in very damp or cold weather. bar on the vehicle. Severe strain on the brake system The jack must correctly engage the • The brakes will be subject to severe strain jack attachment. when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or • Never allow any part of your body to when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually be extended under a vehicle suppor- slower, which means that the cooling of the ted by a jack. brakes is less efficient than when driving on level roads. To reduce the strain on the Power brakes function only when the brakes, shift into a lower gear and let the engine is running engine help with the braking. Do not forget The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure that if you are towing a trailer, the brakes will which is only created when the engine is run- be subjected to a greater than normal load. ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with Cleaning the brake discs the engine switched off. Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs If the power brakes are not working, consid- may result in delayed brake function. This erably higher pressure will be required on the delay is minimized by cleaning the brake lin- brake pedal to compensate for the lack of ings. 08 power assistance. This can happen for exam- Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine weather, prior to long-term parking, and after is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The the vehicle has been washed. Do this by brake pedal feels harder than usual.

272 08 Starting and driving

Brakes – symbols Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Brake lights The ABS system helps to improve vehicle The brake lights come on automatically when Symbols in the instrument panel control (stopping and steering) during severe the brakes are applied. Symbol Specification braking conditions by limiting brake lockup. Adaptive brake lights Steady glow – Check the brake When the system "senses" impending lockup, The adaptive brake lights activate in the event fluid level. If the level is low, fill braking pressure is automatically modulated of sudden braking or if the ABS system is with brake fluid and check for in order to help prevent lockup that could activated. This function causes an additional the cause of the brake fluid lead to a skid. taillight on each side of the vehicle to illumi- loss. The system performs a brief self-diagnostic nate to help alert vehicles traveling behind. test when the engine has been started and Automatic function check: The adaptive brake lights activate if: driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- steady glow for two seconds The ABS system activates for more than matic test may be performed when the vehi- • when the engine is started. approximately a half second cle first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate • In the event of sudden braking while the WARNING several times and a sound may be audible vehicle is moving at speeds above from the ABS control module, which is nor- approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). If and come on at the mal. When the vehicle has come to a stop, the same time and the brake level is below the brake lights and additional taillights remain on MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake sys- Related information for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or tem-related message is shown in the infor- • Parking brake – general information until braking force on the vehicle is reduced. mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the (p. 274) vehicle towed to a trained and qualified • Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) Related information Volvo service technician and have the • Brakes – general (p. 271) brake system inspected. (p. 274) • Brakes – general (p. 271) • Parking brake – general information (p. 274) Related information • Brakes – general (p. 271) • Parking brake – general information (p. 274) 08

273 08 Starting and driving

Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) Related information Parking brake – general information EBA is designed to provide full brake effect • Parking brake – general information The electric parking brake helps to keep the immediately in the event of sudden, hard (p. 274) vehicle stationary when it is parked. braking. • Brakes – general (p. 271) Electric parking brake Emergency Brake Assistance • Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 273) The EBA system is activated by the speed with which the brake pedal is depressed. When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system completely. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released.

NOTE Parking brake control • When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure NOTE in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. You • A faint sound from the parking brake's must maintain full pressure on the electric motor can be heard when the brake pedal in order to utilize the sys- parking brake is being applied. This tem completely. There will be no brak- sound can also be heard during the ing effect if the pedal is released. EBA automatic function check of the park- is automatically deactivated when the ing brake. brake pedal is released. • The brake pedal will move slightly • When the vehicle has been parked for when the electric parking brake is some time, the brake pedal may sink applied or released. more than usual when the engine is 08 started. This is normal and the pedal Low battery voltage will return to its usual position when it If the battery voltage is too low, the park- is released. ing brake cannot be applied or released.

274 08 Starting and driving

Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery Parking brake – applying NOTE voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 256). Applying the electric parking brake • In an emergency the parking brake can Parking on a hill be applied when the vehicle is moving • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the by holding in the control. Braking will front wheels so that they point away from be interrupted when the accelerator the curb. pedal is depressed or the control is • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the released. front wheels so that they point toward the • An audible signal will sound during this curb. procedure if the vehicle is moving at The parking brake should also be applied. speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Related information Related information • Parking brake – applying (p. 275) • Parking brake – general information • Parking brake – releasing (p. 276) (p. 274) • Parking brake – symbols and messages Parking brake control • Parking brake – releasing (p. 276) (p. 277) 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. • Parking brake – symbols and messages • Brakes – general (p. 271) 2. Push the control. (p. 277) > • Brakes – general (p. 271) The symbol in the instrument panel flashes while the parking brake is being applied and glows steadily when the parking brake has been fully applied. 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill. 4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P.

275 08 Starting and driving

Parking brake – releasing NOTE • Parking brake – symbols and messages (p. 277) For safety reasons, the parking brake is Releasing the electric parking brake • Brakes – general (p. 271) only released automatically if the engine • is running and the driver is wearing a seat belt. • The electric parking brake will be released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.

2. Fasten the seat belt. 3. Move the gear selector to position D or R and press the accelerator pedal. The parking brake will release when the vehi- Parking brake control cle begins to move. Manual release Heavy load uphill 1. Fasten the seat belt. A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the 2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot vehicle to roll backward when the parking and press the START/STOP ENGINE brake is released automatically on a steep button (or press the START/STOP incline. To help avoid this: ENGINE button with a valid remote key in 1. Keep the electric parking brake lever the passenger compartment on vehicles pushed in with the left hand while shifting with the optional keyless drive). into Drive with the right. 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to 4. Pull the parking brake control. pull away, release the parking brake lever Automatic release only after the vehicle begins to move. 1. Start the engine. Related information 08 • Parking brake – general information (p. 274) • Parking brake – applying (p. 275)

276 08 Starting and driving

Parking brake – symbols and messages A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever. Symbol and messages in the instrument panel Symbol Message Description/action

"Message" Read the message in the information display

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.

- Park brake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it sev- fully released eral times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds.

- Parking brake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several applied times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds.

- Parking brake A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains Service required

WARNING Related information • Parking brake – general information If the vehicle must be parked before the (p. 274) fault has been corrected, always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so • Parking brake – applying (p. 275) that they point away from the curb if the • Parking brake – releasing (p. 276) vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is pointing downhill. • Brakes – general (p. 271) 08

277 08 Starting and driving

Driving through water WARNING CAUTION The vehicle should be driven with extreme Avoid driving through standing or Engine damage will occur if water is caution if it is necessary to drive through • • rushing water. Doing so can be dan- drawn into the air cleaner. standing water. gerous and it may also be difficult to • If the vehicle is driven through water The vehicle can be driven through water up to determine the actual depth of the deeper than approximately 10 in. a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm), (V60 water. (25 cm), (V60 Cross Country: approxi- Cross Country: approximately 12 in. (30 cm)) • If water cannot be avoided, after driv- mately 12 in. (30 cm)), water may enter at walking speed to help prevent water from ing through the water, press lightly on the differential and the transmission. entering the differential and the transmission. the brake pedal to ensure that the This reduces the oil's lubricating Water reduces the oil's lubricating capacity brakes are functioning normally. Water capacity and may shorten the service and may shorten the service life of these or mud can make the brake linings life of these components. components. slippery, resulting in delayed braking • Damage to any components, the effect. engine, transmission, turbo-charger, Take particular care when driving through • differential or its internal components flowing water. caused by flooding, vapor lock or • Clean the electrical connections for trailer insufficient oil is not covered under wiring after driving in mud or water. warranty. • When driving through water, maintain low • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in speed and do not stop in the water. water up to the door sills longer than absolutely necessary. This could result in electrical malfunctions. • If the engine has been stopped while the vehicle is in water, do not attempt to restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of the water.

Related information • Towing the vehicle (p. 289) • Towing by tow truck (p. 291) 08

278 08 Starting and driving

Engine and cooling system Conserving electrical current Before a long distance trip Under special conditions, for example when Keep the following in mind to help minimize It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with battery drain: checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and ice technician before driving long distances. cooling system will overheat. • When the engine is not running, avoid Your retailer will also be able to supply you II using ignition mode . Many electrical with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper systems (the audio system, the optional Proceed as follows to avoid overheating the blades for your use in the event that problems navigation system, power windows, etc) engine. occur. will function in ignition modes 0 and I. • Maintain a low speed when driving with a These modes reduce drain on the battery. trailer up long, steep hills. For informa- As a minimum, the following items should be tion, see Towing a trailer (p. 287) • Please keep in mind that using systems, checked before any long trip: accessories, etc., that consume a great • Check that engine runs smoothly and that • Do not turn the engine off immediately deal of current when the engine is not fuel consumption is normal. when stopping after a hard drive. running could result in the battery being completely drained. Driving or having the • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage. WARNING engine running for approximately • Have the transmission oil level (p. 384) The cooling fan may start or continue to 15 minutes will help keep the battery checked. operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the charged. • Check condition of drive belts. engine has been switched off. • The optional 12-volt socket in the cargo • Check state of the battery's charge. area (p. 138) area provides electrical cur- • Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as Remove any auxiliary lights from in front rent even with the ignition switched off, • well), and replace those that are of the grille when driving in hot weather which drains the battery. worn (p. 295). Check tire pres- conditions. sure (p. 302). Do not exceed engine speeds of • • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and 4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hilly steering gear should be checked by a terrain. The oil temperature could become trained and qualified Volvo service techni- too high. cian only. • Check all lights, including high beams. • Reflective warning triangles are legally required in some states/provinces. 08 • Have a word with a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if you intend to

}} 279 08 Starting and driving

|| drive in countries where it may be difficult Driving in cold weather therefore advisable to check the state of to obtain the correct fuel. Check your vehicle before the approach of charge more frequently and spray an anti- • Consider your destination. If you will be cold weather. rust oil on the battery posts. driving through an area where snow or ice • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires are likely to occur, consider snow The following advice is worth noting: on all four wheels for winter driving, see tires (p. 310). • Make sure that the engine cool- Snow tires/studded tires (p. 310). Related information ant (p. 335) contains 50 percent anti- • To prevent the washer fluid (p. 348)reser- freeze. Any other mixture will reduce voir from freezing, add washer solvents Changing a wheel – removing wheel • freeze protection. This gives protection containing antifreeze. This is important (p. 296) against freezing down to –31 °F (–35 °C). since dirt is often splashed on the wind- • Bulbs – introduction (p. 338) The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not shield during winter driving, requiring the approved by Volvo. Different types of frequent use of the washers and wipers. antifreeze must not be mixed. Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted • Volvo recommends using only genuine as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. washer solvent and 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer solvent • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F (–18 °C): helps prevent the formation of condensa- 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer cold weather conditions it is worthwhile solvent and 1 part water. to add fuel line de-icer before refueling. • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) • Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can improves cold-weather starting as well as cause damage to the locks. decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is warming up. Full synthetic 0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in areas with sustained low temperatures. • The load placed on the battery is greater during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc., are used more 08 often. Moreover, the capacity of the battery decreases as the temperature drops. In very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is

280 08 Starting and driving

Refueling – fuel requirements result in loss of emission warranty coverage. Volvo allows the use of the following "oxy- Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- State and local vehicle inspection programs genated" fuels; however, the octane rat- oline to control engine deposits. will make detection of misfueling easier, pos- ings (p. 282) listed must still be met. sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis- Alcohol – Ethanol Deposit control gasoline (detergent fueled vehicles. Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by vol- additives) ume may be used. Ethanol may also be refer- Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping NOTE red to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines con- Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to use of deposit control gasolines will help tain an octane enhancing additive called ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tri- 15% MTBE may be used. you are not sure whether the gasoline con- carbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, Methanol tains deposit control additives, check with the your Emission Control System perform- service station operator. ance may be affected, and the Check Do not use gasolines containing methanol Engine Light (malfunction indicator light) (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice NOTE located on your instrument panel may can result in vehicle performance deteriora- light. If this occurs, please return your tion and can damage critical parts in the fuel Volvo does not recommend the use of vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo system. Such damage may not be covered external fuel injector cleaning systems. service technician for service. under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Unleaded fuel Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic con- "Oxygenated fuels" verter and must use only unleaded gasoline. Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing U.S. and Canadian regulations require that "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be ethers. In some areas, state or local laws labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps require that the service pump be marked indi- have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel there are areas in which the pumps are into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is only". Leaded gasoline damages the three- alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, way catalytic converter and the heated oxy- check with the service station operator. To gen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded meet seasonal air quality standards, some gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of the areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel. 08 emission control system (p. 285) and could

281 08 Starting and driving

Refueling – octane rating ard jointly established by leading automotive Fuel Formulations Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per- manufactures to meet the needs of today’s Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a formance, but using 87 octane15 or above will advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retail- knock inhibitor, and do not use lead addi- not affect engine reliability. ers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their tives. Besides damaging the exhaust emis- gasoline as having met the “TOP TIER Deter- sion control systems on your vehicle, lead Minimum octane gent Gasoline” standards. has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. NOTE Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. Information about TOP TIER Detergent Unburned benzene has been strongly linked Gasoline is available at to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an www.toptiergas.com. area where you must fill your own gas tank, take precautions. These may include: Demanding driving • standing upwind away from the filler noz- In demanding driving conditions, such as zle while refueling operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a • refueling only at gas stations with vapor trailer, or driving for extended periods at recovery systems that fully seal the G028920 higher altitudes than normal, it may be advis- mouth of the filler neck during refueling able to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or Typical pump octane label wearing neoprene gloves while handling a higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully • fuel filler nozzle. utilize your engine's capacity, and for the NOTE smoothest possible operation. Use of Additives Vehicles equipped with the high perform- With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur- ance 4-cylinder engines (B4204T9 and NOTE ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick- B4204T10) require premium fuel16. When switching to higher octane fuel or eners, or other store-bought additives to your changing gasoline brands, it may be nec- vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline essary to fill the tank more than once Overuse may damage your engine, and some Volvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Deter- before a difference in engine operation is of these additives contain organically volatile gent Gasoline” where available to help main- noticeable. chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself tain engine performance and reliability. TOP to these chemicals. TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand- 08

15 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2. 16 Refer to your Warranty and Maintenance Records booklet for additional information.

282 08 Starting and driving

WARNING Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler • Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstruc- door ted and is completely closed after refuel- Never carry a cell phone that is switched ing. on while refueling your vehicle. If the The fuel filler door is located on the right rear phone rings, this may cause a spark that fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel • Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in tank symbol on the information display ) weather. fire and injury. Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click indicates that it is closed. WARNING CAUTION Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, color- less, and odorless gas. It is present in all Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust addition to causing damage to the environ- fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the ment, gasolines containing alcohol can passenger compartment is ventilated, and cause damage to painted surfaces, which immediately return the vehicle to a trained may not be covered under the New Vehicle and qualified Volvo service technician for Limited Warranty. correction. Manually opening the fuel filler door Related information • Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 281) With the ignition switched off, press and release the button on the lighting panel to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks. • If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is being refueled, this feature enables you to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel filler door unlocked. • You can also keep the vehicle locked if 1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area (on 08 you remain inside it during refueling. The the same side as the fuel filler door). central locking button does not lock the fuel filler door.

}} 283 08 Starting and driving

|| 2. Open a perforated section of the insula- Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap CAUTION tion and grasp the handle on the green If necessary, the fuel filler door can be Do not refuel with the engine run- cord. opened manually. • ning17. Turn the ignition off or to posi- 3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until Opening/closing the fuel cap tion I. If the ignition is on, an incorrect the fuel filler door clicks open. reading could occur in the fuel gauge. Related information • Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not • Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap press the handle on the filler nozzle (p. 284) more than one extra time. Too much fuel in the tank in hot weather condi- • Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 281) tions can cause the fuel to overflow. • Refueling – octane rating (p. 282) Overfilling could also cause damage to the emission control systems.

Related information • Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 281) • Refueling – octane rating (p. 282) Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the filler cap slowly. After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into place.

17 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

284 08 Starting and driving

Emission controls or removing components, and/or repea- Economical driving ted use of leaded fuel. Better driving economy may be obtained by Three-way catalytic converter thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain NOTE stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle engine malfunctions, particularly involving to immediate traffic conditions. the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters. systems, may cause unusually high three- Economical driving conserves natural way catalytic converter temperatures. Do resources not continue to operate your vehicle if Heated oxygen sensors Observe the following rules: you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy- of power or other unusual operating con- gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings • Bring the engine to normal operating tem- ditions, such as engine overheating or are fed into a control module that continu- perature as soon as possible by driving backfiring. A properly tuned engine will ously monitors engine functions and controls with a light foot on the accelerator pedal help avoid malfunctions that could dam- fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the for the first few minutes of operation. A cold engine uses more fuel and is subject age the three-way catalytic converter. engine is continuously adjusted for efficient to increased wear. • Do not park your vehicle over combusti- combustion to help reduce harmful emis- ble materials, such as grass or leaves, sions. • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehi- which can come into contact with the hot cle for driving short distances. This does exhaust system and cause such materials Related information not allow the engine to reach normal to ignite under certain wind and weather • Information displays – warning symbols operating temperature. conditions. (p. 72) • Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelera- • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of • Engine and cooling system (p. 279) tion and hard braking. one minute), or an intermittently firing or • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position flooded engine can cause three-way cat- as often as possible and avoid using kick- alytic converter or exhaust system over- down. heating. • Remember that tampering or unauthorized modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. This includes: altering fuel 08 injection settings or components, altering emission system components or location

}} 285 08 Starting and driving

|| • Using the engine's optional Eco func- • Dirty air cleaner with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in 18 tion can help improve fuel economy. For • Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter the cargo area, the less the tendency to additional information, see ECO* (p. 267). understeer. • Dragging brakes • Using the transmission's Sport mode19 • Incorrect front end alignment • Vehicle load, tire design and inflation may increase fuel consumption some- pressure all affect vehicle handling. what. Use the transmission's Drive (D) Some of the above mentioned items and oth- Therefore, check that the tires are inflated position as often as possible. For addi- ers are checked at the standard maintenance to the recommended pressure according tional information about Sport mode, see intervals. to the vehicle load. Loads should be dis- Transmission – Geartronic (p. 259). tributed so that capacity weight or maxi- • Do not exceed posted speed limits. WARNING mum permissible axle loads are not exceeded. • Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra Driving with the tailgate open: Driving load) in the vehicle. with the tailgate open could lead to poi- • At the specified curb weight your vehicle sonous exhaust gases entering the pas- has a tendency to understeer, which Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire • senger compartment. If the tailgate must means that the steering wheel has to be pressure regularly (when tires are cold). be kept open for any reason, proceed as turned more than might seem appropriate • Remove snow tires when threat of snow follows: for the curvature of a bend. This ensures or ice has ended. • Close the windows good stability and reduces the risk of rear • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, wheel skid. Remember that these proper- • Set the ventilation system control to air ties can alter with the vehicle load. The increase air resistance and also fuel con- flow to floor, windshield and side win- sumption. heavier the load in the cargo compart- dows and the blower control to its ment, the less the tendency to under- At highway driving speeds, fuel consump- • highest setting. steer. tion will be lower with the air conditioning on and the windows closed than with the Handling and roadholding Related information air conditioning off and the windows • Climate – general information (p. 122) open. At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a tendency to understeer, which means that Using the onboard trip computer's fuel • the steering wheel has to be turned more consumption modes can help you learn than might seem appropriate for the curva- how to drive more economically. ture of a bend. This ensures good stability Other factors that decrease gas mileage and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid. are: Remember that these properties can alter 08

18 Available on certain 4-cyl. engines 19 Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

286 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer • If the automatic transmission begins to NOTE When towing a trailer, always observe the overheat, a message will be displayed in When parking the vehicle with a trailer legal requirements of the state/province. the text window. • on a hill, apply the parking brake Avoid overload and other abusive opera- • before putting the gear selector in P. NOTE tion. Always follow the trailer manufactur- For the maximum trailer and tongue • Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- er's recommendations for wheel weights recommended by Volvo, see ity, and economy. chocking. Weights (p. 378). • It is necessary to balance trailer brakes • When starting on a hill, put the gear with the towing vehicle brakes to provide selector in D before releasing the park- • All Volvo models are equipped with a safe stop (check and observe state/ ing brake. local regulations). energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump- • If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift ers. Trailer hitch installation should not • Do not connect the trailer's brake system positions while towing a trailer, make interfere with the proper operation of this directly to the vehicle's brake system. sure the gear you select does not put bumper system. • More frequent vehicle maintenance is too much strain on the engine (using Trailer towing does not normally present any required. too high a gear). particular problems, but take into considera- • Remove the ball holder when the hitch is • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch tion: not being used. may be rated for trailers heavier than • Increase tire pressure to recommended the vehicle is designed to tow. Please full pressure, see Tire inflation – pressure adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer table (p. 305). weights. • When your vehicle is new, avoid towing • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines heavy trailers during the first 620 miles of more than 15%. (1,000 km). • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h). • Engine and transmission are subject to increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely watched when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off 08 the air conditioner if the temperature gauge needle enters the red range.

}} 287 08 Starting and driving

|| CAUTION WARNING Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to The maximum trailer weights listed are Bumper-attached trailer hitches must • help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer only applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft not be used on Volvos, nor should when the vehicle and trailer have begun to (1000 m) above sea level. With increasing safety chains be attached to the altitude the engine power and therefore bumper. sway and is part of the stability system. For the car's climbing ability are impaired information on the stability system, see Stabil- because of the reduced air density, so the • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle ity system – introduction (p. 169) maximum trailer weight has to be reduced rear axle must not be used. accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic Function trailer must be reduced by 10% for every brake system directly to the vehicle A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway further 3,280 ft (1000 m) (or part thereof). brake system, nor a trailer's lighting for various reasons. Normally this only occurs When towing 5,950 lbs (2,700kg) hill incli- system directly to the vehicle lighting at high speeds but, for example, if the trailer nation is restricted to 14%. system. Consult your nearest author- is overloaded or if the load is unevenly dis- ized Volvo retailer for correct installa- tributed in the trailer, there is risk of swaying tion. at speeds between approximately 45-55 mph • When towing a trailer, the trailer's (70-90 km/h). safety chains or wire must be correctly Swaying may be caused by factors such as: fastened to the attachment points provided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle. • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sud- The safety chain or wire must never be den, strong crosswind fastened to or wound around the tow- • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an ing ball. uneven road surface or drive over a bump • Sudden movements of the steering wheel Trailer cable An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer Facts about TSA hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer • TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi- has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved mately 40 mph (60 km/h) by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag • The stability system symbol in the instru- on the ground. ment panel will flash when TSA is working If the driver switches off the stability sys- Related information • tem's Spin Control function, TSA will also 08 • Loading – general (p. 139)

288 08 Starting and driving

be switched off (but will be on again the Towing the vehicle 2. The remote key must remain in the igni- next time the engine is started) Always check with state and local authorities tion slot21 for the entire time that the vehi- • TSA may not intervene when the vehicle before attempting to tow another vehicle cle is being towed. and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries because this type of towing is subject to reg- 3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing to compensate for the swaying motion by ulations regarding maximum towing speed, vehicle slows down by applying light moving the steering wheel rapidly length and type of towing device, lighting, etc. pressure on the brake pedal. This will How TSA works 1. With the remote key fully pressed into the help prevent jarring movements of the vehicle being towed. Once swaying has begun, it can be very diffi- ignition slot20, press START/STOP cult to stop, which makes it difficult to control ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to 4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop the vehicle and trailer. activate ignition mode II. the vehicle being towed. The TSA system continuously monitors the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral movement. If the system detects a tendency to sway, the brakes are applied individually on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to enable the driver to regain control of the vehicle. If this is not adequate to stop the swaying motion, the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with brakes, and engine power is temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have once again become stable, TSA will now stop regulating the brakes/engine power and the driver regains control of the vehicle. Related information • Towing a trailer (p. 287) 08 • Loading – general (p. 139)

20 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive. }} 289 08 Starting and driving

|| CAUTION Towing eyelet Attaching the towing eyelet When used, the towing eyelet should always The towing eyelet is located under the General towing precautions: be securing attached. floor of the cargo area, with the spare tire. • Please check with state and local This eyelet must be screwed into the authorities before attempting this type positions provided on the right sides of of towing, as vehicles being towed are either the front or rear bumper (see illus- subject to regulations regarding maxi- tration). mum towing speed, length and type of towing device, lighting, etc. There are two different types of covers over the openings for the towing eyelet • If the vehicle's battery is dead, see and they have to be opened differently. Jump starting (p. 256) to provide current for releasing the electric parking • If the cover has a notch, insert a coin, brake and to move the gear selector etc., into the notch and pry open the from the P position to N. If this is not edge of the cover. Open the cover possible, see Transmission – shiftlock completely and remove it. override (p. 261) for information about • If the cover has a mark along one edge manually overriding the shiftlock sys- or in a corner, press the mark while tem to move the gear selector from P prying out the opposite side/corner to N. using a coin, etc. Open the cover and • Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). remove it. Do not exceed the maximum allowable Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by towing speed. hand and then using the tire iron until it is • Maximum distance with front wheels securely in place. on ground: 50 miles (80 km). After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet • The vehicle should only be towed in should be removed and returned to its stor- the forward direction. Removing the front/rear covers age location. Press the cover for the attachment point back Related information into position. • Towing eyelet (p. 290) • Remote key – functions (p. 149) 08

21 For vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

290 08 Starting and driving

WARNING Towing by tow truck CAUTION When necessary, call for professional help When the vehicle is being towed, the The vehicle should always be towed in • from an authorized towing company. Volvo • ignition should be in mode II (in mode the forward direction. recommends the use of flat bed equipment. I, all of the vehicle's airbags are deac- • Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)* tivated). For more information, see CAUTION that are being towed with the front Ignition modes (p. 77) wheels off the ground should not be • Never remove the remote key from the In certain conditions, the towing eyelet towed at a speed above approx. ignition slot when the vehicle is being may be used to pull the vehicle onto a 45 mph (70 km/h) and should not be towed. For vehicles with keyless drive, flatbed tow truck. towed farther than 30 miles (50 km). the remote key must remain inside the • The vehicle's position and ground vehicle. clearance determine if it can be pulled Related information up onto a flatbed tow truck using the • The power brakes and power steering • Towing eyelet (p. 290) will not function when the engine is not towing eyelet. running. Approximately 5 times more • If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is pressure will be required on the brake too steep or the ground clearance pedal and the steering wheel will be under the vehicle is insufficient, dam- considerably harder to turn. age could occur by attempting to pull • The towing eyelets must not be used the vehicle using the towing eyelet. for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or • If necessary, lift the vehicle using the for any similar purpose involving tow truck’s lifting device. severe strain. WARNING Related information • Towing the vehicle (p. 289) No person or object should be behind the tow truck while the vehicle is being pulled • Towing by tow truck (p. 291) up onto the flatbed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 291 WHEELS AND TIRES 09 Wheels and tires

Tires – general information However, for optimum road holding on icy or Related information 09 Your vehicle is equipped with tires according snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305) to the vehicle's tire information placard on the winter tires on all four wheels. • Tire specifications (p. 303) B-pillar (the structural member at the side of When replacing tires, be sure that the new • Changing a wheel – direction of rotation the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door tires are the same size designation, type (p. 296) opening). (radial) and preferably from the same manu- • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295) facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is Introduction a risk of altering the car's roadholding and handling characteristics. CAUTION Tire rotation Some Volvo models are equipped with an Ultra High Performance tire and wheel Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire combination designed to provide maxi- wear is affected by a number of factors such mum dry pavement performance with con- as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving sideration for hydroplaning resistance. style, etc. They may be more susceptible to road hazard damage and, depending on driving NOTE conditions, may achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this • If the tires are rotated, they should vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced only be moved from front to rear or AWD or stability system, these tires are not vice versa. They should never be rota- designed for winter driving, and should be ted left to right/right to left. replaced with winter tires when weather conditions dictate. • Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at The tires have good road holding characteris- 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. tics and offer good handling on dry and wet Some customers find that tire rotation surfaces. It should be noted however that the may help to get extra mileage from tire tires have been developed to give these fea- life. tures on snow/ice-free surfaces. • Tire rotation should only be performed Most models are equipped with "all-season" if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and tires, which provide a somewhat higher tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm). degree of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires without the "all-season" rating.

293 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tires – storage and age process. The temporary spare1 should also WARNING When storing complete wheels (tires mounted be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo on rims), they should be suspended off the never been used. • are specified to meet stringent stability floor or placed on their sides on the floor. A tire's age can be determined by the DOT and handling requirements. Unap- New Tires stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). proved wheel/tire size combinations A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling. should be replaced immediately. • Any damage caused by installation of Storing wheels and tires unapproved wheel/tire size combina- When storing completes wheels (tires moun- tions will not be covered by your new ted on rims), they should be suspended off vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no the floor or placed on their sides on the floor. responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such Tires not mounted on rims should be stored installations. on their sides or standing upright, but should not be suspended. Related information CAUTION • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305) Tire specifications (p. 303) Remember that tires are perishable goods. As Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, • of 2000, the manufacturing week and year dry, dark place, and should never be • Tire specifications (p. 303) (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) stored in close proximity to solvents, gaso- • Changing a wheel – direction of rotation will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513 line, oils, etc. (p. 296) means that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2013). • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295) Tire age Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging

1 Option or accessory on some models

294 09 Wheels and tires

Tires – tread wear indicator • Changing a wheel – direction of rotation Tires – tire economy 09 The tires have wear indicator strips running (p. 296) A smooth driving style and correct inflation across or parallel to the tread. • Tires – storage and age (p. 294) pressure can help prolong the tires' service life. • Maintain correct tire pressure. The tire inflation table, see Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305). • Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire screeching. • Tire wear increases with speed. • Correct front wheel alignment is very important. • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy G021829 and driving comfort. • Tires must maintain the same direction of The letters TWI are printed on the side of the rotation throughout their lifetime. tire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the tread, these strips become visible • When replacing tires, the tires with the and indicate that the tire should be replaced. most tread should be mounted on the rear wheels to reduce the chance of over- Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer steer during hard braking. very poor traction. • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the When replacing worn tires, it is recommended tires and/or wheels permanently. that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will prevent alteration of the driving characteristics of the vehicle. Related information • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305) • Tire specifications (p. 303)

295 09 Wheels and tires

09 Changing a wheel – direction of Related information Changing a wheel – removing wheel rotation • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305) Wheel changes should always be carried out Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's • Tire specifications (p. 303) correctly. braking properties and ability to force aside • Tires – storage and age (p. 294) rain, snow and slush. • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295) Summer and winter tires

Location of jack and tools

G021778 Changing a wheel 1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire selector in P. • The tires with the most tread should 2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tool always be on the rear axle (to help reduce for removing the plastic covers on the the risk of skidding). wheel nuts, the towing eyelet and the • When switching between summer and wheel cover removal tool (certain models winter tires, mark the tires to indicate only) stowed under the floor of the cargo where they were mounted on the car, area. e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall. • Contact a Volvo workshop if you are unsure about the tread depth.

296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Wheels and tires

3. 09

Lug wrench and towing eyelet 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel 5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug nuts remove the plastic covers on the wheel wrench as shown in the illustration. nuts with the tool provided and use the Remove the wheel cover (where applica- lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the ble) using the removal tool or remove the CAUTION wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting downward (counterclockwise) pressure. wheel cover by hand. The towing eyelet must be screwed into 4. Block the wheels that are on the ground the lug wrench as far as possible. with wooden blocks or large stones.

Jack attachment points

}} 297 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 7. There are two jack attachment points on WARNING NOTE each side of the vehicle. Position the jack under the attachment point to be used on • The jack must correctly engage the The jack provided with your vehicle is a level, firm, non-slippery surface and jack attachment. intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the crank it up until it is correctly aligned and • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came seated in the attachment point. Before non-slippery surface. with your particular model should be used raising the vehicle, check that the jack is • Never allow any part of your body to to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be still correctly positioned in the attach- be extended under a vehicle suppor- lifted more frequently or for a prolonged ment. ted by a jack. period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always follow this device’s 8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be • Use the jack intended for the vehicle instructions for use. changed is lifted off the ground. when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. 9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and Related information Apply the parking brake and put the remove the wheel. • Changing a wheel – installing a wheel gear selector in the Park (P) position. • (p. 300) • Block the wheels standing on the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle.

298 09 Wheels and tires

09 Changing a wheel – spare wheel CAUTION Wheel changes should always be carried out The vehicle must never be driven with correctly. more than one temporary spare wheel. Spare tire A spare tire can be purchased for your vehi- Related information cle as an accessory. Follow the instructions • Changing a wheel – installing a wheel included with the spare tire regarding use and (p. 300) stowing in the vehicle. See also Changing a • Changing a wheel – removing wheel wheel – removing wheel (p. 296) for additional (p. 296) information. Spare wheel The following instructions only apply if you Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out have purchased a temporary spare wheel* for toward you. Secure the stitched strap hooks your vehicle. in the front loading eyelets. Secure the long strap in one of the front loading eyelets, wrap If there is no temporary spare wheel in your the strap diagonally over the spare wheel and vehicle, please see Tire sealing system* – through the upper handle. Secure the short general information (p. 318) for instructions strap on the long strap. Secure in the rear on using the tire sealing system. loading eyelet and tighten. The accessory temporary spare wheel is provided in a bag that must be securely strapped WARNING in place in the cargo area while the vehicle is being driven. Current legislation prohibits the use of the “Temporary Spare” tire other than as a The spare wheel is only intended for tempo- temporary replacement for a punctured rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi- soon as possible. The vehicle's handling may ble by a standard tire. Road holding and be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The handling may be affected with the “Tem- porary Spare” in use. correct tire pressure is stated in the tire pressure table, see Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305) and in the tire inflation placard on the driver's side door jamb at the rear of the driver's door opening.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 299 09 Wheels and tires

09 Changing a wheel – accessing the 7. If there is a wheel in the bag, strap the Changing a wheel – installing a wheel spare wheel bag securely in place in the cargo area. It is important to re-install wheels properly. The following procedure explains how to access the spare wheel (where applicable). WARNING Re-installing the wheel 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel 1. Release the bag's retaining straps. • If there is a wheel in the bag, the bag and hub. must be securely restrained using its 2. Lift the bag out of the vehicle and remove straps and the load anchoring eyelets in 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. the spare wheel from the bag. the cargo area. See (p. 299) and care- 3. Fold up the floor hatch in the cargo area. fully follow the instructions. • If the wheel with the punctured tire is 4. Remove the jack* and tools* from the too big to fit in the bag, it should be foam block and change the wheels (see securely restrained in the cargo area the instructions in the following section using suitable straps, a net for anchor- "Changing a wheel"). ing cargo, etc. 5. After changing wheels, return the jack and tools to the foam block and close the floor hatch. 6. If possible, place the wheel with the punctured tire in the bag. Tighten the wheel nuts 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand- tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- nately tighten the bolts crosswise to 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). 5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel nuts and Install the wheel cover (where applicable). The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's inflation valve must be positioned over the valve.

300 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Wheels and tires

09 Related information Tire inflation – general information NOTE • Changing a wheel – spare wheel (p. 299) Check tire inflation pressure regularly. • The placards shown indicate inflation • Changing a wheel – removing wheel Inflation placard pressure for the tires installed on the (p. 296) vehicle at the factory only. • A certain amount of air seepage from the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare2, at least once a month and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire G032521 pressure gauge, as automatic service sta- Tire inflation placard tion gauges may be inaccurate. • Use the recommended cold inflation Tire inflation pressure for optimum tire performance See the tire inflation table in Tire inflation – and wear. pressure table (p. 305). A tire inflation pres- Under-inflation or over-inflation may sure placard is also located on the driver's • cause uneven treadwear patterns. side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This placard indicates the designation of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation pressure.

2 Available as an accessory }} 301 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 WARNING Tire inflation – checking pressure 3. Replace the valve cap. Inflation pressure should be checked when Under-inflation is the most common • the tires are cold. CAUTION cause of tire failure and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation, Cold tires • After inflating the tires, always reinstall or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of The tires are considered to be cold when the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. vehicle control and increased risk of they have the same temperature as the injury. surrounding (ambient) air. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps • Under-inflated tires reduce the load could corrode and become difficult to carrying capacity of your vehicle. This temperature is normally reached after the remove. vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. When weather temperature changes occur, After driving a distance of approximately 4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure tire inflation pressures also change. A 10- 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be there are no nails or other objects degree temperature drop causes a corres- hot. If you have to drive farther than this dis- embedded that could puncture the tire ponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pres- tance to pump your tire(s), check and record and cause an air leak. sure. Check your tire pressures frequently the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there and adjust them to the proper pressure, are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other which can be found on the vehicle's tire infor- If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, irregularities. mation placard or certification label. never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, Related information 3 pressures to increase above recommended including the spare . Tire specifications (p. 303) • cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recom- • Tires – storage and age (p. 294) mended cold inflation pressure could be sig- NOTE • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295) nificantly under-inflated. • If you overfill the tire, release air by • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305) To check inflation pressure: pushing on the metal stem in the cen- 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one ter of the valve. Then recheck the tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto pressure with your tire gauge. the valve. • Some spare tires (available as an 2. Add air to reach the recommended air accessory) require higher inflation pressure than the other tires. Consult pressure. the tire inflation pressure table, see

3 Available as an accessory

302 09 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305) Tire specifications Information on the sidewall 09 or see the inflation pressure placard. The following information can be found on a tire's sidewall. Related information Tire ratings • Tire specifications (p. 303) • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305) Speed ratings The speed ratings in the table translate as fol- Tires – storage and age (p. 294) • low: • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295) Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h) Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers T 118 mph (190 km/h) place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires (see the illustration). H 130 mph (210 km/h) The following information is listed on the tire V 149 mph (240 km/h) sidewall: W 168 mph (270 km/h) The tire designation:

Y 186 mph (300 km/h) NOTE Please be aware that the following tire designation is an example only and that this particular tire may not be available on your vehicle.

}} 303 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The Terrain, AS = All Season grades: see Tire specifications – Uniform larger the number, the wider the tire. 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number Tire Quality Grading (p. 308) for more 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" information. width in percent. and indicates that the tire meets all fed- 12. Maximum permissible inflation 3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the eral standards. The next two numbers or pressure: the greatest amount of air letters are the plant code where it was pressure that should ever be put in the symbol indicate that the vehicle is manufactured, the next two are the tire tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac- equipped with optional self-supporting 4 size code and the last four numbers rep- turer. run flat tires . resent the week and year the tire was 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in built. For example, 1510 means that the inches). tire was manufactured during week 15 of 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, 2010. The numbers in between are mar- a load index of 95 equals a maximum keting codes used at the manufacturer's load of 1521 lbs (690 kg). discretion. This information helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for safety 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maxi- recall purposes. mum speed at which the tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time, 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material carrying a permissible load for the vehi- Used: Indicates the number of plies indi- cle, and with correct inflation pressure. cates or the number of layers of rubber- For example, H indicates a speed rating coated fabric in the tire tread and side- of 130 mph (210 km/h). wall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the NOTE sidewall, which include steel, nylon, poly- ester, and others. The tire's load index and speed rating may Maximum Load not appear on the sidewall because they 10. : Indicates the maximum are not required by law. load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire information placard located on the B- Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.

4 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

304 09 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation – pressure table the tire inflation placard (see Tire inflation – information specific to the tires installed on 09 The following tire pressures are recom- general information (p. 301) for its location) for your vehicle at the factory. mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to Some of the tire sizes listed here may not be available for all models in all markets.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons Front Rear psi (kPa) psi (kPa)

235/45 R17 Extra load 36 (250) 36 (250)

215/50 R17 Extra load 38 (260) 38 (260) 235/40 R18 Extra load 235/45 R18 Extra load 235/40 R19 Extra load

Temporary spare tireA 61 (420) 61 (420) T125/80R17

A Available as an accessory

WARNING NOTE 19” wheels may never be used on vehicles Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts that are not equipped with the R-design or department for the most up-to-date speci- the Sport chassis options. fications. Using 19” wheels on vehicles equipped the standard chassis presents a safety risk and the risk of damage to the vehicle, and impairs the vehicle’s driving characteristics.

305 09 Wheels and tires

09 Loading specifications Gross vehicle weight (GVW) Loading specifications – load limit Properly loading your vehicle will provide The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- The load limit of your vehicle is the combined maximum return of vehicle design perform- gers. weight of the occupants and cargo. ance. NOTE Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your- • The location of the various labels in 1. Locate the statement "the combined self with the following terms for determining your vehicle, see Label information weight of occupants and cargo should your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without (p. 371). never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi- a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian • A table listing important weight limits cle's placard. Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ for your vehicle, see Weights (p. 378). CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- 2. Determine the combined weight of the tion placard: driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Curb weight The weight of the vehicle including a full tank 3. Subtract the combined weight of the of fuel and all standard equipment. It does driver and passengers from XXX kilo- not include passengers, cargo, or optional grams or XXX pounds. equipment. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load Capacity weight capacity. For example, if the "XXX" All weight added to the curb weight, including amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be cargo and optional equipment. When towing, five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo the amount of available cargo and lug- weight. gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – Permissible axle weight 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) The maximum allowable weight that can be 5. Determine the combined weight of lug- carried by a single axle (front or rear). These gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi- numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian cle. That weight may not safely exceed Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ the available cargo and luggage load CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle capacity calculated in Step 4. must never exceed its maximum permissible weight.

306 09 Wheels and tires

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load Tire specifications – terminology • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- 09 from your trailer will be transferred to your The following is a glossary of tire-related sure. vehicle. terms. • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. The tire suppliers may have additional mark- WARNING B-pillar: The structural member at the ings, notes or warnings such as standard • side of the vehicle behind the front door. • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, load, radial tubeless, etc. gross vehicle weight, or any other • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire weight rating limits can cause tire • Tire information placard: A placard next to the rim. showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire overheating resulting in permanent • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the deformation or catastrophic failure. sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and the maximum weight the vehicle can bead area and the tread. Do not use replacement tires with • carry. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim- lower load carrying capacities than the • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A eter of the tire that contacts the road tires that were original equipment on when mounted on the vehicle. the vehicle because this will lower the number on the sidewall of each tire pro- vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires viding information about the tire brand • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire with the correct load carrying capacity. and manufacturing plant, tire size and or a tire and tube assembly upon which Consult your Volvo retailer for informa- date of manufacturer. the tire beads are seated. tion. • Inflation pressure: A measure of the • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating amount of air in a tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilo- • Standard load: A class of P-metric or grams that can be carried by the tire. This Metric tires designed to carry a maximum rating is established by the tire manufac- load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric turer. tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure • Maximum permissible inflation beyond this pressure will not increase the pressure: the greatest amount of air tires load carrying capability. pressure that should ever be put in the • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac- tires designed to carry a heavier maxi- turer. mum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for • Recommended tire inflation pressure: Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pres- inflation pressure, established by Volvo, sure beyond this pressure will not which is based on the type of tires that increase the tire's load carrying capabil- are mounted on a vehicle at the factory. ity. This information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's

}} 307 09 Wheels and tires

09 side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table Tire specifications – Uniform Tire ance. The traction grade assigned to this tire in this chapter. Quality Grading is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST tests and is not a measure of cornering (turn- cold when they have the same tempera- CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY ing) traction. ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE temperature is normally reached after the GRADES. WARNING vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. Quality grades can be found, where appli- The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction cable, on the tire sidewall between the tests and is not a measure of cornering tread shoulder and maximum section (turning) traction. width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TEMPERATURE TREADWEAR The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to The treadwear grade is a comparative rating the generation of heat and its ability to dissi- based on the wear rate of the tire when tes- pate heat when tested under controlled con- ted under controlled conditions on a specified ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test government test course. For example, a tire wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause graded 150 would wear one and one half the material of the tire to degenerate and (1 ½) times as well on the government course reduce tire life, and excessive temperature as a tire graded 100. The relative perform- can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C ance of tires depends upon the actual condi- corresponds to a minimum level of perform- tions of their use, however, and many depart ance that all passenger vehicle tires must significantly from the norm due to variation in meet under the Federal Motor Safety Stand- driving habits, maintenance practices and dif- ard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher ferences in road characteristics and climate. levels of performance on the laboratory test TRACTION wheel than the minimum required by law. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform-

308 09 Wheels and tires

09 WARNING Snow chains CAUTION Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with The temperature grade for this tire is Check local regulations regarding the the following restrictions: • established for a tire that is properly infla- use of snow chains before installing. ted and not overloaded. Excessive speed, Snow chains should be installed on front under-inflation, or excessive loading, either • • Use single-sided snow chains only. separately or in combination, can cause wheels only. Use only Volvo approved • Always follow the chain manufactur- heat buildup and tire failure. snow chains. er's installation instructions carefully. • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" Install chains as tightly as possible and tires and wheels are installed and are of a retighten periodically. size different than the original tires and • Never exceed the chain manufactur- wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT er's specified maximum speed limit. be used. Sufficient clearances between (Under no circumstances should you chains and brakes, suspension and body exceed 31 mph (50 km/h). components must be maintained. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns • Some strap-on type chains will interfere when driving with snow chains. with brake components and therefore CANNOT be used. • The handling of the vehicle can be adversely affected when driving with All Wheel Drive models • : Snow chains chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as should only be installed on the front well as locked wheel braking. wheels. • Certain size tires may not allow the assembly of snow chains/traction devices. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow chain information.

309 09 Wheels and tires

09 Snow tires/studded tires5 Tire pressure monitoring - Introduction Owners who live in or regularly commute introduction Each tire, including the spare6 (if provided), through areas with sustained periods of snow Volvo provides two different systems to moni- should be checked monthly when cold and or icy driving conditions are strongly advised tor tire pressure: Tire Pressure Monitoring inflated to the inflation pressure recom- to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the System (TPMS) or Tire Monitor. mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the highest degree of traction. vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. Determining which tire monitoring (If your vehicle has tires of a different size Tires for winter use: system is in your vehicle than the size indicated on the vehicle placard • It is important to install winter tires on all To see which system is installed in your vehi- or tire inflation pressure label, you should four wheels to help retain traction during cle, press the MY CAR button on the center determine the proper tire inflation pressure for cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail- console. Go to Settings Car settings. those tires.) ure to do so could reduce traction to an unsafe level or adversely affect handling. • If your vehicle has a menu called Tire As an added safety feature, your vehicle has monitoring, see Tire Monitor - introduc- been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- Do not mix tires of different design as this • ing system that illuminates a low tire pressure could also negatively affect overall tire tion (p. 315). road grip. • If your vehicle has a menu called Tire telltale ( ) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, Winter tires wear more quickly on dry pressure, see Tire Pressure Monitoring • when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, roads in warm weather. They should be System (TPMS) – general information you should stop and check your tires as soon removed when the winter driving season (p. 311). as possible, and inflate them to the proper has ended. pressure. • Studded tires should be run-in 300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during which Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire the vehicle should be driven as smoothly causes the tire to overheat and can lead to as possible to give the studs the opportu- tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel nity to seat properly in the tires. The tires efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect should have the same rotational direction the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. throughout their entire lifetime. Please note that a tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for proper tire NOTE maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if Please consult state or provincial regula- under-inflation has not reached the level to tions restricting the use of studded winter tires before installing such tires.

5 Where permitted

310 09 Wheels and tires

09 trigger illumination of the system's low tire NOTE Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure telltale. (TPMS) – general information The system indicates low tire pressure but Your vehicle has also been equipped with a does not replace normal tire maintenance. TPMS uses sensors mounted in the tire valves TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when For information on correct tire pressure, to check inflation pressure levels. When the the system is not operating properly. The please refer to the tire inflation pressure vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately monitoring system's malfunction indicator is table (see Tire inflation – pressure table 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors combined with the low tire pressure telltale. (p. 305)), the tire inflation pressure placard transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver located on the driver's side B-pillar (the located in the vehicle. When the system detects a malfunction, the structural member at the side of the vehi- telltale will flash for approximately one minute cle, at the rear of the driver's door open- NOTE and then remain continuously illuminated. ing) or consult your Volvo retailer. This sequence will continue upon subsequent USA – FCC ID: KR5S180052050 vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction WARNING This device complies with part 15 of the exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu- FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol- minated, the system may not be able to Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to lowing conditions: (1) This device may not detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of cause harmful interference, and (2) this the vehicle. device must accept any interference System malfunctions may occur for a variety received, including interference that may of reasons, including the installation of cause undesired operation. replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the tire pressure When low inflation pressure is detected or if a monitoring system from functioning properly. sensor is not functioning properly, TPMS will Always check the system's malfunction tell- light up the tire pressure warning light ( ) tale after replacing one or more tires or (also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the panel and will display one of the following replacement or alternate tires and wheels messages: Tire pressure low, Tire needs allow the system to continue to function air now or Tire press. syst Service properly. required.

6 Available as an accessory }} 311 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 NOTE Tire Pressure Monitoring System CAUTION (TPMS) – changing wheels If a malfunction occurs in the system, the When inflating tires with TPMS sensors, tire pressure warning light will flash for Please keep the following in mind when press the pump's mouthpiece straight approximately 1 minute and then remain onto the valve to help avoid bending or changing or replacing the factory installed illuminated. Tire press. syst Service otherwise damaging the valve. required will be displayed. TPMS wheels/tires on the vehicle: Not all aftermarket wheels are equipped • CAUTION Related information with TPMS sensors in the valves. • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) • If the vehicle is equipped with a tempo- • After inflating the tires, always reinstall – recalibrating (p. 313) rary spare tire, this tire does not have a the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) TPMS sensor. – messages (p. 314) • If wheels without TPMS sensors are • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal mounted on the vehicle, a text message caps could corrode and become diffi- • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) cult to remove. – activating/deactivating (p. 314) will displayed in the instrument panel each time the vehicle is driven above • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 20 mph (30 km/h) for 10 minutes or more. – changing wheels (p. 312) NOTE • Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, the warning message should not • If you change to tires with a different reappear. If the message is still displayed, dimension than the factory-installed drive the vehicle for several minutes at a ones, the TPMS system must be speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to reconfigured for these tires. This must erase the message. be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be fitted on all wheels used on the vehi- • If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen- cle, including winter tires. Volvo does not sor is moved to another wheel, the recommend moving sensors back and sensor's seal, nut, and valve core forth between sets of wheels. should be replaced. • When installing TPMS sensors, the vehicle must be parked for at least 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a TPMS error message will be displayed.

312 09 Wheels and tires

Related information Tire Pressure Monitoring System 5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above 09 • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (TPMS) – recalibrating 20 mph (30 km/h) continuously for at – general information (p. 311) In certain cases, it may be necessary to recali- least 10 minutes. • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) brate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom- > Calibration is done automatically once – recalibrating (p. 313) mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla- initiated by the driver and the system • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tion pressure table in Tire inflation – pressure does not give any confirmation when – messages (p. 314) table (p. 305)), for example, if higher inflation calibration is finished. pressure is necessary when transporting • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The new pressures are used until step 1-5 heavy loads, etc. – activating/deactivating (p. 314) above are repeated. Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models Related information only)* • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) This is done in the vehicle's menu system. – general information (p. 311) To recalibrate: • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – messages (p. 314) 1. Switch off the engine. • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure – activating/deactivating (p. 314) and put the ignition in mode I or II (see Ignition modes (p. 77) for additional infor- • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – changing wheels (p. 312) mation). • My Car – introduction (p. 74) 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings Car settings Tire pressure. 4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire pressure and press OK/MENU again.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 313 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Tire Pressure Monitoring System NOTE (TPMS) – activating/deactivating (TPMS) – messages • Tire monitoring systems use a tem- Activating/deactivating TPMS Erasing warning messages perature compensated pressure value. (Canadian models only) When a low tire pressure warning message This pressure value is dependent on tire temperature and ambient tempera- 1. Switch off the engine. has been displayed and the tire pressure ture, which can differ from the recom- 2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see Igni- warning light in the instrument panell ( ) mended cold tire pressure in the tire tion modes (p. 77) for additional informa- has come on: inflation table and on the tire pressure tion). 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the placard located on the driver's side B- inflation pressure of all four tires. pillar (the structural member at the 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con- side of the vehicle, at the rear of the sole control panel and select Settings 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pres- driver's door opening). This means Car settings Tire pressure sure (consult the tire pressure placard that it may sometimes be necessary to located on the driver's side B-pillar (the inflate them slightly above the recom- 4. Select Tire monitoring and press OK/ structural member at the side of the vehi- mended cold pressure value MENU to turn the system on or off. cle, at the rear of the driver's door open- (approx. 3-4 psi or 0.2-0.3 bar) in order ing) or the inflation pressure table, see to reset a low tire pressure warning. Related information Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305). • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) • To help avoid incorrect tire inflation – general information (p. 311) 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to pressure, if possible only inflate the drive the vehicle for several minutes at a tires when they are cold. The tires are speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This considered to be cold when they have will erase the warning text and the telltale the same temperature as the sur- will go out. rounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot.

314 09 Wheels and tires

09 CAUTION Tire Monitor - introduction NOTE Tire Monitor uses the rotational speed of the After inflating the tires, always reinstall If a malfunction occurs in the system, the • tires in combination with signal analysis of the the valve cap to help avoid damage to tire pressure warning light will flash for ABS sensor signals to determine if they are the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. approximately 1 minute and then remain properly inflated. illuminated. Tire press. syst Service • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal required will be displayed. caps could corrode and become diffi- When a tire is under-inflated, its diameter cult to remove. (and consequently also its rotational speed) changes. By comparing the individual tires NOTE with each other it is possible to determine if WARNING The system indicates low tire pressure but one or more tires are under inflated. does not replace normal tire maintenance. • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead When low inflation pressure is detected or if For information on correct tire pressure, to tire failure, resulting in a loss of con- the system is not functioning properly, Tire please refer to the tire inflation pressure trol of the vehicle. table (see Tire inflation – pressure table Monitor will light up the tire pressure warning Tire monitoring systems cannot indi- (p. 305)), the tire inflation pressure placard • light ( ) (also referred to as a telltale) in located on the driver's side B-pillar (the cate sudden tire damage caused by the instrument panel and will display one of structural member at the side of the vehi- external factors (e.g., a blowout) in the following messages in the text window, cle, at the rear of the driver's door open- advance. for example: Tire pressure low Check rear ing) or consult your Volvo retailer. right tire7 or Tire press. syst Service Related information required. Related information • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Tire pressure monitoring - introduction If two or more tires have low pressure or if the • – general information (p. 311) (p. 310) system cannot determine which tire has low Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) • pressure, a general text (Tire pressure low – recalibrating (p. 313) Check tires) will be displayed. • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – activating/deactivating (p. 314) • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – changing wheels (p. 312) • Tire pressure monitoring - introduction (p. 310) • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)

7 That last part of this message varies, depending on the tire(s) effected.

315 09 Wheels and tires

09 Calibrating Tire Monitor NOTE Tire Monitor status information In order for Tire Monitor to work correctly, tire The current status of the system and the tires Always remember to calibrate Tire Monitor pressure reference values must be set. This when the wheels have been changed or is indicated by color-coded graphics. must be done each time wheels or tire pres- the tire pressure has been corrected This status can be displayed by pressing the sures are changed. according to tire pressure placard or tire pressure table. If correct reference values MY CAR button on the center console and Calibration have not been set, the system cannot going to Settings Car settings Tire 1. Switch off the engine. issue low tire pressure alerts correctly. monitoring. 2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure The following color-coded graphics indicate: (consult tire pressure placard located on All green: the system is operational and the driver's side B-pillar (the structural • all tire pressures are at or above the rec- member at the side of the vehicle) and ommended levels. put the ignition in mode II, see Ignition modes (p. 77). • One yellow wheel: the tire indicated is under-inflated. 3. Press the MY CAR button on the center All wheels yellow: two or more tires are console control panel and select Settings • under-inflated Car settings Tire monitoring. • All wheels gray: the system is currently 4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire unavailable. It might be necessary to pressure and press OK/MENU again. drive at a speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h) for several minutes for the sys- 5. Drive away. tem to become operational. > The calibration process will be comple- All wheels gray in combination with the ted while driving and will be interrupted • message Tire press. syst Service if the vehicle is parked and the engine required and the telltale in the instru- is switched off. Calibration continues ment panel ( ) is illuminated: the automatically when driving resumes. system is not functioning correctly. Have The system will not give any confirma- it checked by a trained and qualified tion when calibration is finished Volvo service technician. although it will state if calibration fails. • All wheels gray in combination with the The new reference values will be used until message Tire press. syst currently steps 1-5 stated above are repeated. unavailable and the telltale in the instrument panel ( ) is illuminated:

316 09 Wheels and tires

09 the system is temporarily unavailable. It Tire Monitor – messages NOTE should become operational again shortly. When low tire pressure has been detected, a To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pres- Related information message will be displayed and the tire pressure, only inflate the tires when they are sure warning telltale in the instrument panel • Tire Monitor – messages (p. 317) cold. The tires are considered to be cold will illuminate. when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem- Erasing warning messages perature is normally reached after the vehi- To erase a low tire pressure message and cle has been parked for at least 3 hours. turn off the telltale: After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the be hot. inflation pressure of all four tires (see the article "Tire inflation – checking pressure"). CAUTION 2. Re-inflate the tires to the correct pressure • After inflating the tires, always reinstall (consult the tire pressure placard located the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal rear of the driver's door opening) or the caps could corrode and become diffi- inflation pressure table, see Tire inflation – cult to remove. pressure table (p. 305). 3. Recalibrate Tire Monitor, see Calibrating WARNING Tire Monitor (p. 316). • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle. • Tire monitoring systems cannot indicate sudden tire damage caused by external factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance.

}} 317 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 Related information Tire sealing system* – general console in the rear seat and in the cargo • Tire Monitor – messages (p. 317) information area*. • Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 302) The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing Accessing the tire sealing system system that enables you to temporarily seal a • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305) The tire sealing system is stowed under the hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat floor of the cargo area. To access it: tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. 1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. 2. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE • The tire sealing system is only intended to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not the sidewall. • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be repaired with the tire sealing system. • After use, stow the tire sealing system properly to help prevent rattling. Introduction The tire sealing system consists of an air compressor, a container for the sealing compound, wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical system via one of the 12- volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve.

NOTE The tire sealing system's compressor has been tested and approved by Volvo.

The 12-volt sockets are located in the front tunnel console, on the rear side of the center

318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Wheels and tires

09 WARNING Tire sealing system–temporarily NOTE repairing a flat tire • After using the tire sealing system, the Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, vehicle should not be driven farther etc.) from the tire before using the sealing than approximately 120 miles (200 system. km). • Have the tire inspected by a trained • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is and qualified Volvo service technician checked and adjusted if necessary. as soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must WARNING be replaced. • Never leave the tire sealing system • The vehicle should not be driven faster unattended when it is operating. than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire that has been temporarily repaired • Keep the tire sealing system away with the tire sealing system. from children. • After using the tire sealing system, • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off drive carefully and avoid abrupt steer- the road and away from moving traffic. ing maneuvers and sudden stops. • Apply the parking brake.

Related information • Tire sealing system* – overview (p. 320) • Tire sealing system* – inflating tires (p. 323) Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two • Tire sealing system* – sealing compound stages: container (p. 324) • Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping • Tire sealing system* – sealing hole sealing compound into the tire. The car is (p. 321) then driven a short distance to distribute • Tire sealing system – checking inflation the sealing compound in the tire. pressure (p. 323) • Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 137) • 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 138)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tire sealing system* – overview WARNING • Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing unless directed to do so by medical Please keep the following points in mind personnel. Get medical attention. system that enables you to temporarily seal a when using the tire sealing system: hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat • Disposal: Dispose of this material and tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in its container to a hazardous or special the illustration) contains 1) rubber waste collection point. latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These substances are harmful if swallowed. NOTE • The contents of this bottle may cause allergic skin reactions or otherwise be Do not break the seal on the bottle. This potentially harmful to the respiratory occurs automatically when the bottle is tract, the skin, the central nervous sys- screwed into the holder. tem, and the eyes. Precautions: Related information • Keep out of reach of children. • Tire sealing system* – general information (p. 318) • Do not ingest the contents. Tire sealing system* – inflating tires Avoid prolonged or repeated contact • • (p. 323) with the skin. Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the Tire sealing system – checking inflation Wash thoroughly after handling. • compressor) • pressure (p. 323) First aid: On/Off switch • Tire sealing system* – sealing hole Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with (p. 321) Electrical wire • soap and water. Get medical attention • Tire sealing system* – sealing compound Bottle holder (orange cover) if symptoms occur. container (p. 324) • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for Protective hose cover least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi- Air release knob cal attention if symptoms occur. Hose • Inhalation: Move the exposed person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get Bottle with sealing compound medical attention. Air pressure gauge

320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tire sealing system* – sealing hole WARNING WARNING The tire sealing system can be used to tem- The bottle is equipped with a catch to The vehicle´s engine should be running porarily seal a hole in the tread surface of a keep it securely in place and help prevent when the tire sealing system is used to tire. sealing compound leakage. Once in place, avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, Stage 1: Sealing the hole be done by a trained and qualified Volvo or outdoors, before using the system. 1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it service technician. to the steering wheel hub where it will be 8. Start the tire sealing system’s compres- clearly visible to the driver. 5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s sor by pressing the on/off switch to posi- 2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- inflation valve and screw the tire sealing tion I. tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be system’s hose connector onto the valve pressed down). as tightly as possible by hand. 6. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest WARNING 12-volt socket in the vehicle. Contact with the sealing compound may cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, NOTE wash the affected area immediately with soap and water. Be sure that none of the other 12-volt sockets is being used while the compressor is in operation. 3. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle 7. Start the vehicle’s engine. of sealing compound.

NOTE Do not break the seal on the bottle. This occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder.

4. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 WARNING CAUTION CAUTION • Never stand next to the tire being infla- The compressor should not be used for If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire ted when the compressor is in opera- more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the tion. overheating. use of the sealing compound may lead to incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. switch off the compressor immediately. WARNING Use the tire sealing system to check and • If there is visible damage to the sidewall adjust the damaged tire's inflation pres- If the pressure remains below 22 psi sure. or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. (1.8 bar) after approximately seven The vehicle should not be driven if this minutes, turn off the compressor. In this occurs. Contact a towing service or case, the hole is too large to be sealed and NOTE Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if the vehicle should not be driven. applicable. • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a convenient place as it will soon be 10. Switch off the compressor and discon- used again to check the tire’s inflation nect the electrical wire from the 12-volt NOTE pressure. socket. The air pressure gauge will temporarily • The empty bottle of sealing compound show an increase in pressure to approxi- 11. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation cannot be removed from the bottle mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing valve and reinstall the valve cap. holder. Consult a trained and qualified compound is being pumped into the tire. Volvo service technician to have the The pressure should return to a normal CAUTION bottle removed and properly disposed level after approximately 30 seconds. of. • After inflating the tires, always reinstall 9. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to the valve cap to help avoid damage to between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. WARNING Switch off the compressor briefly to get a • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering clear reading from the pressure gauge. could corrode and become difficult to behavior, or noises should occur while remove. driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a safe place. Recheck the tire for 12. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi- bumps, cracks, or other visible damage, and recheck its inflation pressure. If the mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute continue driving. Have the vehicle towed the sealing compound in the tire. to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

322 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tire sealing system – checking Tire sealing system* – inflating tires WARNING inflation pressure The tire sealing system can be used to inflate • The vehicle’s engine should be running The tire sealing system can also be used to the tires. when the tire sealing system is used to check the tires' inflation pressure. To do so: avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated 1. Park the car in a safe place. place, or outdoors, before using the 1. Connect the tire sealing system as system. The parking brake should be described in stage 1, see Tire sealing 2. The compressor should be switched off. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position securely applied and the gear selector system* – sealing hole (p. 321). should be in the P (park) position. 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be 2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this Children should never be left unatten- pressed down). • chapter for the correct inflation pressure. ded in the vehicle when the engine is If the tire needs to be inflated, start the 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. running. tire sealing system’s compressor. If necessary, release air from the tire by turning 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s 7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the the air release knob counterclockwise. inflation valve and screw the hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possi- gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly ble by hand. to get a clear reading from the pressure CAUTION gauge. 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest The compressor should not be used for 8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid 12-volt socket in the vehicle. chapter for the correct inflation pressure. overheating. 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s compressor (press WARNING the on/off switch to position I). If necessary, release air from the tire by turning If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 hour, check the inflation pressure in the the air release knob counterclockwise. damaged tire again before continuing.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 323 09 Wheels and tires

09 CAUTION Tire sealing system* – sealing compound container The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid The sealing compound container must be overheating. replaced if the tire sealing system has been used to repair a tire or if the container’s expi- ration date has passed (see the date on 9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off decal). switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached. Replacing the sealing compound 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation container valve and reinstall the valve cap. NOTE CAUTION • After use, the sealing compound bot- • After inflating the tires, always reinstall tle, the hose, and certain other system the valve cap to help avoid damage to components must be replaced. Please the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps could corrode and become difficult to • If the sealing compound bottle’s expi- remove. ration date has passed, please take it to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station that can properly dispose of harmful 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the substances. 12-volt socket.

324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 10 Maintenance and servicing

Maintenance – introduction performed anytime a malfunction is observed Periodic maintenance helps minimize Periodic maintenance will help keep your or suspected. emissions vehicle running well. Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada In accordance with applicable U.S. and NOTE Introduction 10 Canadian regulations, the following list of • Refer to your Warranty and Service The maintenance services contain several warranties is provided. checks that require special instruments and Records Information booklet for a tools and therefore must be performed by a • New Vehicle Limited Warranty comprehensive service and mainte- qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty nance schedule up to 150,000 miles (240,000 km). This program contains top condition, specify time-tested and proven • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. inspections and services necessary for • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint the proper function of your vehicle and The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S. Systems Limited Warranty includes components that affect vehi- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle • Emission Design and Defect Warranty cle emissions. manufacturers to furnish written instructions • Emission Performance Warranty • The Warranty and Service Records to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper Information booklet also contains servicing and function of the components that These are the federal warranties; other war- detailed information concerning the control emissions. These services, which are ranties are provided as required by state/ warranties that apply to your vehicle. listed in the "Warranty and Service Records provincial law. Refer to your separate War- ranty and Service Records Information book- Information" booklet, are not covered by the Related information warranty. You will be required to pay for labor let for detailed information concerning each Climate – general information (p. 122) and material used. of the warranties. • Maintenance Your Volvo passed several major inspections before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, many of which will positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should also be

326 10 Maintenance and servicing

Maintenance – owner maintenance of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- salt residues. vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents and Service Records Information booklet. at the base of the windshield, and from other 10 The following points can be carried out places where they may collect. between the normally scheduled maintenance services. NOTE Owner maintenance Complete service information for qualified technicians is available online for purchase Each time the car is refueled: or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. • Check the engine oil level. • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, Related information headlights, and taillights. • Maintenance – opening/closing hood Monthly: (p. 331) • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. • Engine compartment – overview (p. 332) Inspect the tires for wear. • Engine compartment – coolant (p. 335) • Check that engine coolant and other fluid • Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 333) levels are between the indicated "min" and "max" markings. • Engine compartment – power steering fluid (p. 337) • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass cleaner and soft paper towels. • Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 348) • Wipe driver information displays with a soft cloth. • Cleaning the interior (p. 366) • Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- • Washing the car (p. 364) rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose • Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 302) terminal connector, or a battery near the • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295) end of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional information. As needed: Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup

327 10 Maintenance and servicing

Maintenance – hoisting When the vehicle is hoisted, the jack or garage lift must be positioned in the correct lifting points. 10 Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, it Related information should be placed: • Changing a wheel – removing wheel Front: under either of the two reinforced (p. 296) areas under the front section of the vehicle, not under to jack attachment points (the outermost points shown in the illustration). Rear: Under the jack attachment points. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Always use axle stands or similar structures.

328 10 Maintenance and servicing

Onboard Diagnostic System • If you had recent service that required Booking service and repairs OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized disconnecting the battery, OBD II diag- Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes set- engine management system. It stores diagnostic information may be incomplete ting up a time for service, maintenance and/or nostic information about your vehicle's emis- and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle repairs directly from the vehicle quick and that is not ready may fail inspection. sion controls. It can light the Check Engine convenient. 10 light (MIL) if it detects an emission control How can I prepare for my next OBD II "fault." A "fault" is a component or system emission inspection? Prerequisites that is not performing within an expected • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or • The owner (primary driver) must have a range. A fault may be permanent or tempo- was lit but went out without service, have valid Volvo ID. See Volvo ID (p. 21) for rary. OBD II will store a message about any your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, additional information. fault. serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. • The vehicle must be connected to the • If you recently had service for a lit Check Internet using a paired Bluetooth® cell Emission inspection readiness Engine light, or if you had service that phone. See your Sensus Infotainment How do states use OBD II for emission required disconnecting the battery, a supplement for information on pairing a inspections? period of driving is necessary to bring the cell phone. On models equipped with Volvo On Call (VOC)*, you can connect to Many states connect a computer directly to a OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. the Internet using your separate VOC vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-and- go/highway driving are typically needed data plan. Refer to your separate Volvo then read "faults." In some states, this type of On Call manual. inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission to allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more test. • By default, the retailer where you pur- information on planning a trip. chased your vehicle will be your preferred How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with (primary) retailer/Volvo authorized work- inspection? your vehicle's maintenance schedule. shop who will perform service and repairs Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- on your vehicle. To change the preferred tion for any of the following reasons. retailer, go to Dealer Locator at volvocars.com and select a retailer, click If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your • on Service Scheduler and book an vehicle may fail inspection. appointment at the new preferred retailer. If your vehicle's Check Engine light was • In order to be guided through the on- lit, but went out without any action on • screen steps, the menu alternative your part, OBD II will still have a recorded Display notifications must be activated. fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in CSB menu access your area. Once the prerequisites have been established, all CSB-related menus can be }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| accessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU On-screen service messages vehicle's instrument panel will also be and then selecting Maintenance & repair. turned off remotely by Volvo. No: No other messages will be displayed Booking information and data from the • on the Sensus screen but the Service 10 vehicle Reminder Light on the vehicle's instru- If you request an appointment from your vehi- ment panel will stay on. If you have cle, with your consent, booking information answered "No", service can still be and data about your vehicle1 will be transmit- booked manually (see the following sec- ted to your preferred retailer. tion). Using the service • Postpone: The pop-up menu will be displayed that next time the engine is Once the prerequisites have been estab- started. lished, all CSB-related menus can be accessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU Booking service or repairs manually On-screen service message and then selecting Maintenance & repair. Access your Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler The pop-up service alert menu offers the fol- portal from a smartphone or a computer to If the time for the next regularly scheduled lowing alternatives: select a day and time that suits you and service is approaching, if the vehicle requires specify any other service requests that you Yes: The vehicle will transmit a booking certain types of repairs or if a system needs • may have. When you have submitted your request as well as vehicle data directly to to be checked, a message will be displayed. request, it will be entered into the retailer's your preferred retailer. In return, you will You will then by guided through the steps booking portal and you will receive immediate required to book service or repairs. receive an email from this retailer with a link to their booking portal. From a smart- confirmation online and via email. phone or a computer, you can select a day and time that suits you and specify My Appointments any other service requests that you may This displays booking information. have. When you have submitted your request, it will be entered into the retail- – Select Maintenance & repair My er's booking portal and you will receive Appointments. immediate confirmation online and via email. The service reminder light in the Transmitting vehicle data In order for a retailer to access vehicle data, the information is initially sent to a central Volvo database (not directly to your retailer)

1 This information includes: service requirements, status of various functions, odometer reading and the vehicle's VIN number and software version.

330 10 Maintenance and servicing where any retailer can access or search for Maintenance – opening/closing hood WARNING this information using your vehicle's VIN num- The hood is opened by first releasing the lock ber. This number can be found in your war- Check that the hood locks properly when from the passenger compartment and then closed. ranty booklet or on the dashboard at the pressing the release control. lower left corner of the windshield. 10 Opening and closing the hood Related information – Maintenance & repair Send Select • Maintenance – owner maintenance vehicle data. (p. 327) Booking information and vehicle data • Engine compartment – overview (p. 332) When you opt to book service from your vehicle, booking information and vehicle data will be transmitted. Vehicle data consists of a number of parameters in the following areas: • Service requirements • Function status • Fluid levels • Odometer reading (mileage) • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) • The vehicle's software version Related information • Volvo ID (p. 21)

Turn the handle located under the left side of the dash approximately 20-25 degrees clockwise to release the hood lock. Lift the hood slightly. Press the release control (located under the right front edge of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood.

331 10 Maintenance and servicing

Engine compartment – overview WARNING The overview shows the main inspection The cooling fan (located at the front of the points in the engine compartment. engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate (for up to 10 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off.

WARNING Before performing any operations in the engine compartment, the ignition should always be completely switched off (in Engine compartment - 4-cylinder engines only mode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 77)) and there should be no remote keys in the pas- Filler cap-engine oil senger compartment. The gear selector should be in the P (park) position. If the Coolant expansion tank engine has been running, wait until it has Coolant expansion tank Radiator cooled before touching any components in the engine compartment. Power steering fluid reservoir Brake fluid reservoir The distributor ignition system operates at Dipstick-engine oil very high voltages. Special safety precau- Battery tions must be followed to prevent injury. Always turn the ignition off when: Filler cap-engine oil Relay/fuse box Replacing distributor ignition compo- Cover over brake fluid reservoir • Washer fluid reservoir nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc. Battery Air cleaner • Do not touch any part of the distributor ignition system while the engine is run- Relay/fuse box The appearance of the engine compartment ning. This may result in unintended movements and body injury. Washer fluid reservoir may vary depending on engine model.

332 10 Maintenance and servicing

Related information Engine compartment – engine oil CAUTION • Maintenance – opening/closing hood The correct oil must be used for the stated oil Not checking the oil level regularly can (p. 331) change (service) intervals to apply. • result in serious engine damage if the • Maintenance – owner maintenance The oil level on 4-cylinder engines is checked oil level becomes too low. (p. 327) 10 electronically and is checked using a dipstick • Oil that is lower than the specified on 5- and 6-cylinder engines. quality can damage the engine. Checking the engine oil (5- and 6- • Volvo does not recommend the use of cylinder engines) oil additives. The oil level should be checked at regular • Always add oil of the same type and intervals, particularly during the period up to viscosity as already used. the first scheduled maintenance service. • Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This • See Oil specifications (p. 381) for oil could cause an increase in oil con- specifications. sumption. • Also, refer to the Warranty and Service • Oil changes should be carried out by a Records information booklet for informa- trained and qualified Volvo service tion on oil change intervals and oil speci- technician. fications.

}} 333 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Checking and adding oil Electronic oil level sensor (4-cylinder engines only)

10 G021737 G021734 The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX Location of the filler cap and dipstick marks on the dipstick Checking the oil Oil filler cap NOTE 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a No action is necessary until a message is dis- lint-free rag. Before checking the oil: played, see the following illustration. • The car should be parked on a level 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and surface. check the oil level. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. • If the engine is warm, wait for at least 10 – 15 minutes after the engine has 3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to been switched off. the MIN mark, add approximately 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil. 4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

334 10 Maintenance and servicing

WARNING Engine compartment – coolant Normally, the coolant does not need to be Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces. changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 10 Electronically checking the oil level The oil level should be checked at regular Level check and filling intervals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service. To check the oil level: 1. Activate ignition mode II, see Ignition Left: digital instrument panel*, Right: analog modes (p. 77). instrument panel 2. Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering Message wheel lever until Oil level is displayed. Oil level > The oil level will be displayed. The oil level can be checked when the engine NOTE is not running by scrolling to the oil level sensor using the thumb wheel on the left steering • The system cannot detect changes in Location of the coolant reservoir wheel lever. the oil level immediately. The vehicle See Fuel tank volume – specification and vol- must be driven approximately 20 miles ume (p. 384) for information on cooling sys- (30 km) or have been parked on level tem capacities. CAUTION ground with the engine off for • If Oil service required is displayed, 5 minutes before the oil level reading the oil level may be too high. Take the will be correct. vehicle to an authorized Volvo work- • If the necessary conditions are not met shop as soon as possible. for checking the oil level electronically • If the oil level sensor indicates that the (time interval after the engine was level is too low, using the correct oil, switched off, if the vehicle is parked on top up with the amount of oil indicated an incline, etc.), No values available as soon as possible, see oil specifica- will be displayed. This does not indi- tions (p. 381). cate a problem with the oil level sensor.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 335 10 Maintenance and servicing

CAUTION WARNING Engine compartment – brake fluid The brake fluid should always be between the If necessary, top up the cooling sys- Never remove the expansion tank cap • • MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res- tem with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Anti- while the engine is warm. Wait until the ervoir. freeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and engine cools. 10 antifreeze). • If it is necessary to top off the coolant • Different types of antifreeze/coolant when the engine is warm, unscrew the may not be mixed. expansion tank cap slowly so that the • If the cooling system is drained, it overpressure dissipates. should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze. • The cooling system must always be kept filled to the correct level, and the level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there can be high local temperatures in the Location of the brake fluid reservoir engine which could result in damage. Check coolant regularly! • Do not top up with water only. This reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it should freeze. • Do not use chlorinated tap water in the vehicle's cooling system.

336 10 Maintenance and servicing

Checking the level Filling Engine compartment – power steering The fluid reservoir is concealed under the 1. Turn and open the cover. fluid round cover at the rear of the engine com- 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the The fluid level must be between the MIN and partment. The round cover must be removed fluid. The level must be between the MIN MAX marks. For capacities and recom- first before the reservoir cap can be and MAX marks. mended fluid grade, see Fuel tank volume – 10 accessed. specification and volume (p. 384). Check, without removing the cap, that there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (>280 °C). Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. When driving under extremely hard conditions (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Check the level frequently. It does not nor- Always entrust brake fluid changing to a mally require changing. trained and qualified Volvo service technician. WARNING WARNING If a problem should occur in the power • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark steering system or if the vehicle has no in the reservoir or if a brake-related electrical current and must be towed, it is message is shown in the information still possible to steer the vehicle. However, display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car keep in mind that greater effort will be towed to a trained and qualified Volvo required to turn the steering wheel. service technician and have the brake system inspected. • Dot 4 should never be mixed with any other type of brake fluid.

}} 337 10 Maintenance and servicing

CAUTION Bulbs – introduction NOTE Certain bulbs can be replaced by the vehicle's Keep the area around the power steering For information regarding any bulbs owner. However, the bulbs on the following • fluid reservoir clean when checking. not mentioned in this section, please list should only be replaced by a trained and contact your Volvo retailer or a trained 10 qualified Volvo service technician. and authorized Volvo service techni- All bulb specifications are listed in Bulbs – cian. specifications (p. 345). • Always switch off the ignition before starting to replace a bulb. • Active Bending Lights • If an error message remains in the dis- Front parking lights • play after a faulty bulb has been • Front side marker lights replaced, contact an authorized Volvo • Cornering lights workshop. • Turn signals in the door mirrors • Condensation may form temporarily on the inside of the lenses of exterior Approach lighting in the door mirrors • lights such as headlights, fog lights, or • Interior lighting (except for the front foot- taillights. This is normal and the lights well lighting) are designed to withstand moisture. • Rear parking lights/side marker lights Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a LED bulbs • short time. • The optional Active Bending Light bulbs contain trace amounts of mer- cury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

338 10 Maintenance and servicing

CAUTION • Bulbs – cargo area lighting (p. 344) Bulbs – headlight housing Bulbs – license plate lighting (p. 344) The entire headlight housing must be lifted Never touch the glass of bulbs with your • fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers out when replacing all front bulbs. vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector, which will damage Removing the headlight housing 10 it.

WARNING • The engine should not be running when changing bulbs. • If the engine has been running just prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight housing, please keep in mind that components in the engine compart- Pull out the headlight housing's locking ment will be hot. pins. Remove the headlight housing by alterna- WARNING tively pulling the front and rear edges until it can be lifted out. • Active Bending Lights* – due to the high voltage used by these headlights, these bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Turn off the lights and remove the remote key from the ignition before changing any bulbs.

Related information • Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 339) • Bulbs – taillight housing (p. 343) • Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 345)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 339 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| CAUTION 2. Reinstall the headlight housing and lock- Bulbs – cover ing pins. The short locking pin should be The larger cover has to be removed in order When disconnecting the connector, pull on closest to the grille. Check that they are to change the high/low beam headlight bulbs. the connector itself and not on the wiring. correctly inserted. Removing the cover to access the bulbs 10 The headlight housing must be properly Unplug the wiring connector by holding in place and the wiring connector cor- down the clip with your thumb. rectly reconnected before the lighting is Pull the connector out with the other switched on or the remote key is inserted hand. into the ignition slot. 5. Lift out the headlight housing and place it 3. Check that the lights function properly. on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. Related information 6. Replace the defective bulb(s). • Bulbs – introduction (p. 338) • Bulbs – cover (p. 340) Reinserting the headlight housing • Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

NOTE Before starting to replace a bulb, see Bulbs – introduction (p. 338).

1. Loosen the cover's four retaining screws (3-4 turns) with a Torx T20 tool (1). The screws should not be removed completely. 2. Push the cover to the side. 1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into place. 3. Remove the cover. Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

340 10 Maintenance and servicing

Related information Bulbs – low beam, Halogen Bulbs – high beam, Halogen • Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 339) The low beam bulb is concealed by the larger The high beam bulb is concealed behind the • Bulbs – low beam, Halogen (p. 341) cover. larger cover. Bulbs – high beam, Halogen (p. 341) • 10 • Bulbs – extra high beam (p. 342)

1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 339)). (p. 339)). 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see Bulbs – cover (p. 340)). Bulbs – cover (p. 340)). 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out. 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 5. The guide lug on the new bulb should be straight up when the bulb is inserted into 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and the holder and the bulb should snap into turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can place. only be secured in one position. 6. Put the cover back into position and rein- 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight stall the headlight housing. housing. Related information 7. Put the cover back into position and rein- • Bulbs – specifications (p. 345) stall the headlight housing. }} 341 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Related information Bulbs – extra high beam Related information • Bulbs – specifications (p. 345) The extra high beam bulb is concealed by the • Bulbs – specifications (p. 345) larger cover.

10 Extra high beam2

1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 339)). 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see Bulbs – cover (p. 340)). 3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be secured in one position. 6. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.

2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

342 10 Maintenance and servicing

Bulbs – front turn signals Related information Bulbs – taillight housing The turn signal bulb is concealed behind the • Bulbs – specifications (p. 345) The backup lights, fog lights and turn signals smaller cover. are replaced from inside the cargo area

1. Remove the headlight housing from the Brake light (LED) vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing Parking lights/side marker light (LED) (p. 339)). 2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight Turn signal out. Brake light (LED) 3. Pull the holder to access the bulb. Backup light 4. Press in the bulb and turn it to remove it from the holder. Rear fog light 5. Press and turn the new bulb into place. 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing. 7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.

}} 343 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Bulbs – license plate lighting Bulbs – cargo area lighting The license plate lighting is located next to The cargo area light is located in the ceiling the tailgate handle. liner.

1. Open the panel. 2. Pull the insulation in front of the bulb G031942 holder straight out. 3. Press down the catch and pull out the 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so bulb holder. that the bulb housing comes loose. 2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing 4. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it and pull it out. 2. Replace the bulb. in and turning it counterclockwise. 3. Replace the bulb. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press 5. Press a new bulb into place and turn it it back into the bulb housing. 4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and clockwise. tighten the screws. Related information 6. Hold down the catch and press the bulb • Bulbs – specifications (p. 345) holder back into place. Related information • Bulbs – specifications (p. 345) 7. Put the insulation and panel back in place. Related information • Bulbs – introduction (p. 338) • Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

344 10 Maintenance and servicing

Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting Bulbs – specifications Lighting func- Wat- Bulb The vanity mirror bulbs are located behind the The following bulbs can be replaced by the tion tage lens. vehicles owner. All other bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo Rear fog light 21 H21W LL Removing the lens service technician. 10 Backup light 21 H21W LL

Lighting func- Wat- Bulb Brake light 21 P21W LL tion tage Cargo area 5 SV8.5 Low beam (hal- 55 H11 LL lighting (length ogen) 43mm)

High beam (hal- 65 H9 Front footwell 3 W2, 1x9.5d ogen) lighting type T10 Extra high beam 55 H7 LL (models with NOTE Active Bending Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the side Lights*) department for the most up-to-date bulb specifications. of the lens and carefully pry up the lug on Front turn sig- 24 PY24W the edge. nals 2. Carefully detach and lift out the lens. Related information License plate 5 C5W LL • Bulbs – introduction (p. 338) 3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb lighting straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do not exert too much pressure on the bulb Vanity mirror 1.2 W2x4.6d with the pliers to help avoid damaging it. lighting type T5 Reinstalling the lens Glove compart- 5 SV8.5 1. Put the lens back into position. ment lighting (length 43mm) 2. Press it into place. Rear turn sig- 21 PY21W LL Related information nals • Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 345 10 Maintenance and servicing

Wiper blades – service position To put the windshiield wipers in the service Related information The windshield wiper blades must be in the position: • Engine compartment – washer fluid vertical (service) position for replacement, 1. Insert the remote key into the ignition (p. 348) washing or to lift them away from the wind- slot3 and press the START/STOP 10 shield when e.g., removing ice or snow. ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (see Ignition modes (p. 77) for detailed information about the ignition modes). 2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button again briefly to switch the ignition off. 3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 second. > The wipers will then move to the vertical (service) position on the windshield. The wipers can be returned to the normal Wiper blades in service position position by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in CAUTION mode I (or by starting the engine). Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in position before attempting to move them CAUTION to the service position. If the wiper arms have been folded out from the windshield while in the service position, fold them back against the windshield before returning the wipers to the normal position to help avoid scratching the paint on the hood.

3 Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

346 10 Maintenance and servicing

Wiper blades – windshield With the wipers in the service position, The wiper blades should be replaced regularly fold out the wiper arm from the wind- for best effect. shield. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper The windshield wiper blades must be in the blade straight out, parallel with the wiper 10 vertical (service) position for replacement, arm. washing or to lift them away from the windshield when e.g., removing ice or snow. Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks into place. Replacing the windshield wiper blades Check that the blade is securely in place.

4. Press the wipers back against the windshield. To return the wipers from the service position to the normal position, fold the wipers back against the windshield and press the START/ STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or start the engine). Cleaning Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the NOTE wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and The windshield wiper blades are different lukewarm soap solution or car washing deter- lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is gent. longer than the one on the passenger side. Related information • Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 348) • Wiper blades – service position (p. 346)

347 10 Maintenance and servicing

Wiper blades – tailgate Engine compartment – washer fluid • 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters) The wiper blades should be replaced regularly Washer fluid helps keep the windshield and • 4.7 US qts (4.5 liters4) for best effect. headlights clean. During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled with windshield Related information 10 Replacing the tailgate wiper blade washer solvent containing antifreeze. Use • Wiper blades – service position (p. 346) Volvo Original Washer Fluid or the equivalent with a recommended pH value between 6 and 8. G032770

1. Fold the wiper arm outward. 2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at the arrow). Location of the washer fluid reservoir 3. Pull out the blade to release it from the wiper arm. The windshield and headlight washers share 4. Press the new wiper blade into place and a common reservoir. check that it seats securely. The washer fluid reservoir is located on the 5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tail- driver's side of the engine compartment. For gate window. capacities, see the printed Owner's Manual. Specification:Use a washer antifreeze rec- Related information ommended by Volvo, mixed with water. • Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 348) Volume:

4 Models without headlight washers

348 10 Maintenance and servicing

Battery – symbols Contains corrosive acid. Battery – handling There are information and warning symbols The battery's service life is affected by the on the battery. number of starts, if it has been discharged, driving style, driving conditions, weather con- Symbols on the battery ditions ,etc. 10 Wear protective goggles. Handling Risk of explosion • Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and tightened. • Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running (for example, when replacing the battery). Keep away from children. • If the battery is fully discharged a number Recycle properly of times, this may shorten its service life. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as the number of starts, driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery’s Avoid smoking, open starting capacity. flames, and/or sparks. • Because the battery’s starting capacity NOTE decreases with time, it may be necessary A used battery should be disposed of in an to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven environmentally responsible manner. Con- for an extended period of time or if the sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery vehicle is usually only driven short dis- See the owner's manual. to a recycling station. tances. • Never use a quick charger to charge the Related information battery. Only traditional types of battery • Battery – changing (p. 351) chargers should be used. • Battery – handling (p. 349) • Battery – maintenance (p. 350)

}} 349 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| CAUTION Related information Battery – maintenance • Battery – changing (p. 351) Proper battery maintenance can help prolong The infotainment system's energy-saving feature may not function correctly or at all, • Battery – maintenance (p. 350) its service life. and/or a message may be displayed if a • Battery – symbols (p. 349) 10 battery charger or jumper cables are not Maintenance connected properly. • Use a screw driver to open the caps or cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. • The negative terminal on the battery must never be used to connect a • If necessary, add distilled water. The level jumper cable or a battery charger. should never be above the indicator. Only the ground point on the chassis • The fluid level should be checked if the may be used. battery has been recharged. See Jump starting (p. 256) for an illustra- • After inspection, be sure the cap over tion and additional information. each battery cell or the cover is securely in place. WARNING • Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and properly tightened. Never expose the battery to open • Never disconnect the battery when the flame or electric spark. • engine is running, or when the key is in • Do not smoke near the battery. the ignition. This could damage the vehi- • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do cle's electrical system. not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, • The battery should be disconnected from skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If the vehicle when a battery charger is contact occurs, flush the affected area used directly on the battery. immediately with water. Obtain medi- To help keep the battery in good condi- cal help immediately if eyes are affec- • tion, the vehicle should be driven for at ted. least 15 minutes a week or connected to a charger with an automatic charging NOTE function. If the battery is fully discharged a number The life of the battery is shortened if it • becomes discharged repeatedly. of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps prolong its service life.

350 10 Maintenance and servicing

• The service life of a battery is affected by Battery – changing factors such as driving conditions and cli- When changing batteries, be sure to use the mate. Extreme cold may also further correct battery for your vehicle. Consult a decrease the battery’s starting capacity. Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo • Because the battery’s starting capacity service technician. 10 decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven Changing for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances.

CAUTION • Always use distilled or deionized water (battery water). • Never fill above the level mark in the cell.

Related information • Battery – changing (p. 351) • Battery – handling (p. 349) • Battery – symbols (p. 349)

WARNING Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence.

}} 351 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Removal Rally bar R-Design models* NOTE Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key from the ignition slot and wait at least When reinstalling the rally bar, tighten the screws to 22 ft lbs (30 Nm). 5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so 10 that all information in the vehicle's electrical system can be stored in the control modules. Installation 1. Lower the battery into the battery box. Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. Release the rubber molding so that the rear cover is free. Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable. Rally bar and bulkhead hatch Vehicles with the optional R-Design package Detach the red positive cable are equipped with a rally bar in the engine Detach the ventilation hose from the compartment that must be removed before 2. Move the battery inward and to the side battery the battery can be replaced. until it reaches the rear edge of the box. 1. Remove the hatch in the bulkhead on Loosen the screw holding the battery 3. Tighten the clamp that secures the bat- both sides of the engine compartment clamp. tery. (pry them up carefully with a plastic knife Move the battery to the side and lift it up. or similar object). 4. Connect the ventilation hose. 2. Remove the screw on each side of the > Be sure that it is correctly connected WARNING engine compartment holding the rally bar to the battery and the vent in the vehicle's body. PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! in place. Battery posts, terminals, and related 3. Lift out the rally bar. 5. Connect the red positive cable. accessories contain lead and lead com- > The battery can now be removed (see 6. Connect the black negative cable. pounds, chemicals known to the state of the instructions in the previous sec- 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). California to cause cancer and reproduc- tion). tive harm. Wash hands after handling. 8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal). • After a new battery has been installed (see the following section), reinstall the 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with rally bar in the reverse order. the clips. (See Removal).

352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

Related information Fuses – introduction Location of the fuseboxes • Battery – handling (p. 349) The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical • Battery – symbols (p. 349) components from overloading.

There are relay/fuseboxes located in the 10 engine compartment, the passenger compartment and the cargo area. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, a special fuse removal Engine compartment tool is located on the inside of the engine compartment fusebox cover. Under the glove compartment

2. From the side, examine the curved metal Under the glove compartment wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. Cargo area (under the floor) If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage (written on the Engine compartment cold zone (Start/ fuse). Stop only) If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

353 10 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses – engine compartment The fuses in the engine compartment protect e.g., engine and brake functions.

354 10 Maintenance and servicing

Engine compartment, upper Pos Function A Pos Function A

Engine compartment, front Circuit breaker: central 60 ABS valves 20 Engine compartment, lower electrical module in the cargo compartmentA Headlight washers 20 10

Positions Circuit breaker: central 60 Active Bending Lights- 10 These fuses are all located in the engine com- electrical module headlight leveling* partment box. Fuses in C are located under under the glove com- A . partmentA Central electrical mod- 20 A decal on the inside of the cover shows the ule (under the glove positions of the fuses. Circuit breaker: central 60 compartment) electrical module • Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/ under the glove com- ABS 5 circuit breakers and should only be partmentA removed or replaced by a trained and Adjustable steering 5 qualified Volvo service technician. – force* • Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be Engine Control Module 10 – changed at any time when necessary. (ECM), transmission, There is a special fuse removal tool on the Headed windshield*, 40 SRS underside of the cover. driver's side Heated washer noz- 10 Pos Function A Windshield wipers 30 zles* - Circuit breaker: central 50 – electrical module Lighting panel 5 under the glove com- Climate system 40 A partmentA blower - Headed windshield*, 40 Circuit breaker: central 50 - electrical module passenger's side under the glove com- - partment ABS pump 40 Relay coils 5

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 355 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A

Auxiliary lights* 20 4-cyl. engines: mass 10 Oil pump/crankcase 10 air meter, thermostat, ventilation heater/cool- 10 Horn 15 EVAP valve ant pump (5-cyl. engines) Relay coils, Engine 10 5-/6-cyl. engines: 15 Control Module (ECM) Injection system, mass Ignition coils (4-cyl. 15 air meter (6-cyl. engines) Control module - auto- 15 engines only), engine matic transmission control module Fuel leakage detection 5 (5-/6-cyl. engines), A/C compressor (not 15 A/C compressor (5-/6- 10 control module for 4-cyl. engines) cyl. engines), engine radiator shutter (5-cyl. valves, engine control engines) Relay-coils A/C, relay 5 module (6-cyl. coils in engine com- engines), solenoids (6- Fuel leakage detection, 7.5 partment cold zone for cyl. non-turbo only), A/C solenoid (4-cyl. Start/Stop mass air meter (6-cyl. engines) Starter motor relayA 30 only), oil level sensor Coolant pump (4-cyl. 50 (5-cyl. only) engines) Engine control module 20 (4-cyl. engines) Engine valves/oil 15 Cooling fan 60 (4/5- pump/center heated cyl. Ignition coils (5-/6-cyl. oxygen sensor (4-cyl. engines) engines), condenser engines) (6-cyl. engines) 80 (6-cyl. Front/rear heated oxy- 15 engines) Engine Control Module 20 gen sensors (4-cyl. (4-cyl. engines) engines), EVAP valve Power steering 100 (5-/6-cyl. engines), Engine Control Module 10 heated oxygen sensors A This position is not used on vehicles with the optional (5-cyl. & 6-cyl. engines) Start/Stop function, refer to the table "Engine compart- (5-/6-cyl. engines) ment cold zone" in Fuses – engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only) (p. 362).

356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

Related information • Fuses – glove compartment (p. 358) • Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 361)

357 10 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses – glove compartment The fuses under the glove compartment protect components such as the infotainment system and optional power seat. 10

Fusebox A: General fuses Positions: fusebox A Pos Function A Fusebox B: Control module fuses Pos Function A Keyless drive* (door handles) 5 Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse- Circuit breaker for the info- 40 boxes. tainment system and for fuses - 1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. 16-20 Controls in driver's door 20 2. The fuses are accessible. Windshield/tailgate washers 25 Controls in front passenger's 20 - door

- Controls in right rear pas- 20 senger's door -

358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A

Controls in left rear passeng- 20 - Courtesy lighting, rain sen- 7.5 er's door sor*, HomeLInk® Wireless Heated front passenger's 15 Control System* 10 Keyless drive* 7.5 seat* Steering wheel module 7.5 Power driver's seat* 20 Heated driver's seat* 15 Cental locking: fuel filler door 10 Power front passenger's seat* 20 Park assist* 5 Blind Spot Information Sys- Electrically heated steering 15 - tem (BLIS)*, park assist cam- wheel* Infotainment system display 5 era* Electrically heated windshield* 15 All Wheel Drive* control mod- 15 Infotainment system: ampli- 10 Tailgate unlock 10 ule fier, SiriusXM™ satellite radio* Active chassis system* 10 Electrical folding rear seat 10 Sensus control module 15 outboard head restraints*

Bluetooth hands-free system 5 Positions: fusebox B Fuel pump 20 Pos Function A - Climate system control panel 5 Tailgate wiper 15 Power moonroof* 5 - - Courtesy lighting, climate sys- Alarm, On-board diagnostic 5 tem sensor Front courtesy lighting, driv- 7.5 system 12-volt sockets in tunnel con- 15 er's door power window controls, power seat(s)*, Satellite radio *, audio system 10 sole amplifier Instrument panel 5 Heated rear seat* (passeng- 15 Airbag system, occupant 10 er's side) Adaptive cruise control/colli- 10 weight sensor Heated rear seat* (driver's 15 sion warning* Collision warning system* 5 side)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 359 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Pos Function A

Accelerator pedal sensor, 7.5 auto-dim mirror function, 10 heated rear seats*

Brake lights 5

Power moonroof* 20

Immobilizer 5

Related information • Fuses – engine compartment (p. 354) • Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 361) • Fuses – engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only) (p. 362)

360 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses – cargo area/trunk The fuses in the cargo area/trunk protect components such as trailer connections, the parking brake, etc. 10

Positions Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A 12-volt socket in cargo area 15 Trailer socket 1* 40 Electric parking brake (left 30 side) - -

Electric parking brake (right 30 - Related information side) Fuses – engine compartment (p. 354) - • Heated rear window 30 • Fuses – glove compartment (p. 358) - • Fuses – engine compartment cold zone Trailer socket 2* 15 (Start/Stop only) (p. 362) -

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 361 10 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses – engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only)7 There are fuses in the engine compartment cold zone on models with the Start/Stop 10 function.

Location of Start/Stop fuses

Positions Pos Function A Pos Function A • Fuses A1, A2 and 1–11 are relays/circuit breakers and should only be removed or Circuit breaker: central elec- 175 - replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo trical module in the engine service technician. compartment Circuit breaker: fusebox B 50 • Fuse 12 may be changed at any time under the glove compartment when necessary. Circuit breaker: fuseboxes 175 (see Fuses – glove compart- under the glove compartment (p. 358)) ment, central electrical module in the cargo area

7 Option on 4-cyl. engines

362 10 Maintenance and servicing

Pos Function A Related information • Fuses – engine compartment (p. 354) Circuit breaker: fusebox A 60 • Fuses – glove compartment (p. 358) under the glove compartment Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 361) (see Fuses – glove compart- • 10 ment (p. 358)) • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262)

Circuit breaker: fusebox A 60 under the glove compartment (see Fuses – glove compartment (p. 358))

Circuit breaker: central elec- 60 trical module in the cargo area

Climate system blower 40

– –

Starter motor relay 30

Internal diode 50

Auxiliary battery 70

Central electrical module: 15 auxiliary battery reference voltage, auxiliary battery charging point

363 10 Maintenance and servicing

Washing the car • Wash off the dirt from the underside for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or orna- The vehicle should be washed at regular inter- (wheel housings, fenders, etc). mental components such as chromed strips vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • In areas of high industrial fallout, more on the exterior of your vehicle. The instruc- adhere to the paint and may cause damage. frequent washing is recommended. tions for using these products should be fol- 10 To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly lowed carefully. Solvents or stain removers important to wash the car frequently in the NOTE should not be used. wintertime. When washing the car, remember to CAUTION The following points should be kept in mind remove dirt from the drain holes in the when washing and cleaning the car: doors and sills. • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. • Polishing chromed strips can wear Doing so may cause detergents and wax CAUTION • away or damage the surface to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid During high pressure washing, the • Polishes containing abrasive sub- scratching, use lukewarm water to soften spray mouthpiece must never be • stances should not be used the dirt before you wash with a soft closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. Do not spray into the locks. • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can Related information as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish reduce lighting capacity considerably. • Polishing and waxing (p. 365) may be permanently damaged. Clean the headlights regularly, for • Cleaning the interior (p. 366) • A detergent can be used to facilitate the example when refueling. softening of dirt and oil. Special moonroof cautions: • Dry the car with a clean chamois and • Always close the moonroof and sun remember to clean the drain holes in the shade before washing your vehicle. doors and rocker panels. • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on • Tar spots can be removed with tar the moonroof. remover after the car has been washed. • Never use wax on the rubber seals • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy around the moonroof. water can be used to clean the wiper blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility Exterior components considerably and also helps prolong the Volvo recommends the use of special clean- service life of the wiper blades. ing products, available at your Volvo retailer,

364 10 Maintenance and servicing

Automatic car wash CAUTION Polishing and waxing The vehicle should be washed at regular inter- Normally, polishing is not required during the Before driving into an automatic car vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • first year after delivery, however, waxing may wash, turn off the optional rain sensor adhere to the paint and may cause damage. be beneficial. to avoid damaging the windshield wip- 10 To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly ers. important to wash the car frequently in the • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle wintertime. • Make sure that side view mirrors, aux- must be washed and dried. Tar spots can iliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that be removed with kerosene or tar remover. • We do NOT recommend washing your any antenna(s) are retracted or Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing car in an automatic wash during the first removed. Otherwise there is risk of the compound. few months (because the paint will not machine dislodging them. • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. have hardened sufficiently). • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- • Several commercially available products • An automatic wash is a simple and quick plated wheels using the same deter- contain both polish and wax. way to clean your car, but it is worth gents used for the body of the vehicle. Waxing alone does not substitute for pol- remembering that it may not be as thor- Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can • ishing a dull surface. ough as when you yourself go over the permanently stain chrome-plated car with sponge and water. Keeping the wheels. • A wide range of polymer-based waxes underbody clean is most important, espe- can be purchased today. These waxes cially in the winter. Some automatic are easy to use and produce a long-last- washers do not have facilities for washing WARNING ing, high-gloss finish that protects the the underbody. • When the vehicle is driven immediately bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and after being washed, apply the brakes, fading. NOTE including the parking brake, several • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct times in order to remove any moisture sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should Condensation may form temporarily on the from the brake linings. not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C). inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This • Engine cleaning agents should not be is normal and the lights are designed to used when the engine is warm. This withstand moisture. Normally, condensa- constitutes a fire risk. tion will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time. Related information • Polishing and waxing (p. 365) • Cleaning the interior (p. 366) • Washing the car (p. 364)

}} 365 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| CAUTION Cleaning the interior Volvo also offers a special leather softener Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- that should be applied after the cleaner and Volvo does not recommend the use of ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, long-life or durable paint protection coat- and reduces friction between leather and ings, some of which may claim to prevent and follow the instructions included with the 10 pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coat- car care product. other finishes in the vehicle. ings have not been tested by Volvo for Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and Cleaning the interior compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat. conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four Some of them may cause the clear coat to times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by Upholstery care Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- application of paint protection coatings Fabric may not be covered under your vehicle's ener 943 7429. paint warranty. Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, Cleaning leather upholstery shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/ 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge Related information fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. • Washing the car (p. 364) retailer. 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the AlcanteraTM suede-like material sponge with circular movements. Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the soft cloth and mild soap solution. sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, Leather care do not rub. Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, towel, and allow the leather to dry com- sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the pletely. protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result. Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream protectant restores a barrier against soil and sunlight.

366 10 Maintenance and servicing

Protecting leather upholstery Cleaning a leather-covered steering CAUTION 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream wheel Sharp objects, such as rings, could dam- on a cloth and apply a thin coating of Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp • age the leather on the steering wheel. cream to the upholstery with light circular sponge and a neutral soap solution. movements. • Leather should be allowed to breath. 10 Cleaning the seat belts 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. Never cover the steering wheel with a plastic protector. Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild This will help the leather resist staining and soap solution. protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. • Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning the steering wheel with Cleaning floor mats Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and CAUTION The floor mats should be vacuumed or Leather Softener 943 7429. brushed clean regularly, especially during • Under no circumstances should gaso- If there are stains on the steering wheel: winter when they should be taken out for dry- line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents ing. Spots on textile mats can be removed be used on the plastic or the leather Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood) with a mild detergent. For best protection in since these can cause damage. winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo • Take extra care when removing stains – Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer. such as ink or lipstick since the color- wheel with a solution with 5% ammonia. ing can spread. For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood • Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol- of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and surfaces vent can damage the seat padding. wipe the stain. Cleaning interior plastic components should be done with a cleaning agent specially Start from the outside of the stain and Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate) • designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo work toward the center. 1. Same procedure as for type I stains. retailer. • Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing 2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorb- may damage the textile upholstery. ent paper or a towel. • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as Type 3 (dry soil or dust) new jeans or suede garments, may 1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush. stain the upholstery. 2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

}} 367 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| CAUTION Touching up paintwork Paint damage requires immediate attention to Do not use cleaning agents with high • avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the fin- alcohol content such as washer fluid ish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. to clean instrument panel glass. 10 Touch-up if necessary. • Never spray cleaning agents or water directly onto components with electri- Paint repairs require special equipment and cal buttons or controls. Clean compo- skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any nents of this type by applying the extensive damage. cleaning agent/water sparingly to a cloth and wiping the components so Minor scratches can be repaired by using that no liquid penetrates into these Volvo touch-up paint. components. Color code Sample color code: Canadian models Make sure you have the right color. See Label Related information information (p. 371) for the location of this Washing the car (p. 364) • label (label number 4 in the illustration). Minor stone chips and scratches Material: • Primer – can • Paint – touch-up pen • Brush • Masking tape If the stone chip has not gone down to the Sample color code: US models bare metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you can add paint immediately after removing dirt.

NOTE When touching up the vehicle, it should be clean and dry. The surface temperature should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

368 10 Maintenance and servicing

Repairing stone chips

10 G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each application. 4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish. Related information • Label information (p. 371)

369 SPECIFICATIONS 11 Specifications

Label information The labels in your vehicle provide information such as the chassis number, paint code, tire inflation pressure, etc.

}} 371 11 Specifications

|| Location of labels

372 11 Specifications

List of labels Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- Vehicle Emission Control Information. ards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli- Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) stand- cable emission standards, as evidenced ards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to by the certification label on the underside meet all applicable safety standards, as of the hood. For further information regar- evidenced by the certification label on the ding these regulations, please consult driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem- your Volvo retailer. ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This label Engine oil. This label contains the recom- 11 mended engine oil specifications. also includes codes for paint color, etc. For further information regarding these Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). regulations, please consult your Volvo The VIN plate is located on the top left retailer. U.S. models have the upper surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle decal; Canadian models have the lower Identification Number (VIN) should always one. be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when Related information ordering parts. • Weights (p. 378) Tire inflation pressures. This label indi- • Engine specifications (p. 380) cates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory.

373 11 Specifications

Dimensions This section lists your vehicle's most important dimensions.

374 11 Specifications

}} 375 11 Specifications

|| Dimensions–V60

Posi- Dimension in. (mm) Posi- Dimension in. (mm) Posi- Dimension in. (mm) tion tion tion

A Ground clear- E Load length, J Load width, ance (curb floor 38.5 (978) floor 42.6 (1082) weight + 2 people)A 4.9 (124) F Height 58.4 (1484) K Width 73.4 (1865)

B Wheelbase 109.3 (2776) G Load height 25.9 (658) B C Length 182.5 (4635) H Track, front 62.5 (1588) / 62.1 (1578)C D Load length, floor, seatback I Track, rear 62.4 (1585)B/ down 68.9 (1749) 62.0 (1575)C

376 11 Specifications

Posi- Dimension in. (mm) tion

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 82.6 (2097)

M Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 74.8 (1899) 11

A Varies slightly depending on tire size, optional sport chassis, etc. B with 16" wheels C with 17" wheels

377 11 Specifications

Weights The following table lists important weight data for your vehicle.

Category USA Canada Gross vehicle weight 4740 lbs 2150 kg A 4-cyl. FWD 4920 lbs 2230 kg 11 B 5-cyl. AWD 5100 lbs 2310 kg 6-cyl. AWD

Capacity weight All models: 950 lbs 430 kg Permissible axle weights, front 2580 lbs 1170 kg 4-cyl. FWD 2650 lbs 1200 kg 5-cyl. AWD 2760 lbs 1250 kg 6-cyl. AWD Permissible axle weights, rear 2300 lbs 1040 kg 4-cyl. FWD 2410 lbs 1090 kg 5-cyl. AWD 2410 lbs 1090 kg 6-cyl. AWD

Curb weight 3620 - 3960 lbs 1640 - 1800 kg

Max. roof load 165 lbs 75 kg

378 11 Specifications

Category USA Canada

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

A Front Wheel Drive 11 B All Wheel Drive Related information • Loading specifications (p. 306) • Loading specifications – load limit (p. 306)

379 11 Specifications

Engine specifications Some of the engines listed here may not The following table provides technical data for be available in all markets. the respective engines. Engine specifications for Special Edition vehicles may vary. Engine specifications Specification/Model 5-cyl. 3.0 T6 2.0 4-cyl. T9 2.0 4-cyl. T11

Engine designation B5254T12 B6304T4 B4204T9 B4204T11 11 Output (kW/rps) 187/90 224/93 225/95 179/93

Output (hp/rpm) 250/5400 rpm 300/5600 302/5700 240/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 360/30-70 440/35–70 400/35–75 350/25-75

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 266/1800-4200 325/2100– 4200 295/2100–4500 258/1500–4500

No. of cylinders 5 6 4 4

Bore (in/mm) 3.27/83 3.23/82 3.27/82 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.63/92.3 3.67/93.2 3.63/93.2 3.67/93.2

Displacement 2.497 liters / (152.4 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.) 1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.) 1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 9.5:1 9.3:1 10.3:1 10.8:1

Related information • Coolant – specification and volume (p. 383) • Oil specifications (p. 381) • Oil volume (p. 382)

380 11 Specifications

Oil specifications good fuel economy and engine protection. Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum See the viscosity chart. ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy, engine performance, or engine protection.

Volvo recommends:

Viscosity chart Extreme engine operation SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 requirements is recommended for extreme driving conditions. Refer to the warranty and Service Records information booklet for information on oil CAUTION change intervals and oil type requirements. 4-cylinder engines only: Volvo oil VCC RBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 is recommended for NOTE extreme driving conditions. This vehicle comes from the factory with This oil must never be used in 5- or 6-cyl- synthetic oil. inder engines.

Oil additives must not be used. Related information Oil volume (p. 382) Oil viscosity • Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life • Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 333) under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

381 11 Specifications

Oil volume engines may not be available in all markets. The following table provides technical data for Engine specifications for Special Edition vehi- the respective engines. Some of these cles may vary.

Engine model Volume (incl. filter)

3.0 T6 (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

T12 (5 cyl.) B5254T12 5.8 US qts (5.5 liters) 11 All 4-cyl. engines 5.7 US qts (5.4 liters)

Related information • Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 333) • Oil specifications (p. 381)

382 11 Specifications

Coolant – specification and volume Transmission oil – specification and Brake fluid – specification and volume The table lists coolant volumes and specifica- volumes Brake fluid transfers braking force when the tions. The table lists transmission oil1 volumes and brake pedal is depressed to the master cylin- specifications. der and to the slave cylinders on each wheel. System Volume Specifica- Specification: tion Auto- Volume Specifi- DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (>280 °C) matic cation 3.0 T6/T5 9.4 US qts. Coolant with trans- Volume: 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) (8.9 liters) corrosion mission 11 inhibitor mixed Related information All 4-cyl. 8.8 US qts. with water TF-80SC 7.4 US qts Transmis- • Engine compartment – brake fluid (p. 336) engines (8.3 liters) (50/50 mix), (7 liters) sion fluid see packag- AW1 ing. TG-81SC 7 US qts ( 6.6 liters) Related information TF-71SC 7.1 US qts Engine compartment – coolant (p. 335) • (6.8 liters)

Related information • Label information (p. 371)

1 Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

383 11 Specifications

Power steering – specification Fuel tank volume – specification and Air conditioning – specification and This fluid is used to help reduce and regulate volume volume steering force. The table lists the fuel tank volume for your The air conditioning system in your vehicle vehicle. contains the following: Specification:Power steering fluid recommended by Volvo. Volume Specification Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a) Volume: 1.7 lbs (770 g) Related information 17.8 US gallons (67.5 lit- – • Engine compartment – power steering ers) Compressor oil: PAG 11 fluid (p. 337) Related information • Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler door (p. 283) • Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap (p. 284) • Refueling – octane rating (p. 282) • Engine specifications (p. 380)

384 11 Specifications

Battery specifications If the battery is replaced, replace it with a bat- 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter- tery of the same cold start capacity as the nator. Single pole system in which the chas- original (see the decal on the battery). sis and engine block are used as conductors. The negative terminal is connected to the General information chassis.

WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! 11 Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead com- pounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Motor Voltage (V) Cold start capacity CCA (Cold Cranking Amperes) (A)

Engines with Start/Stop* 12 800A

All other engines 12 520–800

A AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) batteries have to be used on models with Start/Stop

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 385 11 Specifications

Symbols – general information driver with necessary information about one Warning symbols The following tables list the most common of the vehicle's systems. The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and Related information warning and indicator lights and symbols and a reference to where more detailed informa- a reference to where more detailed informa- Information displays – indicator symbols tion can be found. • tion can be found. (p. 70) Introduction • Information displays – warning symbols : The red warning symbol illuminates to The symbols in the vehicle's various displays (p. 72) indicate a problem related to safety and/or are divided into three main categories: • Information display – messages (p. 112) drivability. A message will also appear in the 11 main instruments panel's display. • Warning symbols • Indicator symbols : The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the • Information symbols driver with necessary information about one The following tables list the most common of the vehicle's systems. symbols, their meaning and the pages in this manual that provide more detailed information.

NOTE Not all of the symbols shown in the related articles are available in all models or on all markets. Local variations may occur.

Warning symbol : The red warning symbol illuminates to indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display. Information symbol : The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the

386 11 Specifications

Symbols in the main instrument panel Indicator symbols Symbol Description See Warning symbols in the instrument The following tables list the most common panel warning and indicator lights and symbols and Stability system, Hill (p. 70) a reference to where more detailed informa- Descent Control, Symbol Description See tion can be found. Trailer Stability Assist* Low oil pressure (p. 72) : The red warning symbol illuminates to indicate a problem related to safety and/or Tire pressure moni- (p. 70) Parking brakeA (p. 72) drivability. A message will also appear in the toring sensor (TPMS) main instruments panel's display. 11 Low fuel level (p. 70) SRS airbags (p. 72) : The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the Information symbol, (p. 70) Seat belt reminder (p. 72) driver with necessary information about one see text in informa- of the vehicle's systems. tion display Generator not charg- (p. 72) ing Indicator symbols in the instrument High beam indicator (p. 70) panel Fault in the brake sys- (p. 72) Symbol Description See Left turn signal indi- (p. 70) tem cator Fault in the Active (p. 70) Warning symbol (p. 72) Bending Light Right turn signal indi- (p. 70) (ABL)*system cator A The symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital instrument panel. Malfunction indicator (p. 70) Stability system , (p. 170) Related information light Sport mode Information displays – indicator symbols • Anti-lock brake sys- (p. 70) (p. 70) Related information tem (ABS) • Information displays – warning symbols • Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 72) Rear fog lights on (p. 70) (p. 70) • Information display – messages (p. 112) • Information displays – warning symbols (p. 72) • Information display – messages (p. 112)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 387 11 Specifications

Information symbols Symbol Description See Symbol Description See The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and Camera sensor, (p. 210) Driver Alert Sys- (p. 222) a reference to where more detailed informa- laser sensor (p. 203) tem* (Lane tion can be found. Departure Warning/ Lane Keeping Aid) : The red warning symbol illuminates to Collision Warning (p. 215) indicate a problem related to safety and/or with Full Auto- Driver Alert Sys- (p. 222) drivability. A message will also appear in the brake and Pedes- tem* (Lane 11 main instruments panel's display. trian Detection* Departure Warning/ Lane Keeping Aid) : The information symbol illuminates and Active Bending (p. 90) a text message is displayed to provide the Lights (ABL)* Driver Alert Sys- (p. 222) driver with necessary information about one tem* (Lane of the vehicle's systems. Departure Warning/ Driver Alert Sys- (p. 217) Lane Keeping Aid) Information symbols in the instrument tem* panel Fuel tank on pas- (p. 283) senger's side of the Symbol Description See Driver Alert Sys- (p. 217) vehicle Adaptive Cruise (p. 179) tem* Control * Related information • Information displays – indicator symbols Adaptive Cruise (p. 179) Parking brake (p. 274) (p. 70) Control * • Information displays – warning symbols Rain sensor* (p. 97) (p. 72) Adaptive Cruise (p. 179) Control * • Information display – messages (p. 112) Active High Beams (p. 88) Adaptive Cruise (p. 179) (AHB)* Control * (Distance alert) Windshield sensor* (p. 88)

Radar sensor* (p. 188)

388 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11 Specifications

Information symbols – ceiling console Information symbols – center console Symbol Description See The following tables list the most common The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and warning and indicator lights and symbols and BluetoothTM Sensus Info- a reference to where more detailed informa- a reference to where more detailed informa- hands-free tainment sup- tion can be found. tion can be found. plement : The red warning symbol illuminates to : The red warning symbol illuminates to HD radio Sensus Info- indicate a problem related to safety and/or indicate a problem related to safety and/or tainment sup- drivability. A message will also appear in the drivability. A message will also appear in the plement main instruments panel's display. main instruments panel's display. 11 Park Assist* (p. 232) : The information symbol illuminates and : The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one driver with necessary information about one Related information of the vehicle's systems. of the vehicle's systems. • Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 70) Symbol Description See Symbol Description See • Information displays – warning symbols (p. 72) Seat belt reminder (p. 30) Audio files Sensus Info- • Information display – messages (p. 112) tainment sup- Occupant Weight Sen- (p. 36) plement sor CD folder Sensus Info- tainment sup- Related information plement • Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 70) Video files Sensus Info- • Information displays – warning symbols tainment sup- (p. 72) plement • Information display – messages (p. 112) Bluetooth- Sensus Info- connected cell tainment sup- phone plement

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 389 12 Index

A Approach lighting...... 96, 149 Brake system Auto-dim rearview mirror...... 102 ABS...... 273 ABS (anti-lock brake system)...... 273 Brake pad inspection...... 271 Automatic locking retractor...... 47 Accessory installation warning...... 23 checking fluid level...... 336 Automatic transmission emergency brake assistance...... 274 Active chassis system...... 169 Eco (driving function)...... 267 fluid...... 383 Active high beams...... 88 Geartronic...... 259 general information...... 271 Active yaw control...... 169, 170 general description...... 257, 259 Hill Descent Control...... 269, 270 oil...... 383 Adaptive brake lights...... 273 Bulbs shiftlock override...... 261 Adaptive cruise control...... 179, 180 cargo area lighting...... 344 Axle weight...... 306 headlights... 338, 339, 340, 341, 342, 343 Airbags 12 introduction...... 338 disconnecting the front passenger’s license plate lights...... 344 side...... 36 B specifications...... 345 front...... 33 inflatable curtain...... 41 Battery side impact...... 39 maintenance...... 350, 351 C Air conditioning...... 128, 129 remote key, replacing...... 154 Air distribution...... 124, 130 replacing...... 351 Camera, Park Assist...... 241 specifications...... 385 Air distribution table...... 132 Capacity weight...... 306 start/stop...... 385 Air vents...... 124 warning symbols...... 349 Cargo area changing bulbs...... 344 Alarm...... 164, 165, 166 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 245 steel grid...... 143 All Wheel Drive...... 269 Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)...... 247 Cargo area cover...... 143 Ambient temperature sensor...... 75 Booster cushion, integrated...... 57, 59, 60 Cargo area net...... 141 Anti-freeze...... 280, 335 Booster cushions...... 54 Cargo net...... 141 Anti-lock brake system Brake lights...... 273 warning light...... 71 Catalytic converter...... 285 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 273

390 12 Index

Central locking system, introduction 146, Collision warning system.. 204, 206, 209, Distance Alert...... 193 147, 150, 153 210, 212, 213 Dome lighting...... 94 Chains...... 309 Compass in rearview mirror...... 103 Door mirrors...... 100, 101 Check Engine warning light...... 71 Connected service booking...... 329 Driver alert...... 217, 218, 219, 220 Child restraints Conserving electrical current...... 279 Lane Departure Warning..... 222, 223, recalls and registration...... 47 Convertible seats...... 51 224, 225 Lane Keeping Aid...... 227, 228, 230, 231 Child restraint systems...... 47 Coolant...... 335, 383 booster cushions...... 54 Driver distraction warning...... 23 Cooling system, general information...... 279 convertible seats...... 51 Driving economically...... 285 infant seats...... 49 Corner traction control...... 170 Driving in cold weather...... 280 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 55 Courtesy lighting...... 94 12 Driving through water...... 278 top tether anchors...... 56 Crash event data...... 18 Child safety...... 46 Crash mode...... 44, 45 booster cushions...... 54 Cruise control...... 176, 178 child restraint systems...... 47 E adaptive...... 179 convertible seats...... 51 ECC...... 127, 128 infant seats...... 49 Curb weight...... 306 Eco (driving function)...... 267 Child safety locks...... 61 Current, conserving...... 279 Eco coast...... 267 City safety...... 197, 198 Cyclist detection...... 208, 212 Eco guide...... 69 Climate system...... 129 air distribution...... 124, 130, 132 Economical driving...... 285 air vents...... 124 D Electrically heated steering wheel...... 86 Interior Air Quality System...... 123 Electrical sockets...... 137 introduction...... 122 Daytime running lights...... 87 passenger compartment filter...... 123 Defroster...... 129 Electric parking brake...... 274, 275, 276, 277 refrigerant...... 122 Detachable key blade...... 151, 152 Electronic Climate Control...... 126, 128 air distribution table...... 132 Clock, setting...... 76 Disconnecting the front passenger’s air- Interior Air Quality System...... 123 Cold weather driving...... 280 bag...... 36

391 12 Index

Electronic oil level sensor...... 334 Floor mats Gauges...... 66 Electronic stability control...... 169 cleaning...... 367 Geartronic...... 259 placing correctly...... 252 Emergency locking retractor...... 47 Geartronic automatic transmission...... 259 Fluid specifications...... 383, 384 Emergency starting...... 256 Generator warning light...... 73 Fog lights...... 71 Emergency towing...... 289, 290, 291 Glossary of tire terminology...... 307 rear...... 92 Emission inspection readiness...... 329 Grocery bag holder...... 141 Four C (active chassis system)...... 169 Engine Gross vehicle weight...... 306 Front airbags...... 33 overheating...... 73 disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 36 specifications...... 380 Start/Stop...... 262, 263, 264, 265, 266 Front park assist...... 232, 240 H 12 starting...... 252 Front seats...... 78 switching off...... 254, 255 heated...... 127 Hazard warning flashers...... 93 Engine compartment overview...... 332 Fuel filler cap...... 284 Headlights Engine Drag Control (EDC)...... 170 Fuel filler door, opening...... 283, 284 Active Bending Lights...... 90 active high beams...... 88 Engine oil...... 381 Fuel level warning light...... 71 changing bulbs... 339, 340, 341, 342, 343 checking...... 333 Fuel requirements...... 281, 282 daytime running lights...... 87 low pressure warning light...... 72 Fuel tank volume...... 384 high/low beams...... 88 volumes...... 382 Fuses...... 353, 354, 361 high beam flash...... 88 Engine remote start (ERS)...... 254 tunnel detection...... 90 Environment...... 22 Headlight washers...... 97 G Head restraints, rear seat...... 82, 83 Heated front seats...... 127 F Garage door opener HomeLink® Wireless Control Heated oxygen sensors...... 285 Federal Clean Air Act...... 326 System...... 106, 107 Heated rear seats...... 127 Flat tires Gasoline requirements...... 282 Heated steering wheel...... 86 repairing with tire sealing system...... 318 Gas tank volume...... 384 Heated windshield...... 102, 129

392 12 Index

High beams...... 88 Inspection readiness...... 329 K active...... 88 Instrument lighting...... 91 Hill Descent Control...... 269, 270 "theater" lighting...... 91 Key blade. 146, 147, 150, 151, 152, 153, 156 private locking...... 152 Hill Start Assist (HSA)...... 257 Instrument overview...... 63, 66 Keyless drive...... 155 Hoisting the vehicle...... 328 Instrument panel...... 66, 111, 112 general description...... 156, 157, 158 HomeLink® Wireless Control Integrated two-stage booster starting the vehicle...... 252 System...... 106, 107 cushion...... 57, 59, 60 Keyless locking/unlocking...... 155 Home safe lighting...... 95 Interior Air Quality System...... 123 Hood, opening/closing...... 331 Interior lighting...... 94 Horn...... 86 Internet connection L 12 booking service...... 329 Labels ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 55 I list of...... 373 location of...... 372 ID, Volvo...... 21 J Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 222, 223, 224, 225 Ignition modes...... 76, 77 Lane Keeping Aid...... 227, 228, 230, 231 Immobilizer...... 148 Jack attaching...... 296 LATCH anchors...... 55 Important information...... 13, 14 location of...... 296 Leather care...... 366 Indicator lights...... 66, 68, 72 Jump starting...... 256 Lighting panel...... 87 Infant seats...... 49 Loading the vehicle...... 139, 140, 306 Inflatable Curtain...... 41 roof loads...... 139 Inflation pressure...... 301, 302 Locking...... 159, 160, 162 Inflation pressure table...... 305 tailgate...... 162 Information and warning symbols, table Locking the vehicle...... 149 of...... 386 Locks, child safety...... 61 Information lights...... 66, 68, 72

393 12 Index

Low beams...... 88 O Parking brake Low oil pressure warning light...... 72 electric, applying/releasing. 274, 275, Occupant safety...... 26 276, 277 Occupant weight sensor...... 36 warning light...... 72 M Octane recommendations...... 282 Parking lights...... 92 Odometer, trip...... 76 Pedestrian detection...... 209, 212 Main instrument panel...... 111, 112 Oil Polishing...... 365 Maintenance...... 326 checking...... 333 Power front seat hoisting the vehicle...... 328 volumes...... 382 memory function...... 79 performed by the owner...... 327 Oil level sensor...... 334 Power meter...... 69 Malfunction indicator light...... 71 12 Oil quality...... 381 Power mirrors...... 100, 101 Messages in the instrument panel... 111, 112 OK button...... 111, 112 defroster...... 102 Mirrors Power moonroof...... 104, 105 defroster...... 102 On Call Roadside Assistance...... 24 power door...... 100, 101 Outside temperature sensor...... 75 Power steering adjustable...... 174 rearview, auto-dim function...... 102 Overhead courtesy lighting...... 94 retractable...... 100, 101 fluid...... 337 Overheating, engine...... 73 vanity...... 138 Power steering fluid...... 384 Ownership, changing...... 18 Moonroof...... 104, 105 Power windows...... 99 Oxygen sensors, heated...... 285 Motor oil Pregnancy, using seat belts during...... 31 checking...... 333 Private locking...... 152 volumes...... 382 P PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 256, 352, 385 N Paint, touching up...... 368 Park assist...... 232, 240 R Net in cargo area...... 141 Park Assist Camera...... 241 Rain sensor...... 97 Park Assist Pilot...... 236 Rear fog lights...... 92

394 12 Index

Rear park assist...... 232, 240 Reporting safety defects...... 27 Service Rear seat head restraints...... 83 Roadside Assistance...... 24 connected service booking...... 329 Rear seats Road sign information (RSI)...... 174 Shiftlock...... 14 override...... 261 center head restraint...... 82 Roof loads...... 139 folding...... 82, 84 Side door mirrors...... 100, 101 heated...... 127 Side impact airbags...... 39 Rearview mirror S Sign information (RSI)...... 174 auto-dim function...... 102 Snow chains...... 309 compass...... 103 Safety, occupant...... 26 Snow tires...... 309, 310 Rear window defroster...... 102 Safety defects, reporting...... 27 Spare tire...... 299 Recalls...... 26 Safety mode...... 44 12 Spin control...... 169, 170 Recalls, child restraints...... 47 Seat belt SRS...... 31 Refrigerant...... 384 reminder...... 30 Stability system...... 169, 170, 172 Refueling...... 281, 282 Seat belts Corner Traction Control (CTC)...... 170 fuel filler cap...... 284 Automatic locking retractor/Emer- Engine Drag Control (EDC)...... 170 fuel filler door...... 283, 284 gency locking retractor...... 47 indicator light...... 71 fuel tank volume...... 384 buckling...... 29 maintenance...... 29 Start/Stop (engine function)..... 262, 263, Registering child restraints...... 47 pretensioners...... 28 264, 265, 266 Remote control reminder...... 30 Starting the engine...... 252 private locking...... 152 reminder warning light...... 72 remote start...... 254 Remote key...... 146, 147, 150, 153 securing child restraint systems.... 49, with keyless drive...... 252 approach lighting...... 149 51, 54 Starting the vehicle immobilizer...... 148 unbuckling...... 29 after a crash (crash mode)...... 44, 45 key blade.... 146, 147, 150, 151, 152, 153 use during pregnancy...... 31 locking the vehicle...... 149 using...... 28 Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...... 148 replacing the battery...... 154 Seats, front...... 78, 79 Steel grid in cargo area...... 143 unlocking the vehicle...... 149 Sensus...... 110

395 12 Index

Steering wheel Tire designations...... 303 Towing the vehicle...... 289, 290, 291 adjusting...... 85 Tire inflation pressure...... 305 Traction control...... 169, 170 heated...... 86 Tire Monitor...... 315, 316, 317 Trailer towing...... 287, 288 horn...... 86 keypad...... 86 Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 311, 314 Transmission indicator light...... 71 general description...... 257, 259 Steering wheel paddles...... 86 Tires...... 293 Hill Start Assist...... 257 Stone chips, touching up...... 368 age...... 294 oil...... 383 Storage spaces...... 135 changing from summer to winter...... 296 shiftlock override...... 261 Studded tires...... 309, 310 glossary of terms...... 307 Tread wear indicator...... 295 Sunroof (moonroof)...... 104, 105 improving economy...... 295 Trip computer...... 113 inflation pressure...... 301, 302 12 Sun shade...... 99 Trip odometers...... 76 inflation pressure table...... 305 Supplemental restraint system...... 31 rotation...... 293 Trips, long distance...... 279 warning light...... 72 snow...... 309, 310 Tunnel detection...... 90 Symbols, overview...... 386 spare...... 299 Turn signals...... 93 specifications...... 303 changing bulbs...... 343 speed ratings...... 303 indicator lights...... 71 storing...... 294 T Two-stage booster cushion...... 57, 59, 60 studded...... 309, 310 Tailgate tire pressure monitoring system...... 311 locking/unlocking...... 162 tire sealing system...... 318 opening manually...... 163 tread wear indicator...... 295 U wiper/washer...... 98 uniform tire quality grading...... 308 Uniform Tire Quality Grading...... 308 Tailgate wipers...... 348 Tire sealing system...... 318 Unlocking the tailgate...... 162 Temperature sensor Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- Unlocking the vehicle...... 149, 159, 160, 162 ambient...... 75 tems)...... 56 Temporary spare tire...... 299 Touching up paint...... 368 Three-way catalytic converter...... 285 Towing a trailer...... 287, 288

396 12 Index

V Washer fluid...... 348 Washers Vanity mirror...... 138 headlight...... 97 changing bulbs...... 345 windshield...... 96 Vehicle Event Data...... 18 Water, driving through...... 278 Vehicle information...... 20 Waxing...... 365 Vehicle loading...... 139, 140, 306 Weights...... 378 roof loads...... 139 Wheels...... 293 Vehicle maintenance...... 326 changing...... 296 performed by the owner...... 327 storing...... 294 Vehicle weights...... 378 Whiplash Protection System...... 42 12 Volvo and the environment...... 22 Windows Volvo ID...... 21 power...... 99 Volvo maintenance...... 326 sun shade...... 99 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 24 Windshield heated...... 102, 129 Volvo programs...... 24 rain sensor...... 97 Volvo Sensus...... 110 washers...... 97 wipers/washers...... 96 W Windshield washer fluid...... 348 Windshield wipers...... 346 Warning flashers, hazard...... 93 service position...... 346 Warning lights...... 66, 68, 72 Wiper blades replacing...... 346 Warning symbol...... 73 replacing tailgate wiper...... 348 Warning system, collision...... 204, 206, 212 Warranties...... 326

397 12 Index

398